The destiny of the United States

NYPL RESEARCH LIBRARIES

3 3433 07952949 5

A^H

.*fN

r

mith

%

S

H't

THE DESTINY OF
THE UNITED STATES

BY

SNELL SMITH
I

"The traditions of the American People
are sound and their ideals will endure
when the dynasties of old are decayed
and forgotten. "

Theodore E. Burton

1917 .,
ROBERT J. SHORES, Publisher
NEW YORK

c/^^^^

TK£ I!:.W YCF.K

5Si952A

A-rOR, l-ENOX AIhu

TILD EN hT. U N DATi J N S

a I93i . L

Copyright, 191 7, by
ROBERT J. SHORES

Sei up and electrotyped in the
United States of America

TO

MY FATHER

Kindly and sympathetic friend
throughout a lifetime

FOREWORD

The observations contained in this volume are
the result of twenty years of newspaper experi-
ence on the respective staffs of the Washington
Post, New York Tribune, Chicago City Press As-
sociation, New Orleans Times-Democrat, New Or-
leans Picayune, San Francisco Chronicle, El Paso
Herald and Grand Rapids Herald. As Wash-
ington correspondent and political writer, observer
of the proceedings of the House and Senate, and
reporter of every sort of an assignment from mu-
nicipal affairs to interviewing national leaders —
working and becoming familiar with conditions
in every section of the country — I have had, it
seems to me, an opportunity of forming definite
and trustworthy opinions regarding the people of
the United States. The logic of the conclusions
advanced I must leave to the reader; the proof
of their honesty rests in daily labors in the pre-
sentation of fact. As secretary of the National
Republican League for a term, and connected
with the preliminary contest of William H. Taft
for the Presidency and the Hughes campaign, I
have known politics from a practical standpoint.
As an expert on land values in the Census of
1900 and a student at the School of International
Jurisprudence and Diplomacy of Columbian (now

FOREWORD

George Washington) University, I have come
in contact with the actual workings of govern-
ment. Obedient to the injunction of Napoleon
to his son, I have tried to "read and reflect upon
history." The deductions made are the result of
several years of careful research and analysis. If
I am too warlike in the second chapter, it may
be due to the same patriotic ardor which inspired
me to enlist in 1898, though held back because
too young to serve. If the chapters on "The
Man" and "The Prophecies of Daniel" may seem
to take up too much space in the discussion of
the philosophical, religious and mystical, it is be-
cause they are relevant to the continuity of the
book.

I trust that the pro-German conclusions of the
first chapter will not be regarded as prejudiced.
I have tried to arrive at them after scientific in-
vestigation. They should not have been influ-
enced by ancestral predilection. The late Lord
Pauncefote, British ambassador to this country,
was a kinsman of my father. I am descended
from four generations of English artists. These
forebears settled in New York City in 1811. On
my mother's side my forerunners have been Amer-
ican for more than two centuries. They were of
Hollandish and Rhenish-Bavarian descent. In
1707 they established themselves in the Mohawk
Valley in New York State. One fought in Queen

FOREWORD

Anne's war. In the battle of Oriskany in the
Revolution nine Snells were engaged, seven
brothers and two cousins. In an afternoon six of
the brothers and one of the cousins died for lib-
erty. I am descended from the brother who sur-
vived. My grandfather, Conrad P. Snell, served
in the New York legislature. If I have shown by
these words the basis of unprejudiced conviction
and that I am not un-American because an ex-
ponent of German victory in this war, the use of
so many personal pronouns is justified.

Lest it appear to some that I am too sanguine
of the future of the United States, I quote an
anecdote related by John Fiske: "Among the
legends of our late Civil War there is a story of
a dinner party by the Americans residing in Paris,
at which were propounded sundry toasts concern-
ing, not so much the past and present, as the ex-
pected glories of the great American nation. In
the general character of these toasts geographical
considerations were very prominent, and the prin-
cipal fact which seemed to occupy the minds of the
speakers was the unprecedented bigness of our
country. 'Here's to the United States,' said the
first speaker, 'bounded on the north by British
America, on the south by the Gulf of Mexico, on
the east by the Atlantic and on the west by the
Pacific Ocean.' 'But,' said the second speaker,
'this is far too limited a view of the subject:
in assigning our boundaries we must look to the

FOREWORD

great and glorious future which is prescribed for
us by the Manifest Destiny of the Anglo-Saxon
Race. Here's to the United States, — bounded
on the north by the North Pole, on the south
by the South Pole, on the east by the rising
sun and on the west by the setting sun.' Em-
phatic applause greeted this aspiring prophecy.
But here arose the third speaker — a very serious
gentleman from the Far West. 'If we are go-
ing,' said this truly patriotic American, 'to leave
the historic past and present, and take our mani-
fest destiny into account, why restrict ourselves
within the narrow limits assigned by our fellow-
countryman who has just sat down*? I give you
the United States, — bounded on the north by the
Aurora Borealis, on the south by the procession
of the equinoxes, on the east by the primeval chaos,
and on the west by the Day of Judgment I' "

January, 1917.

POSTSCRIPT

As the book is about to go to press President
Wilson has severed diplomatic relations with Ger-
many. The flag is always first. If the Congress
of the United States actually declares war against
the Central Powers, I shall be among the first to

^^^is^- Snell Smith.

February 7, 1917.

CONTENTS

PAGE

I The Law of Blood by Which Germany

Must Expand i

II War the Great Civilizer 80

III Is A New Era Dawning*? 109

IV The Significance of the United States 133
V Menaces to the Republic .... 154

VI Menaces to Liberty ...... 178

VII Some Remedies Suggested 200

VIII The United States of North America 228

IX The Future of the Pacific Ocean . .251

X The Atlantic Ocean and South America 271

XI Germany Again 290

XII The Man 310

XIII The Federation of the World . . . 352

XrV The Prophecies of Daniel 383

THE DESTINY OF THE
UNITED STATES

CHAPTER I

THE LAW OF BLOOD BY WHICH GERMANY
MUST EXPAND

"For behold the Lord cometh out of his place to visit
the iniquity of the inhabitants of the earth upon them;
and the earth shall disclose her blood and be no longer
a cover for her slain." — Isaiah 26:21.

That Germany must inevitably succeed in the
present world struggle ^ and that it is best for civ-
ilization that its arms triumph is written in the law
of blood, amply verified by fifty empires and as
many centuries of history.

That law, simply expressed, is this: After an
amalgamation of several peoples into one by a
transfusion of new blood among a large proportion
of the original population of a country throughout
almost exactly three hundred years, the nation
thus created reaches its maximum of strength,
conquers its rivals and does its work in the world.
Whenever it attains this apex it expands in the

1 January, 1917.

2 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

territory it has conquered. Then it passes into
decay and maintains its power only until a more
virile people arises to wrest its supremacy from it.
After that it resumes the boundaries it had before
expansion. Thus civilization is like a torch car-
ried b)^ the strongest. When the arm that up-
holds it becomes weak it is seized b)^ another and
borne along.

This uniform rule is but an extension of that
invariably applicable to the individual. When a
person is depleted in strength his physician advises
him by diet, exercise or medicine to produce new
blood in order to gain fresh strength. In extreme
cases of illness the surgeon will make a transfu-
sion from the blood of a healthier person. Chil-
dren of parents of differing type and nationality
are brighter and stronger. Variation produces
better animal breeds. "During the course of many
years of investigation into the plant life of the
world," says Burbank, "creating new forms, modi-
fying old ones, adapting others to new conditions
and blending still others, I have been constantly
impressed with the similarity between the organ-
ization and development of plant and human life.
. . . The crossing of species is to me para-
mount." ^

Proceeding further, the effect of a strong body
upon a healthy mind is constantly apparent. The

2 "The Training of the Human Plant," by Luther Burbank,
pp. 3-4-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 3

greatest men of action in the world's history
grounded their genius in splendid vitality. Alex-
ander, Csesar, Napoleon, are examples. Such men
have always arisen at the zenith of a nation, which
at that time has given its best in all achievement.
Good blood, racing through the arteries and pulsat-
ing along the nerves that feed the brain, quickens
and lends force to thought. A man at the height
of his power gives his utmost to his fellows,
whether it be laying a brick upon a wall or guiding
an empire. New blood transmitted among older
peoples produces a new people, a new nation and
preeminent men to lead it. Then at its maximum
that nation leaves its imprint upon posterity.

If it can be proven to a certainty that in the case
of every empire of which we have record it reached
its maximum after this transfusion throughout
three hundred years; that in those cases where the
facts are not all available, as in ancient days, the
exact time cannot be verified but the amalgamation
of blood prior to conquering sway is clear; that in
the few cases where there has been no transfusion
there has been no empire, and that where the ex-
panded people has become exhausted, returned to
original limits and been retransfused a new empire
has developed, then it must be concluded that this
law is universal and is the cause of the rise and
decay of nations. If it can be proven that this
law is universal and that Germany fulfils it to the

4 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

letter by now reaching its apogee after an amalga-
mation of blood throughout exactly three centu-
ries, then it must be concluded that it is certain as
the periodicity of the stars that the German Em-
pire will fulfil its destiny and expand at the ex-
pense of the older peoples opposing it. Neither
sea nor land can withstand the perfect precision of
the law of blood.

Having laid down the rule, let us proceed to its
immediate application in the case of ancient Rome.
The peoples which originally occupied the Italian
peninsula south of the Arno and the Rubicon were
the Romans, Latins, Hernicans, Volscians, Etrus-
cans, Sabines, Samnites, Lucanians, Vestini,
Ausones, Marsi, Pselegni, Umbri, Sabellians, Brut-
tians and some Greeks. At the opening of the
Samnite wars in 343 b.c. the Roman people began
to overcome their rivals, subdue the territory to the
Arno, bring about closer communication by the
building of roads, and to transfuse these bloods.
Three centuries later, under Julius Csesar, who
died in 44 b.c, the people thus made conquered
western Europe, northern Africa and Asia Minor,
and laid the foundations of the mighty Roman
Empire, which gave the world its law and admin-
istration. And as during the second Punic war
(218-201) Sardinia, Corsica and Sicily, as well
as Venetia, were annexed, and as all of northern
Italy above the Arno was added by the older popu-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 5

lation conquering the Cenomani in 197, the In-
subres in 196, the Boii in 191, the Apuani in 180
and the Ligiirians in 176, so three centuries later,
under Trajan, whose death occurred in 117 a.d.,
the new blood thus commingled widened the limits
of the empire to their greatest extent — the maxi-
mum of the Romans.

Likewise in Greece it was blood that told. Ac-
cording to Grote, the foundations of Macedonia
were laid in the seventh century. Then Perdikkas
began consolidation of the Lyncestians, Orestians
and Pseonians. It was this combination into a
greater Macedonian people that enabled Alexan-
der the Great in the fourth century to conquer
Western Asia, giving it the imprint of Hellenic
civilization which consisted of supremacy in ar-
chitecture, sculpture, philosophy and literature.
The teacher of Alexander was Aristotle, the
Greek mind with them reaching its zenith.

The riddle of how the older Greek states fell be-
fore Macedon is answered by the law of blood. In
Attica it was a union of the Pelasgians, Cecropes,
Acharnians and the men of Thoricus, Eleusis,
Icaria, Aphidnse and Presise that made the empire
of Athens possible. Bury, the English historian,
places the union of Attica in the eighth century.
This led to transfusion. In the fifth century, in
the golden age of Pericles, Athens reached its max-
imum. The Boeotians, descending into the ^gean

6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

peninsula from the northwest, established unity
and infused with the Cadmeans and other peoples
in the seventh century. In the fourth century
they flowered in the hegemony of Thebes. The
Dorians entered Laconia and mingled with
Leleges, Minyans and Phrenecians. The su-
premacy of Sparta was the result. The Dorians
also entered Argolia and transfused with Hylleis,
Pamphili and Dymanes. The race thus formed
for a time dominated the Peloponnesus. The
Dorians mixing with Ionic populations in Corinth
led to expansion in Syracuse and Corcyra. The
^olians conquered and amalgamated with the
Epeans, later extending their power. On the
other hand, the Thessaloi settled in Thessaly and
the Achaeans in Achsea. Neither ever played a
prominent part in Grecian history because each re-
mained practically one blood.

In the second century the Goths, descending into
southern Europe from their seats on the Vistula,
transfused with the Ulmerugi, Gepidge and Syth-
ians. In the fifth century they moved rapidly
westward and, attaining their maximum as a con-
quering nation under Theodoric the Great, ex-
panded over Italy, Gaul and Spain. The Vandals
came in contact and amalgamated with Marco-
manni, Lugii and Silingse in central Europe in the
second century. After being impeded by the Ro-
mans and Goths, in the fifth century they overran

THE LAW OF BLOOD 7

Spain and Africa, establishing in the latter terri-
tory a great Vandal kingdom. In the fifth cen-
tury also came the Huns at the height of their
power under Attila. Their empire extended from
the Caucasus to the Rhine and from the Baltic to
the Danube. Prior to their entrance into this
scene of action they had in the steppes north of
the Caspian been conquering and transfusing their
blood with the Alpizuri, Alcidzuri, Hunari, Tun-
carsi, Boisci and Alani. The time from their
zenith back to the start of amalgamation may be
computed to have been about three hundred years.
After the death of Attila their empire disappeared
and they were disseminated among the peoples
they had conquered, though the greater part of
them remained in what is now Hungary, to be
overcome centuries later by the Magyars, but not
before giving their name to the land. It was
there that Attila had his capital. After the
Goths, Vandals, Huns and Franks had passed one
after another into Gaul in the fifth century, sub-
merging the Gauls, Iberians, Ligurians, Romans
and Celts who dwelt there, the Sicambrian
Franks, under Clovis, subdued the others. All
were amalgamated into a new and greater peo-
ple. Three centuries later, under Charlemagne,
this people attained its maximum, conquered the
greater part of Europe and reestablished the Em-
pire of the West. That empire did not last long,

8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

being divided among the Great Emperor's three
sons, but it flashed across the darker centuries that
followed it an ideal of order and strength.

In the early centuries of Norwegian life were
Lapps, Finns and tribes that had immigrated from
Jutland and Sweden. These peoples lived sep-
arate existences and were distributed among dif-
ferent dukedoms until the beginning of unifica-
tion under Harald Haafinger in the tenth cen-
tury. Under Haakon IV, in the thirteenth cen-
tury, Norway took Iceland and developed to its
widest extent. During this time the adventurous
Normans gave new life to France, Sicily and Eng-
land. Denmark was composed of the Jutes,
Cimbri, Heruli, Langobardi, Chary dcs, Angli, Sig-
oulones, Sabaliggoi and Kabandoi in ancient
times. In the eighth century, under Harald and
Sigifridus, transfusion began among those dis-
united people that had remained after the earlier
migrations. In the eleventh century Canute the
Great conquered England, Norway, Sweden and
part of the present Prussia on the Baltic. This
empire, which thus reached its greatest extent,
was short lived, though Denmark itself remained
a power to be reckoned with in the North for
five centuries longer. The Union of Kalmar in
1307 was a political agreement between Norway,
Sweden and Denmark and was not the result of
the latter conquering the two former states.

THE LAW OF BLOOD 9

What is now Sweden was formerly made up of
the Svear, Gotar, Visigoti, Finns, Vinovi, Rere-
fenni and Greatas. Most important of these were
the Gotar and the Svear. In the early fourteenth
century, under Magnus Lodalus, unity began.
Three centuries later, in the early seventeenth cen-
tury, Sweden conquered Finland, Denmark, Nor-
way, the southern Baltic and Poland. This was
accomplished under Gustavus Adolphus and
Charles X. The Swedish Empire was twice the
size of the nation of to-day and larger than the
present Germany. The wars of Charles XII gave
momentary hope of renewal, but they were only a
final exhaustive effort and Sweden speedily re-
turned to its original limits.

Moravia was at one time inhabited by the Boii,
afterward the nucleus of the Bohemians and then
by the Quadi, Vandals, Heruli, Rugii and Lom-
bards before it was subdued by the Moravians
who began amalgamation in the sixth century.
This people helped Charlemagne defeat the Avars
and in the ninth century reached their maximum
with territories extending from the Moldau to
the Drave and from the Reisengebirge to the Vis-
tula, as large as the present Austria-Hungary.
But Moravia soon fell before the advancing Mag-
yars, who had entered the plains of Hungary about
900, conquering the Bulgarians, Serbs, Croats,
Huns and Avars they found there. Under Arpad

10 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

this work was completed in 906 and the trans-
fusion of blood into the Hungarian people be-
gan. Three centuries later, in 1 195, Bela III had
expanded the Hungarian Empire southward and
westward to Bosnia and Dalmatia, helping to
break up the Byzantine Empire, and extending
suzerainty over Servia. The empire then declined
and after three-fourths of Hungary had been de-
vastated by the Tatars in 1241, leaving a stratum
to mingle with the rest, wholesale immigration
set in, including great numbers of Rumanians,
and a new period of amalgamation followed.
Three centuries afterwards Hungary became the
leading power in Europe under Matthias Cor-
vinus. He took Moravia, Silesia, Upper and
Lower Lusatia, Styria, Carniola and Carinthia,
and established suzerainty over Bosnia. Having
expended its strength, Hungary, too, soon suc-
cumbed to stronger rivals.

The territory of Wallachia, a part of what is
now Rumania, was formerly inhabited by Da-
cians, Goths, Tatars, Slavs, Vlachs, Petchenegs
and Cumanians. Radu the Black led a numerous
people, the Rumans, into the land between 1290
and 1310 and overcame the older peoples he
found there. Three hundred years passed and
then, in 1601, Michael the Brave extended this
dominion over Transylvania and Moldavia. In
Moldavia the same process had taken place. Ru-

THE LAW OF BLOOD n

manian settlements were made there in 1 164, lead-
ing to an amalgamation with Vlachs, Hungarians
and others. During the early part of the reign
of Stephen the Great, which lasted from 1458 to
1504, Moldavia reached its maximum, annexing
part of Poland and expanding from the Molcovu
to the Dniester rivers, including Bukovina and
Bessarabia. Speedily it fell before Turkey.
While both Wallachia and Moldavia were united
in 1859 under the title of Rumania, they are
Rumanians only in a basis of people, in each case
having mingled with others and emerged into
separate nations. Bohemia was formerly occu-
pied by the Boii, Marcomanni, Tatars, Cechs,
Slavs, Avars, Moravians and Greeks. Consoli-
dation began under Boleslav in the latter half of
the tenth century. About 1275, in the latter half
of the thirteenth century, under Prmysl Ottocar
II, the Bohemian Empire reached its maximum,
asserting its sway over Moravia, Silesia, Galicia,
upper Lusatia, Styria, Carinthia, Istria and parts
of northern Italy. With the rise of Austria un-
der Rudolph of Hapsburg it succumbed. The
Swiss, who have maintained the Republican ideal
under liberty and separate unity for more than
six centuries, fulfil in exact terms the law of
blood. Composed of peoples of French, Burgun-
dian and Italian stock, as well as the original Hel-
vetii, they began amalgamation upon the forma-

12 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

tion of their Everlasting League in 1291. Three
centuries later, a Swiss people, they attained their
greatest extent of territory and, in addition, gave
mercenaries to their neighbors. In 1584, the last
extension of territory, Geneva, was added to Zu-
rich. The names of Zwingli and Calvin attest
the importance of the Swiss in the Reformation.
In Portugal the early peoples were the Iber-
ians, Alani, Suevi, Carthaginians, Greeks, Gauls,
Goths, Romans and later the Arabs and Berbers.
Greeks and Carthaginians were almost negligible.
Most of these peoples remained separate for cen-
turies. It was not until Sancho II, from 1223 to
1 248, that the country was consolidated and amal-
gamation began. Then after three centuries the
Portuguese Empire reached its greatest height.
By 1 540 it had acquired its most extensive posses-
sions in Brazil, East and West Africa, Malabar,
Ceylon, Persia, Indo-China and the Malay Archi-
pelago. Overflowing into those lands, its popula-
tion was diminished from two millions to one mil-
lion. Forty years later it fell before the power
of Spain, which had been made up of Iberians,
Celts, Celtebarians, Romans, Vandals, Suebians,
Visigoths, Arabs, Negroes and Basques. Unifica-
tion began under Alphonso of Castile at the close
of the twelfth century. At the end of the fif-
teenth and the beginning of the sixteenth century
Spain reached its maximum under Ferdinand and

THE LAW OF BLOOD 13

Isabella and Charles V. The Spaniards con-
quered Portugal and Italy, circumnavigated Af-
rica and the globe, founded colonies, subdued
Mexico and Peru and dominated Europe. Their
power began to steadily descend with the revolt
of the Netherlands and the defeat of the Great
Armada. The Netherlands in early times were
inhabited by the Gaulo-Celtic tribes known as the
Belgse. Among these were the Nervii, Frisians
and Batavi. In the fifth century came the Salian
Franks and a little later a Saxon admixture.
Finally in the tenth century a considerable infu-
sion of Northmen was added. Godfrey, a Norse
duke, was confirmed in the possession of Fries-
land. In the eleventh century feudalism was es-
tablished and civil wars between the different
racial interests were constant. In the late four-
teenth and early fifteenth centuries consolidation
began under the dukes of Burgundy, fostered
by commerce between the industrious and wealthy
towns. Three hundred years later, after William
the Silent had fought the power of Spain single
handed, in the late seventeenth and early eight-
eenth centuries, that part of the Netherlands
which became Holland reached its maximum of
strength under the Dutch Republic, controlling
the seas of the world and overflowing into the
East Indies and South and North America. That
part which became Belgium, with less Norman

14 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and Saxon infusion and held in closer sway by
Spain and France, never conquered, and over-
flowed finally in the Congo alone.

Bulgaria was once a mighty empire. Origi-
nally a Turanian people, the Bulgarians emerged
from their tracts in the Urals and in the seventh
century, under Kahn Ishperikh, took Moesia and
began an amalgamation with the Slav, Ugrian and
Finnish populations there. In the tenth century,
under Simeon, Bulgaria reached its zenith with
an empire which extended from the Black Sea to
the Adriatic and from the borders of Thessaly to
the Save and the Carpathians. Then it became
decadent. In the latter part of that century Rus-
sians and Greeks transfused with the Bulgarians.
In the thirteenth century occurred a temporary and
partial renewal of the empire. Finally, with the
rise of the Turks, it again passed away. The
Serbs were first known historically when inhabit-
ing Galicia. From there they migrated to the
Black Sea and across the Danube to their present
position in the Balkans toward the middle of the
seventh century. They mingled with Greeks,
Huns and Croats. After thorough unification
under Bulgarian domination and an important ad-
mixture of Bulgarian blood in the eleventh cen-
tury, in the fourteenth century Servia reached the
zenith of its empire, conquering Albania, part of
Macedonia, the Sanjak of Novibazar, Bosnia,

THE LAW OF BLOOD 15

Herzegovina and Montenegro. Maintaining its
power a few years, it also fell before the Turks.
The Ottoman Turks were forced westward from
central Asia by the Mongols. In the middle of
the thirteenth century they began to overthrow
and amalgamate with the already declining Sel-
juks and other peoples, such as Byzantines, in
Asia Minor. Three centuries after, in the mid-
dle of the sixteenth century, Turkey, under Su-
leiman the Magnificent, reached its greatest power
and extent. When this sultan died, in 1566, his
empire extended from the frontiers of what is
now Germany to Persia. The Black Sea was a
Turkish lake and from Egypt to Morocco the Sul-
tan's power was supreme. The Turkish Empire
commenced to fall five years later at Lepanto, but
sovereignty over the Balkans and Greece was re-
tained. Transfusion in the new territories was
prevented because of further wars, including that
with Austria, until after the peace of Sitvatorok
in 1606. Three centuries more and in 1912, Bul-
garia, Servia and Montenegro, together with
Greece, defeated the older state in a decisive cam-
paign, again expanding into greater dominion and
thereby fulfilling the law of blood. Bulgaria, in
nearer proximity to the Turkish center, Constan-
tinople, and without mountain barriers between,
and therefore with greater transfusion, produced in
the Balkan war a much more vital force of fighting

i6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

men and General Savoff, an able strategist. The
Poles, or Polabs, believed to have been driven from
the Danube to North Central Europe by the
Romans, found rivals in the Slavonian peoples
and the Pomeranians and Silesians. After being
wasted by the sword many times their territory was
finally devastated by the Turks in 1241. During
the half century following considerable immigra-
tion was invited, including the people of the Teu-
tonic Orders, Letts and Lithuanians. With the
process of recuperation amalgamation started.
Three hundred years later the Polish people thus
made reached their maximum. Mosovia was
taken in 1526, Livonia in 1561, Volhnia and Po-
dolia in 1569, and in the latter year Lithuania was
practically annexed. The empire then extended
from the Baltic to the Black Sea and from near,
Berlin to the 35th parallel of longitude, far east of
the Dnieper. Poised for a brief period, it went
down before the Turks and then the Russians,
Swedes, Prussians and Austrians. Because of its
form of government, even nationality was lost,
but the Polish people still live and cry out for in-
dependence.

In the vast continent of Asia many conquering
empires once existed and centuries ago passed into
that comatose condition which has since seized
upon them. Every people there, with the excep-
tion of the Japanese, has had its maximum, ex-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 17

panding and falling back through decay to original
limits. Their history is dim, because of lack of
adequate records, but where facts appear the same
infallible law of blood is found at work. Thus
in early Babylonia a transfusion of the people im-
mediately surrounding Eridu and Nippur led to
the empire of Accad. Another mixture of Lagash
and Kis and, long enough after the beginning of
consolidation to have approximated three hundred
years, the unified people expanded from the Per-
sian Gulf to the Caspian. After a further in-
fusion of Semitic blood the empire of Sargon of
Accad extended its boundaries over the greater
part of present Asia Minor and Arabia. It shortly
disappeared. Then came that of Ur, widening its
limits to the Mediterranean. When it fell Baby-
lon passed to the sovereignty of Elam under Chedo-
laomar. This was necessarily accompanied by
another infusion of new blood, including Canaan-
ites. When a new people conquered they took the
old capital, the city of Babylon, and made it theirs,
making a revival of Babylonia itself appear,
whereas the opposite is the case. The new people
thus transfused found empire under Hammurabi.
This was followed by one of Sumerian supremacy
and then the land was conquered and transfused
by the Kassites under Kandis. During the su-
premacy of the latter and that of Egypt the Assur-
ites had been conquering their neighbors, including

i8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

the Hittites, and developing into an Assyrian em-
pire, before which Babylon fell temporarily. De-
clining for a time, a second Assyrian empire,
greater than the first, gathered new strength from
further transfusion with Armenians, Hittites,
Medes and Syrians, following their consolidation.
It declined and then, after being taken by the Chal-
deans, Babylon again arose to be a mighty city and
the scat of an empire, performing its greatest feats
of arms under the second Sargon and his imme-
diate successors. Chaldean struggles with Egypt
and Elam brought exhaustion. After this ap-
peared the Sythians and Cimmerians. They, too,
overthrew Asia Minor, destroyed Nineveh and
took Babylon as a capital. Their empire lasted
less than half a century and went down before
Cyrus the Persian. Realizing the religious signifi-
cance of Babylon, he, too, made the city his capital.
There is evidence that the Phrygians amalgamated
during three hundred years with the Bittynians,
Thyni, Mariandyni and other peoples before the
expansion of Phyrgia over western Asia Minor.
Its empire fell before the Cimmerians and then to
Lydia. In the case of the latter, the Cimmeri
captured Sardis in 1078 b.c. They mixed with
the Mysians and Dardani. Three centuries later,
under Croesus, the richest king of his age, the
Lydian Empire reached its greatest extent and be-
came the financial center of the Mediterranean

THE LAW OF BLOOD 19

world. In ancient Persia were Iranians, Poricanii,
Gedrosii and Myci and in Media were Anaraiacae,
Tapuri, Amardi, Caspii, Caducii, Galse, Gutseans
and Lulubeans. After the Sythian and Cim-
merian invasions, leaving strata of population.
Media extended over the greater part of Asia
Minor and east to Iran. It had reached its zenith
in 553 B.C. when Cyrus revolted. Three years
afterward it fell and Persia became the great power
in Western Asia, the peoples of that land having
been in the previous centuries welded into one.
After the inevitable decay it began to go down be-
fore the Greeks in the following century at Sa-
lamis. All these empires, the history which ex-
tended over many centuries, were made by and fol-
lowed a combination of bloods.

About three hundred years after the inundation
of the Hyksos tribes, probably from Arabia, one
of the most brilliant periods in the history of Egypt
occurred, from Tethmosis I to Tethmosis III.
Of the latter, the period 1 550 to 1 546 is especially
mentioned. This great king subdued Syria,
Babylon, Libya, Ethiopia, Phoenicia and the
Hittites. New bloods were infused. Three cen-
turies later, under Rameses II, Egypt conquered
and took in Nubian, Libyan, Syrian and Hittite
bloods. Peace was made and amalgamation began
again about 1250 b.c. Libyans thereafter served
in the armies. The country fell into decay and

20 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

lost its power. Then, three centuries after Ram-
eses II had reinvigorated it, at about 950 B.C.,
under Sheshonk I, Egypt took Palestine, Israel,
Judah, Nubia and Thebia. When this empire be-
gan to go down Ethiopia conquered Egypt and
gave it new blood. After three centuries had
again passed, under Psammeticus (664-610) and
Necho, Egypt again restored something of its an-
cient limits. In the fourth century a.d. Abyssinia
(Ethiopia) was opened to immigration. In the
seventh centur}^ it conquered Yemen and much of
Arabia and carried on a large trade with India
and Ceylon. In the sixteenth century Mohamme-
dans conquered and retransfused the country. In
the nineteenth centur}^ the Emperor Theodore ex-
tended his dominions over Shoa, Amhera and
Tigre. Thirteen hundred )^ears before the Chris-
tian era the twelve tribes of Israel began their
amalgamation. About 1000 b.c, under David,
the Hebrews expanded over much of Syria. They
gave to mankind the grandest message ever handed
on from age to age. They fell before Nineveh
and Babylon. To-day wherever placed they sur-
prise by their intelligence, but as a conquering na-
tion they had their time alone under David. Of
India little is known before Alexander the Great as
to dates and for centuries after him there is ob-
scurity, but where facts are clear the law of blood
is found working with a sureness that is startling.

THE LAW OF BLOOD 21

Thus in the middle of the first century a.d. the
Yue-chi, a strange people, entered the Kabul
Valley and began amalgamation under Khad-
phises. In the fourth century Chadraputra ex-
panded this dominion over a great empire.

In Chinese history is evidence that the rise and
fall of d3^nasties were due to new elements from the
outside which from time to time entered the land
and conquered the former reigning force after it
had fallen to decay. The first ruler was always
brave and vigorous. The last was degenerate.
The earliest such account of any authenticity is
that of the Tsin regime, which originated in a peo-
ple on the western borders who had mingled with
other blood three centuries before conquering the
entire ancient territory. The Manchus were a
people occupying what is now Manchuria, the
name first attaining prominence in the thirteenth
centur}^ After having been a shifting population,
they then began amalgamation with the Yih-low,
Wuh-keih, Moh-hoh and Pohai. Three centuries
afterwards, following the example of the Khitians,
Nuchiks and Mongols before them, they, under
their great leader Nurachu, conquered not only
Mongolia but the Chinese Empire. The empire
of Jenghis Kahn, extending from the China Sea
to the Dnieper River had been founded upon an
amalgamation of the peoples of what is now Mon-
golia. After their task they shrank to their origi-

22 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

nal limits. Neither is Tibet so dark as to hide
subjection to the law of blood. In the seventh
century Strong-tsan-gampo subdued with his own
the remaining tribes of the vast territory of Tibet.
Amalgamation was inevitable. In the tenth cen-
tury the Tibetan Empire was extended over Nor-
thern India to the Bay of Bengal. In Siam, about
1250 A.D., occurred a transfusion of Lao-tai,
Khmer and Siamese peoples. Exactly three cen-
turies later the country's greatest conqueror, Phra
Naret, expanded the territory of this new people
into Cambodia, Laos and other portions of the
Malay peninsula. In Burma it was the same.
The Mongols invaded the country in the thirteenth
century and established dominion. In the early
sixteenth century the Toungoo dynasty arose to
widen the limits of the nation into empire. This
led to a further commingling of blood, with the
result that in the early nineteenth century Burma
attained its maximum, having conquered Siam,
Assam and Manipur and penetrated Bengal. In
the last half of the eleventh century the Seljuks
conquered, consolidated and began amalgamation
with peoples of Transoxiana. Just three centuries
later, in the last half of the fourteenth century,
the mighty Timur, at the head of a new empire,
spread his authority over all of central and west-
ern Asia.

The Phoenicians founded Carthage in 822 b.c.

THE LAW OF BLOOD 23

and began amalgamation with the Libyans.
Three centuries later the Carthaginian Empire
spread out over the Mediterranean, conquering
Sardinia, Sicily, cities in Spain and Italy and fur-
ther territory nearer home. This empire declined,
but because of the new blood added to the older
stock, three centuries later, under Hannibal (247-
183), Carthage conquered Spain and half of Italy.
As it went to pieces before Rome, Numidia, which
had been given new blood by Carthage, expanded
under Massinissa (238-149) over the lands from
Mauretania to Cyrenaica. Mahomet in the late
seventh century a.d. began a movement which
amalgamated the fierce tribes of Arabia into a
single people. Three hundred years afterward
this empire was extended from Spain to India.
After shedding the luster of its learning and in-
stitutions, it fell before the rising Turks and
Byzantium. The East Roman, or Byzantian Em-
pire, established by Constantine with the founding
of Constantinople in 300 a.d., is a further exempli-
fication of the law of blood. Though Roman law
and institutions were at first transferred there from
Rome itself, the great transfusion which then be-
gan under his central authority with the Greek and
Macedonian stocks of Romans, Goths, Avars,
Slavs and afterwards Huns made a new nation
with different customs, architecture and views of
life. The Goths had descended into the Mace-

24 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

donian peninsula and Greece in 259, and the Slavs
settled in the provinces of the former at about the
same time. Consequently, the great conquests of
Justinian were made in the middle of the sixth cen-
tury and up to the date of his death in 565. As
Constantine brought about more thorough trans-
fusion in 330, so Heracleus restored the dwindled
conquests of Justinian and in 629 advanced fur-
ther into Persia than Roman arms had ever pene-
trated. The rapid decline of the empire in the
latter years of the reign of Heracleus was due not
to lack of prowess on his part, but to the fact that
the strength of his people had passed its maximum.
And as the shake-up in the time of Heracleus had
made the beginning of a further commingling of
bloods imperative, so, three centuries later, in the
latter half of the tenth century, the Byzantian Em-
pire enjoyed a short respite of strength. Earlier,
Sapor I, head of the Sassanid Empire, expanded
over Syria and Armenia and assumed the title of
"king of the kings of the Iranians and non-Iran-
ians." This was the result of amalgamation
which had taken place three centuries before dur-
ing the upheavals caused by Pompey, Caesar and
Antony; and these upheavals were themselves
caused by the Greek colonization of Philip and
Alexander three hundred years previous. Follow-
ing the widely extended expansion of Sapor in the
middle of the third century, in the middle of the

THE LAW OF BLOOD 25

sixth century Chosroes I took Antioch, widened his
power to the Black Sea and the Caucasus, ravaged
Cappadocia and conquered Bactria. This was not
sufficient to give new conquering strength, though
in the middle of the ninth century the Caliphate
subdued with difficulty a serious revolt of Persian
Mazdakite sectaries. In the adjacent lands east
of Media the Parthians had in the middle of the
second century b.c, under Mithridates I, extended
their victories to the Indus and over Media and
Babylonia. These successes of the height of Par-
thian vitality may be ascribed to the annexations
of Darius in this region three centuries before.
Even in Mexico and Peru the law of blood has
worked with mathematical exactness. The Aztecs
conquered the older peoples they found in Mexico.
Upon the establishment of their sway in 1195
A.D., in what is now the City of Mexico, they cele-
brated the festival of "tying up the bundle of
years" and beginning a new cjcIg. Amalgama-
tion resulted. After exactly three centuries had
gone by, they expanded into the great Aztec Em-
pire, extending from Panama to California. They
had reached their zenith and were ready for their
fall when the Spaniards arrived. In Peru the
Incas entered the Cuzco Valley three hundred years
before Pizarro. The evidence of the transfusion
lies in the fact that originally two languages were
spoken. Under Huana Capac, the Great Inca,

26 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

the Empire reached its height and expanded from
north of Quito to the southern part of the present
Chili. He died the year before Pizarro reached
Peru in 1526. Then the Peruvian Empire, too,
was ready for defeat. Spanish women did not
emigrate to Mexico and South America with the
early conquerors. The soldiery, adventurers, ec-
clesiastics and colonists mingled with the natives.
Transfusion followed. Three hundred years
later, from 1810 to 1826, Latin America threw
off the yoke of the motherland in revolution. In
1609 occurred a negro revolt in the Vera Cruz
region and an Indian rebellion in Sinaloa and
Durango. Blood mingled. In 1910 came Ma-
dero's uprising.

It appeared to me at first, after I had examined
the history of all the nations with scrupulous care,
seeking to find refutation in my own mind of the
law of blood, if possible, that the case of the Japa-
nese might disprove it. Japan has had no trans-
fusion for 1400 years at least and has never ex-
panded, except to a limited degree in Korea. To-
day with an area not much larger than the British
Islands and about the size of the State of Cali-
fornia that nation has a population of 52,985,000.
The people are so densely settled they can hardly
be fed. They are like new wine in old bottles and
must break through at the expense of Asia. No
nation in history has been shut up so long and un-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 27

dcr such unique institutions. And yet, it will be
said, if the Japanese could defeat the Chinese Em-
pire of 360,000,000 souls and the Russian Empire
with 150,000,000 population, extending from the
Baltic to the Pacific, without having begun an
amalgamation of bloods three centuries earlier,
then the law is disproved. If the Chinese and
Russians were a vigorous people in their prime this
would be true, but what are the facts ^ The
Chinese passed their zenith three thousand years
ago. They have been conquered and reconquered
since. They are as weak as water and cannot ex-
cel in the field of battle. Was it wonderful, then,
that the Japanese people, whose strength has been
pent up so long, should have defeated China and
have done it with modern weapons and a trained
force which their opponents did not have? In
the war of 1904-5 Russia was unable to get suf-
ficient troops across the Trans-Siberian Railway
and faced its enemy with but 300,000 men.
Japan had the same number, with a base of sup-
plies near at hand. The Japanese fought two
great battles, Liao-Yang and Mukden, each re-
quiring more than a week and in each case only
forcing the Russians to retreat and take up a strong
position. At the Portsmouth conference they
could not even force an indemnity. No doubt the
Japanese did attain their strength three centuries
after their amalgamation began. But they never

28 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

utilized it. They held it back under a social and
intellectual system which is itself repressive and
peculiar. Lafcadio Hearn quotes Percival Lowell
as observing that the Japanese speak, read and
write backwards and that this is only the abc of
their contrariety, and goes on to say himself that
the Japanese think backwards, upside-down and
inside-out. He speaks of "forms of unfamiliar
action strange enough to suggest the notion of a
humanity even physically as little related to us as
might be the population of another planet."
While the strength of the Japanese came from
infusion of Mongolian, Korean, Chinese and Aino
bloods, the last such having immigrated in the
sixth century, they could not keep that strength
at the full, even though bottled up. The Jap-
anese are diminutive in stature. As far back as
the Han and Wei records of China (25-265 a.d.)
these people are spoken of as dwarfs. By adopt-
ing Western methods and with such strength as
they have withheld they can conquer Eastern Asia,
because of the weak peoples opposed to them, and
fulfil that part of the law of blood which applies
to expansion, but they have not the virile and
youthful vigor to conquer the United States. And
such power as they may attain will be short, be-
cause they have not the energy to maintain it.
They, too, do not deny but fulfil the law of blood.
We next come to the great nations engaged in

THE LAW OF BLOOD 29

the present struggle of Europe. In what is now
Russia were originally Sythians, Goths, Huns,
Avars, Bulgarians, Magyars, Khazars and Slavs.
This in the fourth century. The mists of obscur-
ity hide the record and when they lift again in the
twelfth century there are Slavs, Krivitches, Polot-
chians, Dregovitches, Radimitches, Viatitches,
Drevlians, Severians, Polians, Croats, Tivertses,
Loutitches, Doulebes, Boujans, Tcheques, Lechites
Finns, Turks, Mongols, Letts, Livonians, Esthon-
ians, Carelians, Lapps, Mordvians, Bachkirs, Met-
cheraks and Tchouvachs. Speaking generally
these should be divided among Russian Slavs, Let-
to-Lithuanians, Finns, and Turko-Tatars or Mon-
gols. During the last years of the fifteenth cen-
tury Ivan III threw off the Mongol yoke, which
had lasted more than two centuries, and consoli-
dated the vast dominions under the sway of Mos-
covy. Transfusion followed. During the last
years of the eighteenth century, in the reign of
Catherine II, Russia reached its apex of power, ex-
panding into an empire extending all the way
from Russian Poland to Behring Sea, practically
its present limits. To be exact, the Tatar yoke was
thrown off between 1480 and 1487, and in 1503
the greater part of Lithuania was annexed. In
1774 Catherine extended the empire to the Black
Sea and the Danube. Ten years later the Crimean
Peninsula was annexed. In 1792 she obtained

30 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Ochakov and the coast between the Bug and the
Dniester. In 1795 Courland was taken and the
third of the partitions of Poland brought about
the last great seizure of foreign territory. Siberia
had been gradually absorbed during the eighteenth
century. Having attained its maximum under the
Great Empress, Russia was unable to withstand
Napoleon, being defeated at Austerlitz and Fried-
land, and wasted the armies of the French Em-
peror only by withdrawing into the interior and
burning Moscow. In the century since Russia has
done nothing more than consolidate the territory
already in its possession. Now, facing a new and
vital people, the empire must meet defeat.

Italy has long since declined. Odoacer, an
Herulian, ascended the throne of the Csesars in
476. After that Rome soon fell before the Goths
under Theodoric. Then from 539 to 553 ap-
peared the East Romans under Belisarius and
Narses. They were in turn overcome by the Lom-
bards. When Pope Gregory II united with these
Lombards and threw off the yoke of Leo the Isau-
rian, the Eastern Emperor, the beginnings of amal-
gamation might have been made. But Charle-
magne came, bringing an infusion of Franks into
the peninsula and establishing a protectorate over
it. This, too, might have brought unity of all the
strong new bloods, but after his death his empire
fell away. Then followed the Saracens, over-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 31

running Sicily and Southern Italy. The Byzan-
tines returned late in the ninth century and after-
wards the Magyars invaded and devastated the
northern lands. It was Otto the Great who
brought his Germans, or, more properly speaking,
Saxons, in 961. He, too, began to establish co-
hesion, but after his death appeared in Southern
Italy the Normans, completing their conquests in
1130. Finally Frederick Barbarossa crossed the
Alps in 1 154. After he had triumphed for a time
the League of Cities was formed against him and
the amalgamation of the many new bloods began.
Italy never became permanently one state and
thereby lost opportunity for again expanding into
a single empire, but exactly three centuries after
Frederick had entered it and started the process of
transfusion the live powers of the peninsula ex-
tended their respective territories to their utmost
limits — ^Venice under Foscari, the Two Sicilies
under Alphonso the Magnanimous, Milan under
Francesco Sforza, the Papacy under Nicholas V
and Florence under Cosimo de Medici — and this
confederated Italy, for a time independent, gave
new life to the world of art and literature in the
humanist movement known as the Renaissance.
This was the age of Michelangelo, Leonardo da
Vinci, Christopher Columbus and Niccolo Machi-
avelli, the supreme height of Italian genius and,
a little earlier, of Petrarch, Boccaccio and Dante.

32 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

United, the states of Italy might have withstood
the shock of the northern invaders, but divided
they soon fell before the armies of Spain, France,
Austria and their Swiss auxiliaries. They had
long been under the domination of the Hapsburgs
when Napoleon liberated and united them. Fi-
nally, when both France and Austria had passed
their zenith, the Peninsula was able to unite it-
self. But to contend that Italy is capable of com-
bating Germany to-day is the same as to say that
a nation can come back to life after nearly four
centuries have gone by since its death.

France, too, has long since passed its zenith and
fallen to decay. With the break-up of the em-
pire of Charlemagne, because of none to wield his
sword, the land his grandson, Charles, ruled soon
disintegrated into small principalities between
which there was fighting for centuries. Differ-
ent languages were spoken and it was impossible
for a condition to be brought about whereby amal-
gamation of the Normans, Flemings and other new
stocks might be made. Philip Augustus in the
thirteenth century started such a process, but in
only a portion of the realm that was to be modern
France. Continued internecine strife and the
Hundred Years' War drew attention even further
from unity. It was not until the reigns of Louis
XI, Charles VIII and Louis XII that the different
new peoples were consolidated into one. Before

THE LAW OF BLOOD 33

his death in 1483 Louis XI, the Frederick the
Great of France, had annexed Burgundy and
Provence and extended the southern boundaries to
the Pyrenees. After his wars with it, Brittany
finally came to his son Charles VII through his
marriage to Anne of Brittany in 1491 . Louis XII
married the widow in 1499. He added Orleans
to his domain. Internal warfare began to cease
under these two latter kings and one-third of the
land of the realm was restored to cultivation.
The peasantry enjoyed rest and laid the founda-
tions of French thrift. Society took on the forms
it was to maintain, including taxation and systems
of law and judicial procedure. It may be said
that between the years 1499 and 1515 France was
organized. That this is so is shown by the fact
that French historians date the beginning of abso-
lute monarchy from 1515. In this period com-
menced the amalgamation of the Iberians, the Li-
gurian strains of the Mediterranean, the incon-
siderable German admixture in the East, the Nor-
mans, the Basques of the Pyrenees, the Flemings
of French Flanders, the new Burgundian acquisi-
tions and the original Prankish and Celtic stocks.
Just three centuries later the new life thus created
burst forth with volcanic energy in the French
Revolution, and under Napoleon expanded over
Egypt in 1799, Italy between 1797 and 1809,
Holland in 1806, Spain and part of Portugal in

34 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

1807 and 1808, nearly all of present Germany be-
tween 1805 and 1807 and Illyria in 1809. This
was the maximum. After these tremendous ef-
forts and the losses in Russia it was an exhausted
France that faced the British squares at Waterloo
in 1815. Then the French Empire went to pieces.
France has since accomplished little in a military
sense.

Britain, in outward appearances the mightiest
empire in the world, long ago reached its maximum
and cannot again conquer. With it the law of
blood is not less inexorable. To the island origi-
nally inhabited by the Scots, Picts, Britons, and
then the Romans, emigrated the Angles, Saxons
and Jutes in the fifth century, extending their
separate conquests in the two following centuries.
To them were added the Danes with a small
sprinkling of Scandinavians in the last years of
the eighth and the beginning of the ninth century.
Alfred held them back. Then came the great
Danish inundation in the first years of the eleventh
century under Sweyn and afterwards Canute, who
finally did conquer the country and made it a
part of the Danish empire. Unity might then
have begun, but Canute died in 1035 ^^^ i^ 1066
appeared a flood of Normans under William the
Conqueror, who also brought with him a mingling
of Breton, Frank and Flemish blood. The Nor-
mans subdued England proper, but mutual hatreds

THE LAW OF BLOOD 35

and warfare under feudalism were long continued.
It was in the reign of Edward I that transfusion
started. Between 1282 and 1295 he conquered
Wales. He took the lower part of Scotland and
nominally subdued the entire realm for a time.
When he died in 1307 he had begun to make Eng-
land over, though the Scots were already in re-
volt. However, the Hundred Years' War and
the Wars of the Roses prevented any thorough
amalgamation of the peoples of the Island until
after the fiercest of the battles of the latter wars
ceased in 1461. From this time, when the atten-
tion of the country was turned away from domin-
ion in France to national development, and
through the reign of Henry Tudor, opportunity
for understanding between the races was found.
From this English King's accession in 1485 until
his death in 1509, he established order and unity.
With the marriage of Henry's daughter to James
IV of Scotland, leading later to the Stewart
dynasty, a feeling of amity and practical oneness
developed between the peoples of Scotland and
England. While the two crowns were not united
until 1603 and the formal act of union did not
take place until 1709, the Scots began such amal-
gamation as their clannishness and love of nation-
ality would permit in the last half of the fifteenth
century. Printing was then introduced, leading
to a common language and to Macaulay's state-

36 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

ment regarding 1503 that "the population of Scot-
land with the exception of the Celtic tribes, which
were thinly scattered over the Hebrides, were of
the same blood as the people of England and spoke
a tongue which did not differ from purest
English more than the dialects of Somerset-
shire and Lancashire differed from each other."
Aberdeen University was founded in 1485 and
compulsory education of all freeholders was re-
quired after i486. Andrew Lang says Scotland
then really began modern histor}% "industrial, com-
mercial, free thinking." Flodden Field, the last
of the national upheavals, where 10,000 of the
flower of Scotland fell in 1513, was the final blow
to Scottish independence. The Stewart raids
thereafter were sporadic and desultory. Under
Henry VII, too, Wales was made a permanent part
of the kingdom and Welsh subjects were placed
upon a thorough social and political equality with
Englishmen. England, Scotland and Wales be-
gan to breathe in unison a new life in the half
century- between 1461 and 1513.

The conquest of Ireland had begun under Henry
II in 1 162, but it was never completed sufficiently
to amalgamate the peoples; this because of the
treatment the Irish received. In the old days the
slaying of an Irishman by an Englishman did not
constitute murder. When Edward I summoned
his viceroy and complained of the cruelties under

THE LAW OF BLOOD 37

him that official replied that he thought it expe-
dient to wink at one knave cutting off another.
"Whereat the King laughed," says the Chronicler.
When Drogheda was captured by Cromwell in
1649 he put every last man, woman and child —
2800 of them — to the sword. The thirty who es-
caped were caught and sent as slaves to Barbadoes.
"Oliver's severe conduct at Drogheda and else-
where is not morally defensible," says the Britan-
nka Encyclopaedia. It may be urged that this
was a long time ago, but nations in their strength
often are as cruel, as was learned by the de-
crepit Roman Empire.

Amalgamation having started in the British Is-
land in the last years of the thirteenth century, ex-
pansion began under Elizabeth in the last years
of the sixteenth century — the time of Shakespeare.
New Foundland was taken in 1583. The Span-
ish Armada was defeated in 1 588. The West In-
dies, much of Canada and parts of India were
annexed in the seventeenth century. And as the
further amalgam of British blood occurred after
1461, the maximum of English conquests came
three centuries later. From 1753 to 1760 Clive
conquered India. All of Canada was wrested
from France in 1763. Green says: "England had
never played so great a part in the history of man-
kind as now. The year 1759 was a year of tri-
umph in every quarter of the world. In Septem-

38 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

ber came the news of Minden and of a victory off
Lagos. In October came tidings of the capture of
Quebec. November brought word of the French
defeat at Quiberon. 'We are forced to ask every
morning what victor}^ there is,' laughed Horace
Walpole, 'for fear of missing one.' " In 1770
Cook peacefully established British suzerainty in
Australia. Having passed the zenith of its land
aggression, England lost its colonies in central
North America to the United States. When the
empire of Napoleon began to decline, because of
having in its turn expended its strength, Well-
ington triumphed in the Spanish peninsula and
overthrew the Emperor at Waterloo with the aid
of the Prussians; but Britain was able to do this
and to hold its colonies by sea power and the
strength it had gained by amalgamation up to
1515, sweeping the ocean of its enemies in 1806.
The subsequent acquisitions of territory in Africa
and Australia were taken mainly without con-
quest and by this naval power and the prestige of
its name. Up to the beginning of the present war
the British Empire had had no great contest of
strength since Waterloo. So exhausted was it
that, despite its immense resources, two and a half
years were required a decade ago to finish the lit-
tle Boer Republic. Having passed its zenith a
century and more, the British Empire cannot hope
to conquer on the land, and, in order to hold its

THE LAW OF BLOOD 39

possessions, must rely entirely upon its fleets.
Whether those fleets can be permanently main-
tained against a virile power in spite of the law of
blood remains to be seen. They may appear to
have been maintained at Aboukir Bay and Trafal-
gar, but the British people were still near their
maximum. The presumption throughout all the
centuries of the working out of this law is de-
cidedly against the continuance in power perma-
nently of any empire; it is unlikely that massive
and preponderating instruments of steel and gun-
nery on the water can protect a decadent blood.

And now we come to the German people at their
maximum, exactly three centuries after the begin-
ning of their amalgamation. It will be contended
that the peoples out of which the present Germany
is made are Teutons and have always been united
by ties of race. But the Germans are a new stock.
Never before the present time has there been a
German people. It is true that in early Roman
history appeared the name of the Teutoni, a tribe
which is said to have originated in the neighbor-
hood of Denmark and was defeated by the consul
Marius in 102 b.c. when it expanded into Gaul
and attacked the gates of Italy, and was so named
from its legendary original father (stammvater).
But this was only a single people which for a time
probably dominated the Cimbri and Ausones who
accompanied them and was then swallowed up

40 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

among others. The sobriquet of German or
"shouting man" was given by the Romans to all
those people who surged westward across the Rhine
from Central Europe and uttered loud cries as they
entered into battle, irrespective of whether they
were related or not. Tacitus says: "The people
who first passed the Rhine and took possession of a
canton in Gaul, though known at present (about
lOO A.D.) by the name of Tungrians, were in that
expedition called Germans, and hence the title as-
sumed by a band of emigrants, in order to spread a
general terror in their progress, extended itself by
degrees and became in time the appellation of a
whole people." The Roman historian then goes
on to show that each of the people east of the
Rhine was at that time exerting its strength or
had fallen to decay. Each was separate and dif-
ferent from the others. Archeology has at-
tempted to bridge the demarcation between them.
Its conclusions are purely speculative. Neither
archeology nor philology holds the key to these
early peoples. The expansion of each can alone
explain any traces of the civilization it may have
left outside of its original territory. The change
of names among them in the early centuries, so
puzzling to historians, is due to their transfusion
into new peoples who in their turn have held sway
for a while and then disappeared. With some
scholars the term "Teutonic" has been used to des-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 41

ignate a type of blue-eyed and light-haired peoples
in Northern Europe. But they receive that type
only from climate, as contrasted with dark-haired
and eyed races nearer the Equator. "It is to be ob-
served," says the Britanfiica Encyclopczdia^ a
monument to the scholarship of the British race,
"that the term 'Teutonic' is of scholastic and not
of popular origin, and this is true of the other
terms ('Germanic,' 'Gothic,' etc.), which are or
have been used in the same manner. There is no
generic term now in popular use either for the lan-
guage or for the peoples, for the reason that their
common origin has been forgotten."

The use of general terms to cover lack of knowl-
edge proves nothing. Thus there is no such thing
as an Aryan people or race. Philologists have dis-
covered that the barest similarity of root of lan-
guage pervades peoples from India to Europe.
These scholars '(less Max Miiller, who scoffed at
the contention) have set up the preposterous postu-
late that all such peoples were at one time part of
an Aryan race. If the records of the present time
were lost and three thousand years hence certain
pedants made the discovery that among the peo-
ples of Europe and the Americas there was a basis
of similarity of Latin derivative, would a presump-
tion that their common ancestors were at one time
Roman be justified? Is it any wiser for us to con-
clude that because there was before the Christian

42 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

era a tribe known as the Teutoni, and because the

Romans gave a general nickname to the peoples
east of the Rhine who advanced against them with
loud battle shouts, that all the peoples in the lat-
ter district were at one time one? No more in-
telligent is the claim that there is an Anglo-Saxon
people. The Angles, Saxons and Jutes were sub-
merged by the Danes and then by the Normans.
Amalgamated, they made a British people. In
America we have a conglomerate of the white race,
including at least 25,000,000 of Germans or of
German descent, which constitutes the American
people. The British and American peoples are
entirely different. Incidentally, it may be men-
tioned that nations amalgamate into unity.
Having united their bloods, they cannot, in the na-
ture of the case, disunite them. Hence it is im-
possible that there could have been an original
Germanic or Teutonic people which separated into
smaller units.

After the Romans had defeated the Teutoni and
Cimbri, they came in contact at various times with
the following peoples who had their habitation east
of the Rhine : Bructeri, Chatti, Cherusci, Chauci,
Langobardi, Cimbri, Cherudes, Rauraci, Medioma-
trici, Sequani, Tribocci, Nemetes, Vangiones,
Mattiaci, Ubii, Sugambri, Tencteri, Usipetes,
Ampsivarii, Chasuarii, Marsi, Angrivarii, Canne-
fates, Frisii, Marcomanni, Quadi, Hermanduri,

THE LAW OF BLOOD 43

Semnones, Varini, Burgundiones, Lugii, Galindi
and Ampsivarii. By die fourdi century a.d. these
tribes or peoples had solidified into the Franks,
Alamanni, Goths, Vandals, Heruli, Saxons, Bur-
gundians and Lombards. In the sixth century the
predominant peoples were the Franks, Frisians,
Saxons, Alamanni, Bavarians (fused with Marco-
manni), Langobardi (Lombards), Heruli, Wami
and Thuringii. To the east of the Saxons were
the Polabs and Havelli. In the northeast were
the Prussi, Lithuani, Milcieni, Lusici, Warnabi
and Leuteci, together with the Pomeranians, the
progenitors of the modern Prussians. After the
great migrations there began to grow up in what
is now Germany the separate dominions of the
Saxons, Thuringians, Alamanni and Suevi
(Swabia), Ripuarian Franks (Franconia), and
Bavarians. A thousand years were to pass be-
fore they would begin unification. Charlemagne
started such a process as he had in Italy, subjugat-
ing the Saxons, but after his death the former dis-
integration was resumed. His grandson, Charles,
wielded a temporary and nominal sway over the
greater empire, but the Normans came into the
North to help break this up, and after them the
long night of separate dukedoms and feudalism in
Germany began. All through the Middle Ages
the different principalities were maintained.
Even under Otto the Great and Frederick Bar-

44 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

barossa there was no tendency toward union of
peoples. The dukes constantly extended their
privileges and separate rights by the sale of
allegiance to the emperors during the contests of
the latter with the Papacy to maintain jurisdiction
in the Holy Roman Empire — that great phantom
of the medieval mind. Neither German king nor
emperor was hereditary, but elective and in the
hands of the dukes. Nor were they confined to a
single dukedom. Thus Henry the Fowler and the
first three Ottos were Saxons, Henry H was a
Bavarian, Conrad II a Franconian, as were Henry
III to V, Lothair was duke of Saxony, Conrad II
of Hauenstaufen was duke of Franconia, and
Frederick Barbarossa, Henry V, Philip and Fred-
erick II were Swabians. Finally internecine wars
and long absences of the emperors in Italy, where
Guelph and Guibbeline continued fighting, caused
the dukedoms to break up entirely. There were
archbishops, bishops, abbots, dukes, margraves,
landgraves and counts who claimed no superior but
the Emperor whose authority they had destroyed.
Petty knights and barons descended upon passing
travelers. The peasantry and serfs of the dif-
ferent principalities did not mingle. Culture and
refinement prevailed only in the courts of the great
dukes. Leagues of cities were local.

The last half of the thirteenth century saw the
beginnings of the Austrian power. The Oster-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 45

reich, or East Realm, had been occupied by the
Quadi, Taurici and considerable Marcomanni.
There had been in Styria, Carinthia, Triest and
Istria strata of Huns, Slovenes, Avars, Franks,
Moravians and Magyars. In the last half of the
thirteenth century, under Rudolph of Hapsburg,
Austria extended its dominion over and consoli-
dated the districts named, and made it possible to
begin a process of amalgamation. In the last half
of the sixteenth century the Austrian people thus
created attained their maximum and conquered
Bohemia, most of Hungary (due to the death of
Suleiman and the decline of Turkish power),
Slavonia and 1 ransylvania. It was the Spanish
Charles V who .nherited this dominion, as well as
the old Hapsb jrg territories in the Netherlands
and the Spanish conquests in Italy. But Austria
had expended its strength, accepting the feudal
and nominal allegiance of the northern principali-
ties and interfering very little therein. If there
had been a complete transfusion of Austrian and
Hungarian blood after the conquests in the latter
part of the sixteenth century, Austria would now,
three centuries later, be within itself again a great
power. But Hungary has kept its identity, cus-
toms, language and political institutions and the
transfusion has been inconsiderable, though enough
to add new strength to Austria. Bohemia, too,
has maintained its language.

46 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Returning now from this digression, which ex-
plains so much of German history, it will be found
that after the beginnings of Austria in the thir-
teenth century the German kingship was held in
such light esteem, due to the constant disintegra-
tion, that it was conferred electively upon a Bo-
hemian, a Moravian and then a Hungarian. In
the fifteenth century the disunion among the duke-
doms became even greater and few of these elective
kings had any authority except over their own
original jurisdiction. In the north there was con-
stant fighting among the duchies. Austria drew
away from the principalities, now added to by
Brandenburg under the Hohenzollerns. These
were indifferent to Austria's foreign wars. Local
diets administered them and the princes were prac-
tically sovereigns. The breaking away from the
Church in the Reformation awakened the peoples,
but only accentuated their territorial separateness.
When Luther appeared the sole German language
was that of the chanceries. With that as a basis
he translated the Bible and made what grew into a
common language later. But the principal states
still spoke different tongues. The attempts of
Sickingen and Hutton to establish unity resulted
in their deaths. The League of Schmalkalden fell
apart and the Protestant states fought each other
with great cruelty. The empire had now disin-
tegrated into three hundred separate territorial
entities.

THE LAW OF BLOOD 47

It was not until 1619, at the opening of the
Thirty Years' War, that the peoples of the pres-
ent Germany started amalgamation. In their
struggle against the Papacy and the Austrian Em-
pire the Saxons, Prussians, Bavarians, Fran-
conians, Thuringians, Swabians and Pomeranians
began to feel a common interest. In the awful
process by which their population was cut down
from twenty to six millions in thirty years and
cannibalism is said to have been practised was
forged the weapon by which modern Germany was
made. With the exception of two years, nearly
all the fighting took place in the south, particularly
Bohemia and Bavaria, leaving the Northern
peoples to be drawn together by mutual ties.
These thought and fought as one. Feudalism dis-
appeared. Turenne's incursion into Bavaria
alone saved its people for amalgamation into the
future German Empire. By the treaty of West-
phalia in 1648, having loved freedom enough to
die for it, they made it certain that men should be
allowed to think as they pleased. Then came
Frederick the Great, who, with the sword of
Prussia, tempered by the good blood, principally
Pomeranian, that had been transfused with it from
the north, further consolidated the peoples. Each
of the older states — Bavaria, Saxony, Thuringia,
Franconia, and Swabia (now Wiirttemberg) — had
had its time. It was Prussia with newer blood

48 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

that took the lead. Napoleon still further united
them, first by conquering and giving them laws
and then by rousing their patriotic ardor to de-
feat him. Finally came Bismarck and the present
great man who has guided the destinies of united
Germany for more than a quarter of a century, and
the Germans — no longer Bavarians, Saxons,
Thuringians, Prussians, Franks, Pomeranians —
after three centuries of transfusion are charged
with the vigor that will enable them to do the
mighty work they have so well begun.

Every nation when it expands showers its popu-
lation over other lands, just as the bud rises to
bloom, flowers and decays. Each one of the great
powers engaged in the present struggle has fulfilled
this part of the law of blood with the exception of
Germany. Britain has expanded over one-fourth
of the globe and controls a fourth of its popula-
tion. The most aggressive of its people have gone
to Canada, the United States, Australia, South
Africa and India. The least vital and therefore
the least pugnacious have remained at home.
These call upon the colonies to help them.
Canada, Australia and South Africa with noble
spirit respond liberally out of their population, but
they cannot save the empire on the battlefields
of Europe ; they are of one blood. Of the people
of Australia 96% per cent, are British. Outside
of Quebec, where the French language is spoken

THE LAW OF BLOOD 49

and 87 per cent, are of French descent, practically
all are British in Canada. The three hundred mil-
lions of people in India have been ruled by 165,-
000 Englishmen. This is no miracle. It is the
law of blood. The Indian people had their zenith
and passed to complete decline many centuries
ago. So weak are they in the strength that blood
gives that they have been peaceable and orderly
under so small a number and awe of the British
name. Indian troops are placed in the field.
They mean nothing when pitted against people
with greater energy. The British fleet is made up
almost entirely of the blood of the British island.
By failure to give Ireland justice and to mingle
with its people England has prevented a strength
in its fighting arm which it might otherwise have.
A preponderance of sea power may be limited by
the force to man it, as was indicated by the
North Sea battle of 1916 in which the advantage
rested with the Germans. At Salamis, Lepanto,
the Armada and Trafalgar the greater numbers
went down to utter defeat. The superiority in
ships might have won had not blood given strength
as well as ideas to overcome the handicap. When
the Spanish Armada appeared with its larger gal-
leons the Spaniards taunted the English with cow-
ardice, just as the British have taunted the Ger-
mans in the present war for not fighting them as
they wished them to fight on the sea. But the

50 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

English with smaller ships ran alongside, poured
shot into the bottoms of the larger craft, and dex-
terously got away before the Spaniards could
board them. Then they sent fire ships among the
great enemy, who was running before them when
the storm came. Only twenty-eight out of the
130 ships of Medina Sidonia returned to Spain.
Thousands of the poor Spaniards succeeded in
reaching the coasts of the British islands from the
wreckage of their ships alive. England did not
stop to consider their prayers ; it ordered every last
man and boy put to the sword.

England is fighting for a preponderance of in-
fluence in Europe and for commercial supremacy
throughout the world. The power to govern is
the power to tax, and it desires to retain its im-
mense colonies, despite the fact that it must go
the way of all the earth. It pretends it is fighting
only for the neutrality of Belgium. Did Eng-
land conquer India for the benefit of that great
possession or its own? Did it suppress the Boer
Republic for the benefit of the South Africans who
fought for liberty, or that of the British Empire?
Did it conquer Canada for the benefit of the peo-
ple there, or because it was a rich country and
England wanted it? For whose benefit did it re-
fuse representation with taxation in 1775, rnain-
tain the right of search and seizure of neutral ships
in 1812, and side with the South in order that it

THE LAW OF BLOOD 51

might get cotton in the Civil War? For whose
benefit was it that in 1912 Great Britain made its
recognition of the new republic of China condi-
tional upon the agreement of the latter to cease
regarding Tibet as a Chinese province? For
whose benefit was it that the English government
paid to have Napoleon murdered *? ^ As the Great
Conqueror said, no French king would have dared
to put away three of his wives in cold blood as
Henry VIII did. It was also Napoleon who re-
ferred to Britain as a nation of shop keepers.
And he might have recalled that it was the Eng-
lish who burned Jeanne d'Arc at the stake.

For whose benefit was it that England com-
pelled Germany and France on the eve of the war
of 1870 to guarantee the neutrality of Belgium*?
The latter is at its front door, just across from the
mouth of the Thames. In the hands of either of
the combatants it would have been a menace.
England might have thrown its navy against the
side that declined such a guarantee. What easier
than to compel neutrality? But for whose bene-
fit was it? The Cambridge Modern History says :
'Tt was recognized both in France and Prussia
that England, busied with domestic reforms under
Gladstone, was unwilling to interfere in conti-
nental affairs, but that the neutrality of Belgium
was very dear to the English people, who would

3 "Life of NapoleoD," by J. Holland Rose, Vol. I, p. 416, seq.

52 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

certainly not brook the presence of either power at
Antwerp''

Britain has set forth the claim that in furthering
the cause of Belgium she is upholding the sacred
principle of the integrity of treaties, violated by
Germany in entering neutral territory. The in-
ference is that England has never failed to live up
to the terms of a document to which it has been a
signatory party. The hypocrisy of this is made
evident by a letter of Napoleon to the Czar of
Russia in 1803: "A more serious contest has
arisen with England. Under the provisions of
the treaty of Amiens she was held to evacuate
Malta within three months, and France on her
side to evacuate Taranto within the same period.
I have faithfully evacuated Taranto. On inquir-
ing why Malta was not evacuated, I received the
reply that there was as yet no Grand Master : that
was adding a clause to the treaty. The Grand
Master is appointed. I am told it was necessary
to await the accession of Your Majesty, to which I
agreed and which is now accomplished. I notified
the British Cabinet to this effect. Then England
raised the mask and informed me that she wished
to hold Malta for seven years." At the same time
the French Emperor said lO Lord Whitworth, the
British ambassador: "The English want war, but
if they are first to draw the sword, I shall be the
last to place it in the scabbard. They don't ob-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 53

serve treaties; we shall have to veil them in crape.
If you want to arm, I will arm too; if you want to
fight, I too will iight. Woe betide those who do
not respect treaties! The French people can be
killed, but cannot be intimidated!"

Philanthropic England I The same kind of a
plea of benign disinterestedness is made against
what is termed German ''militarism." The
French fighting a war of vengeance to recapture
Alsace and Lorraine, despite the fact that they
comprised so-called German territory for 1200
years and French for 160 years, have something
like six millions of men in the field. This is pa-
triotism. Russia, fighting to Slavise Europe and
enter the Mediterranean, is estimated to have
seven millions of men in anus. That is the high-
est altruism. Italy, having used the prestige of
the Triple Alliance in gaining Tripoli from the
Turks, cuts the throats of those who helped it and
puts four millions of men at the front to gain terri-
tory at the expense of Austria. This is pure
beneficence. England, having gained a fourth of
the world by force and holding great colonies in
order that they may feed British manufactures,
has the greatest navy on the globe and a million
men in France in order to hold them. That is a
wise humanitarianism. But Germany, in the cen-
ter of Europe and surrounded by powers whose in-
terests are diametrically opposed to hers, has a well

54 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

trained army of perhaps six millions of men at the
present time and is guilty of ''militarism I''

These British said a century ago that Napoleon
was a monster. There was no name too harsh to
cover his iniquities. Yet to-day they outvie the
rest of Europe in praising him. He bridled the
revolution, gave new laws to half of Europe, made
Italian unity possible, taught the world the art of
war which it is practising now, plus German
science, and by his expedition to Egypt gave the
keystone of all that has since been learned of an-
tiquity. But to the English he was an upstart and
a scoundrel. The German Emperor has become
not much less to them. What is the truth? If
the war had not started, the whole world would
agree that the Kaiser is one of the great men in it
— in all that makes a noble ruler, fulfilling the
ideal of Frederick the Great that the King is the
first servant of the state and, like David, ruling in
the fear of God. Versatile, able, forceful, con-
structive, of quick decision, clean and wholesome
in his private life, he typifies and epitomizes the
ideals of a great nation.

France is so weak it is unable to reproduce it-
self. Its people say this is will, but strong vitality
overcomes the will and leads to naturalness and
wholesomeness of life. The French population
has hardly altered since 1871. Is it to be won-
dered at that the French forces make no headway

THE LAW OF BLOOD 55

against the Germans in France^ The Frenchman
drinks champagne, cognac, absinthe. Burgundy,
claret and the strongest cordials, such as Bene-
dictine. This is because he is so weak it requires
that much to stimulate him. For the same reason
the Englishman drinks whiskey, stout, grog, rum,
gin and ale, the Italian drinks chianti, cassis, bar-
bara, sauterne and bitters, and the Russian im-
bibes vodka, a synonym for hre. The German en-
joys beer and Rhine wine, the lightest alcoholic
beverages, due to the fact that he is so strong it
requires that little to stimulate him.

Take the leading men of Germany and consider
them beside similar Frenchmen and Englishmen.
The Kaiser, Bethmann-Hollweg, Tirpitz, Hinden-
burg and Biilow are tall, full-breasted, red-faced
men, full of life and power and yet their faces
expressive of great intellectuality. Poincare, the
President of France, is a little pot-bellied lawyer.
General Joff re, a man of slow movement who gave
new proof that a fat man cannot become a con-
queror; General Nivelle, an officer with little vi-
tality who temporarily distinguished himself only
in defensive operations, and Briand, a man of
quick wit who has given no indication of great
strength. The leading men in England are Lloyd-
George, Asquith, John Morley, Earl of Rosebery
and the King. They are sallow faced individuals
who would not inspire confidence in a physical con-

56 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

test. Certainly none would consider Lord Kitch-
ener, Sir John French or Sir Douglas Haig great
in achievement. The leading Italians have faces
of bluish tint, showing that their blood is old.
The Czar is a mollycoddle.

'Tor there is a day of judgment unto the Lord
of Hosts over every proud and lofty one, that he
be brought low." And again: "Destruction
shall come over transgressors and sinners together,
and those that forsake the Lord shall perish."
England believes in her pride she can remain
among the transcendent powers of the earth after
her time has passed. But it might be said of Eng-
land, as it was said of Babylon of old, "O thou
that dwellest in many waters, great in treasures,
thy end is come, the full measure of thy selfish rob-
bery." Jealous of rising Germany, she makes a
desperate effort to destroy its power on the pretext
that she is doing it for humanity; but the law of
blood is sure : as she has by force of arms made Ire-
land and others succumb, she herself must give
way to the mightier hand that will carry along the
work of the world.

Belgium must pay the penalty of her cruel atti-
tude toward the people of the Congo. It is the
law of retribution. Of Belgium atrocities. The
Cambridge Modern History says: "But it was
by its treatment of the native peoples that the
Congo state attained that evil eminence which

THE LAW OF BLOOD 57

accumulating proof shows it to have well de-
served. . . . The native was wronged by the
disregard of his system of land ownership and of
the tribal rights to hunt and gather produce in
certain areas, as well as by a system of compulsory
labor in the collection of produce on behalf of the
state, enforced by barbarous punishment and re-
sponsible for continuous and devastating warfare."
Belgium pays with the loss of its sovereignty.
Russia has treated five millions of Jews within its
borders with savage barbarity and kept its peas-
antry so ignorant that only thirty-eight per cent,
know how to read and write. England in her hy-
pocrisy has kept Russia out of the case for the sake
of the argument. Does she suppose the rest of the
world has stopped thinking?

It is stated by British sympathizers in this coun-
try that the Germans are "hyphenated Ameri-
cans." The same charge is laid at the door of the
Irish. Why are the German-American Alliance,
the Ancient Order of Hibernians and the Clan-
na-Gaels in existence? Because the German loves
to cherish the memory of his Fatherland, the land
of Luther, Bernhard of Saxe-Weimer, Frederick the
Great, Bliicher, Stein, Moltke, Bismarck and Wil-
liam II, the land of song and beer and the Rhine.
Because the Irishman remains loyal in his memory
to the Emerald Isle, the "auld sod," the home of
his ancestors, where British tyranny kept him

58 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

down and which he and his fathers left to find op-
portunity in a free land. He keeps as green as his
island the names of St. Patrick, Shane O'Neill,
Desmond, Tone, Emmet, O'Connell and Parnell.
O'Neill, Desmond, Tone and Emmet were hunted
to their deaths by the British. So was Sir Roger
Casement, who, though a patriot, was hung as a
criminal and buried in quick lime. Should either
the Germans or the Irish be ashamed of loyalty
to the memory of their fathers^ Is there wrong
in their organizations to cherish that memory^
They are loyal only to the memory. No nation-
alities have contributed so much in population and
allegiance to the United States as these. No peo-
ples so quickly seek naturalization None become
true Americans more rapidly. Ir is difficult for
the Germans to influence their children to learn the
German language. According to the last Census
there were in 1910 in the United States 13,515,-
886 foreign born. Of these Germany contributed
2,501,333, or 18.5 per cent.; Austria-Hungary,
1,569,973, or 12.8 per cent, and Ireland 1,352,-
251, or 10 per cent. Together they contributed
41.3 per cent. Of the 32,243,282 people of for-
eign white stock in the United States in 1910 —
they, or cither parent born in a foreign land — 25. 1
per cent, were German, 14 per cent, were Irish, 6
per cent, were Austrian and 2 per cent, were Hun-
garian, a total of 47 per cent. The conclusion

THE LAW OF BLOOD 59

that of the total population of the United States
at the present time much more than a majority is
of German, Irish, Austrian and Hungarian
descent, near or remote, may be gathered from the
fact that the Germans and Irish alone made up
28.5 per cent, of the foreign born population in
1910; 40.8 per cent, in 1900; 50.3 per cent, in
1890; 57.2 per cent, in 1880; 64.7 per cent, in
1870 and 70 per cent, in i860. As late as 1910,
after fifty years of immigration and assimilation,
there were 8,282,618 white persons in this coun-
try having Germany as their land of direct origin
or who had at least one parent having it as the
place of birth. At the same time there were 4,-
504,360 person:, having Ireland as their land of
nativity or who jiad at least one parent bom there,
2,001,559 Austrians of like condition, and 700,-
227 of Hungarian stock. In that year there were
2,752,675 (mostly Jews) who or at least one
parent of who^n haled from Russia, 2,322,442
from England, 659,663 from Scotland, 2,098,360
from Italy, and 292,389 from France. The pre-
ponderance of German and Irish immigration be-
comes even more evident when it is considered that
to the foreign bom population Germany contrib-
uted 30.5 per cent, in i860; 30.4 per cent, in
1870; 29.4 per cent, in 1880; 30.1 per cent, in
1890; 27.2 per cent, in 1900, and 18.5 per cent, in
1910: England contributed 10.4 per cent, in i860;

6o THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

lo per cent, in 1870; 9.9 per cent, in 1880; 9.8
per cent, in 1890; 8.1 per cent, in 1900, and 6.5
per cent, in 1910: Scotland contributed 2.6 per
cent, in i860; 2.5 per cent, in 1870; 2.5 per cent,
in 1880; 2.6 per cent, in 1890; 2.3 per cent, in
1900, and 1.9 per cent, in 1910; Ireland con-
tributed 38.5 per cent, in i860; 33.3 per cent, in
1870; 27.8 per cent, in 1880; 20.2 per cent, in
1890; 15.6 per cent, in 1900, and 10 per cent, in
1910; Italy contributed 0.3 per cent, in i860;
0.3 per cent, in 1870; 0.7 per cent, in 1880; 2 per
cent, in 1890; 4.7 per cent, in 1900, and 9.9 per
cent, in 1910: France contributed 2.6 per cent, in
i860; 2.1 per cent, in 1870; 1.6 per cent, in
1880; 1.2 per cent, in 1890; 1 per cent, in 1900,
and 0.9 per cent, in 1910; Russia and Finland con-
tributed 0.1 per cent, in i860; 0.1 per cent, in
1870; 0.5 per cent, in 1880; 2 per cent, in 1890;
6.2 per cent, in 1900, and 12.8 per cent, in 1910.
And yet the peoples that have given so much to the
warp and woof of the nation in the last sixty years
are termed "hyphenates" by those who have given
comparatively little !
/ These German and Irish Americans have al-
ways fought for liberty. In the Civil War there
were engaged on the side of the North and against
slavery and disunion 250,000 Germans and 150,-
000 Irishmen. If in that war there was a single
English, French, Russian or Italian regiment,

THE LAW OF BLOOD 61

history has not yet recorded it. "Once an
Englishman, always an Englishman" prevents
great numbers of hyphenated Britishers. The
Russians who escape to this country forget their
native land as quickly as possible. There are
too few French-Americans to make any difference.
The Italian-Americans seem to have called forth
no resentment. Certainly the hyphenation of
Germans and Irish has not interfered with their
patriotism. The loudest cries against "hyphen-
ated Americans" have come from New York
City, which was Tory in the Revolution, where
the draft riots against conscription for the cause
of the Union occurred in the Civil War, where
the 7th Regiment refused to obey the call to arms
in 1898, where to-day a part of the press attempts
to make black seem white and white appear black
and where the Pecksniffs and Lickspittles are help-
ing Britain with gold and outdoing themselves in
adulation of the English cause. They forget that
England cared nothing for us for more than a
century, only had respect for us when Grover
Cleveland gave it the choice of war or arbitration
in the Venezuela case, and that it was after and
not before the battle of Manila Bay that the
British gave a kindness and consideration to
Dewey which he did not expect or need. When
it became possible for us to help them, to sell
them arms, food and clothing, they concluded

62 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

that this is a nation worth while. After the pres-
ent appeal to arms a theory was allowed to grow
up in this country that international law is better
than sense and that Americans should be pro-
tected on the high seas, no matter where they may
be found, even on the vessels of a nation en-
gaged with another in a life and death struggle;
despite the fact that law is maintained only by
force and agreement and is overcome by revolu-
tion (as stated in the Virginia Bill of Right and
the Declaration of Independence), of which war
is the highest expression. When the parties to
an agreement abrogated it, the one by setting
up standards to suit its own necessities and re-
fusing to permit food to enter Germany on the
fictitious plea that the food supply there was regu-
lated by the government, and the other by using
submarines to put down passenger vessels with-
out warning and without taking off the passen-
gers, should the United States have stepped in and
announced its determination to protect Americans
on British vessels, without at the same time in-
sisting at the risk of war on its right to send
its foodstuffs and mails into Germany and neutral
countries without molestation^ Britain seized
and searched our vessels in the war of 1812, fought
with us three years and burned the capitol at
Washington over the right to do so. Peace was
made without anything having been gained by us

THE LAW OF BLOOD 63

and the practice ceased only because England no
longer had use for it ; Napoleon had been sent to St.
Helena. In the present war Britain resumed that
practice. Our government should have stopped
the shipment of arms and ammunition to the Allies,
if necessary, in order to compel England, in con-
trol of the seas, to respect our international rights.
Righteousness exalteth a nation. Unfairness
does not. It is manifestly unfair to treat one
empire in conflict with another with extreme se-
verity and the other with great lenity; for the
spirit of the farewell address of George Washing-
ton should keep us from even implied alliance with
foreign powers, each of which should be consid-
ered friendl)^ until directly in conflict with us. If
the British Empire had then refused to lessen its
attempt to starve the non-combatant population
of Germany, or interfere w^th our commerce other-
wise and our mails, even at the risk of having
arms and ammunition from us cut off, what would
have been the reason? Simply that the British
government had sense enough to know that it
must use every means within its power to cripple
or destroy the enemy. Why should it have
stopped at international law? Why not make
the forms seem like law? And why, then, should
Germany have stopped at international law?
Why should it not also use sense and attempt to
become the terror of the sea, so far as the ships

64 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

of the enemy are concerned, whether passenger
or freight *? As Lloyd-George said in the House
of Commons, "British shipping is the jugular vein
which if severed would destroy the life of the na-
tion." Germany must and should as a war meas-
ure sever that vein, if possible, in order to pro-
tect its civilization. The United States would
hesitate at no less if hemmed in by enemies intent
upon its utter destruction. Germany has never
attacked an American vessel contrary to interna-
tional law, except in the case of the Frye, when
it quickly agreed to reparation. Why should this
country not apply to both combatants the rule
of reason? Why not have protected only Ameri-
can vessels'? In that event any power which had
attacked them would have faced a united Ameri-
canism. Why not have been absolutely just and
fair by maintaining international law with both
sides at the point of the sword, or recognized
that each was seeking to destroy the other under
the mandate of military" necessity and prevented
neither from doing so*? In 1916 I listened to ad-
dresses at the Conference on International Law
at Washington. Legalists there were themselves
divided in their opinion as to whether subma-
rines had added new conditions uncovered by the
set of principles laid down by the present com-
batant nations and abrogated by them in other
particulars in this war. International law made

THE LAW OF BLOOD 65

by states in time of peace should not be wor-
shiped as a fetich, if conditions of submarine war-
fare hitherto unknown make it in conflict with
right reason, because of the need of destroying
the enemy in time of war. A British bottom
carrying the British flag is British territory. The
principle that British ships should be protected
simply because they have Americans on board is
just as baseless in common sense as it would be
to contend that London should be protected from
bombs thrown from Zeppelins because Americans
are in that city or that the contending forces on
the battle front on the continent should be with-
held from each other because an American or two
might be between them. No divinity hedges
an American, though demagogues may so contend.
He is subject to the law of nature. If he jumps
from a high building he will be killed, as will a
German, a Frenchman or a Britisher. Just so
he should be subject to the law of vital necessity
in war and the rule of common sense. If Ger-
many has been cruel, was England benign in keep-
ing food from the Germans? And if Germany
shows some lack of consideration for its enemies,
might it not, in view of the recollection of what
England did in its day of expansion, exclaim with
Lord Clive, "By God, sir, I am astonished at my
own moderation !" The Allies would like to have
had the Germans fight with perfume and talcum

66 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

powder, but the soldiers of the Kaiser are in their
full strength; they have fought "mitt Sturm und
drang," "mitt donner und blitzen."

Every nation has its time. Every nation does
a work. Every nation falls to decay. None
comes back. It is the same as with a man whose
body dies, but whose work lives on. Britain gave
to the world constitutional liberty and representa-
tive government. It gave birth to four great na-
tions. It taught the people of India its institu-
tions so that they might some day better govern
themselves, though that was not what it did it
for. It did as great a work as has ever been
done by any nation in all the history of mankind.
France gave art and literature to the modem
world. Russia gave a semblance of order to the
semi-barbaric tribes that rushed westward from
Asia, and thereby helped to protect the civiliza-
tion of Europe. Italy in its renewal of life gave
the Renaissance. But as conquering nations they
must pass into the sleep of the ages and take on
that original form from which they started to
expand. It is the law of death. They cannot
escape it.

What then is to be the work of Germany? Its
victory being written in the law of blood and as
certain as the rising and falling of the tides, what
message will it give to mankind*? England in

THE LAW OF BLOOD 67

the bitterness of its jealousy declares Germany to
be barbaric. Is that nation barbaric which gave
the joys of the Kriss Kringle and is the toy maker
of the world? The heart that delights childhood
must have something of the heart of a child. Is
that nation composed of barbarians which has
given the highest expression in modern music? Is
the soul only half civilized that can create the won-
derful melodies of a Mendelssohn, a Beethoven,
a Strauss, a Bach, a Meyerbeer, a Schumann, a
Brahms, a Wagner, stirring those of millions of
others to better thoughts and deeds? The soul
that loves music is sensitive to the highest im-
pressions. From what crude barbaric instinct did
there spring the desire to join in chorus of song in
the thousands of local singing societies through-
out Germany? Is the country that created and
developed the kindergarten, technical training
schools, specialization in the universities and vo-
cational training that of barbarians? And what
of Leibnitz, Lessing, Schleiermacher, Fichte, Kant,
Schelling, Hagel, Nietzsche, Eucken? Were
they all barbarians, too? The philosophic mind
can thrive only amid a people who love thought.
James Bryce, in the latest revision of his "Holy
Roman Empire," speaks of that "breadth of de-
velopment in German thought and literature by
virtue of which in the first half of the nineteenth

68 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

century it transcended the French hardly less than
the Greek surpassed the Roman." ^ Maybe
Goethe, Schiller and recently Hauptmann are bar-
barians. Are the surpassing accomplishments of
the Germans in surgery and medicine further evi-
dences of their bucolic nature *? Rontgen may
have been semi-civilized, but his x-ray certainly
has benefited mankind. The same may be said
of Koch, Virchow and Schliemann in the respec-
tive fields of bacteriolog}% pathology and arch-
aeology. Was it barbarous to give the workmen
of Germany insurance against sickness, old age
and accident? Was it uncivilized to give the
world modern sanitation? Can England boast
of a poor law by which poverty has been abol-
ished? Illiteracy is less than half of one per
cent, in Germany. Nowhere on the globe is there
a more wholesome family life. Love of religion
in the deepest sense is rife among the German
people. And nowhere are women in their sphere
held in higher regard. In administrative system,
particularly municipal government, and in all that
means the application of scientific method Ger-
many far outdistances any of its opponents. In
trade and industry the German people have by
their patience and system rivaled the British Em-
pire. But England assures Americans that the

■* "Holy Roman Empire," 1909 ed., p. 432.

THE LAW OF BLOOD 69

Germans are barbarians. Do the British think
Americans are simple minded*?

From Martin Luther, who laid the foundations
of modern liberty of thought, to Frederick the
Great, who fought Europe in arms, made it possi-
ble for Prussia to do her future work and taught
the rulers of his time how to govern ; to Bismarck,
who developed the land in the spirit of blood and
iron and said "we Germans fear God and nobody
else" ; to the present German Emperor who closely
resembles Frederick Barbarossa, Maximilian I,
William the Conqueror and Peter the Great and
gives evidence of the truth that when there is a
great work to be done in history a great man ap-
pears, the nation has been coming to the fulness
of its strength. As Bryce says, Germany has
been brought into quickened life by ''what we call
the instinct and passion of nationality, the desire
of a people already conscious of a moral and so-
cial unity, to see such unity expressed and realized
under a single government which shall give it a
place and name among civilized states."

What is that place and name to be*? What
will Germany have accomplished in 1919 when
it shall have reached the full maturity of its pow-
ers, its maximum, and be ready to gain its widest
extent of territory wherein its 68,000,000 peo-
ple, n«w comprised within boundaries less than
the State of Texas, must expand?

70 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

First, Germany may seek to seize and annex
all of Russia to the line of the Dnieper and Duna
rivers, from Riga to Kief to Odessa. This is the
land taken by Czars and a Czarina since 1721 and
includes all of the 5,000,000 Jews who have been
trampled in the dust. These, the Poles, who have
already been promised a more autonomous govern-
ment, and other peoples within the area named
would be given the benefit of German training and
have their poverty abolished. No dynasty like
that of the Romanoffs would be able to withstand
such a defeat as Russia would thus receive. Their
tyranny has been unexampled in modern history.
This might possibly mean a revolution, gathering
for a long time. The spirit that animated Russia
in the mighty contests with Charles XII and
Napoleon will prevent any desertion of its allies
and the making of a separate peace.

Second, Germany should annex all of Belgium.
The harbor of Antwerp is too rich a prize to let
go. A nation expands to the limit of its strength.

Third, Austria may aim to annex all of the
Italian peninsula to the old southern boundary
of the Papal States, more than half of the present
Italy, and restore the Papacy to nominal tem-
poral jurisdiction within its former limits, thereby
strengthening the monarchy with the Catholics in
both Austro-Hungary and Germany. The re-
vival of these limits of the old empire was the

THE LAW OF BLOOD 71

dream of Treitschke, which would thus be ful-
filled. A fitting punishment for a nation with-
out loyalty I Herculaneum might be thoroughly
excavated by the scholars of Germany and its
treasures given to mankind, after Italy refused
to permit other nations to do the work and then
itself failed to do it.

Fourth, France might be made to sacrifice to
Austria all of old Burgundy from the Mediterran-
ean up the Rhone to Lyons and thence to Lake
Geneva, including all the territory east and south
of those limits. This was formerly a part of the
old empire. France might also be compelled to
cede to Germany the land east of a line from the
mouth of the Somme to Basel, Switzerland.
Most of this, too, was formerly territory of the
Holy Roman Empire. A nation that does not
renew itself must expect to be circumscribed.
The French forts along the German border could
be demolished. With France and Italy con-
quered, it would be easier to take their navies.
And with Germany commanding the routes to In-
dia and the coast at Calais in France, eighteen
miles from Dover, can it be doubted that German
method would furnish the quick thought and
method necessary to give England a fatal blow?
What Napoleon yearned to do at Boulogne might
come to pass under German strength and science.
The longer the war lasts the more potent must

72 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

become the power of endurance which the freshest
transfusion of blood gives.

Fifth, if Germany succeeded it would not hesi-
tate to conquer England as completely as it was
subdued in 1 066, destroy its fleets, bankrupt it and
annex India (for a time on paper), Australia,
New Zealand, New Guinea and the British col-
onies in Africa. It would be unable to hold In-
dia because too exhausted after the gigantic strug-
gle to do so. That country might become a
republic, with the strength gained from the con-
quests and blood amalgamations of the Mogul
Emperor Apgar up to the time of his death in
1605; just as China was conquered by the
Manchus under Nurachu in 1616 and in 1911
overthrew the yoke and established a republic.
Ireland, too, would thus become a republic.
Without a shilling of credit, a fighting force on
land or sea, a colony, the British Empire would
become as Nineveh and Tyre. Germany could
not take Canada because of the Monroe Doctrine.
Eventually that territory will become a part of
the United States. England would also become a
republic. All this is, of course, dependent upon
the extermination of England's sea power.

Sixth, and most important, if Germany con-
quered it would annex the continent of Africa and
the Island of Madagascar. As Caesar by the
sword gave Western Europe the basis of Roman

THE LAW OF BLOOD 73

law and civilization, England placed the stamp
of its life upon North America and Spain upon
South America, so Germany could plant its in-
stitutions in that vast continent which was hardly
known sixty years ago. It is estimated that to-
day 126,000,000 people are there, most of them
still warring tribes in the interior. The highest
work Germany could render civilization would be
the systematic and thorough uplifting of this pop-
ulation through education and wise administra-
tion. The negro develops most under technical
training. Germany could give it. Instead of mere
exploitation by those who have not strength
enough to perform the task, the savage negroes
and bushman would be subdued into acceptance
of German regulations, and eventually every child
in Africa might be taught the lessons of German
life. It is assured that as long as the present
German Emperor lives, feeling that he has been
given by the Almighty a work to do among men,
the German arms will be devoted to the develop-
ment of civilization*? Several hundreds of thou-
sands or even millions of Germans might go to
Africa, and the same marvelous pains that have
been given to the enhancement of German com-
merce and warfare might be turned to making
that territory a continent of light instead of dark-
ness and a mammoth machine for the development
of its industrial resources. With Germany as

74 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

conqueror, every present European possessor of
land in Africa would lose it in the terms of peace.
Seventh, there should be an adjustment in the
Balkans compatible with German ideals. This
would include the annexation to Austria of Servia,
Montenegro and Albania and such compensation
to Turkey and Bulgaria as might be thought fea-
sible by the German Emperor. Then, later on,
it might mean the annexation of all the Balkan
states, including Turkey, the territory of which
would be needed for the defense of Africa. Why
not'? Certainly if there is a sink in Christendom
which needs a thorough and methodical scouring
by the Old Dutch Cleanser it is the Balkans and
particularly Turkey, which might be thrust across
the Hellespont into Asia Minor where the Turks
originally gathered their strength to attack Eu-
rope and which has been kept in European suzer-
ainty for more than a century only because of the
Balance of Power, now evidently broken up for-
ever. Like a sick man placed in charge of a hos-
pital, the Turk has been and would then be unable
to help anybody. He must return to the bound-
aries from whence he spread. It is the law of
blood. Turkey might be given compensation in
the provinces of Arbijan, Ardilan and Luristan in
Persia, which would no longer be under the influ-
ence of England and Russia. German sanitation,
education, method, would make the Balkans a fit

THE LAW OF BLOOD 75

place to dwell in and, under the rigors of German
law, safe from murder, feud, rapine and waste.
There would be no more daughters sold to the
Turk. There would be no more massacres of the
innocent. Oriental harems in the midst of pov-
erty would cease to be. The Balkans would be-
come like the streets of Berlin — clean, orderly,
decent. As Bulgaria was retransfused and again
expanded, it will soon be ready for a more vital
hand. Roumania will be but clay in the hands of
the potter.

Eighth, Germany's influence in the Austro-Hun-
garian Empire will be much greater, if it does not
amount to virtual sovereignty. The close of the
life of Francis Joseph, after the longest reign in
human history, removed a barrier to this. His
people had their apex two centuries ago. Alone,
they no longer have the blood which gives endur-
ance and strength to win battles and expand in
territory. When they by themselves fought the
Russians in Galicia they were thrust back to the
Carpathians. It was only when the Germans
helped them under a German general that they
drove the enemy to the east again. Austria has
been completely dormant since 1866 when the old
Empire went to pieces in fact, though on paper
in 1806. Its people need new life. German
energy would give it to them. There are probably
few Austrians who would object to becoming an in-

76 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

tegral part of a renewed and greater Germanic
Empire.

Ninth, it is a short step to the seizure of Hol-
land, whose monarch has no male heir, and which
commands the Zuyder Zee.

Tenth, Denmark may in time be taken to pro-
tect the Baltic and menace the Scandinavian
powers and given new life.

Eleventh, as Great Britain and Russia decline,
Japan might take, by conquest if necessary, all of
Manchuria, Mongolia, China, Tibet, Chinese
Turkestan and Siberia; that is, all of Asia within
the southern boundary of China, the Himalaya
Mountains south and west of Tibet, the Thian
Shan Mountains west of Chinese Turkestan, the
Altai Mountains west of Mongolia to the Yanesi
River, to its mouth in the Kara Sea, to the Arctic
and Pacific Oceans. Then it might extend its
boundaries southward to include Sumatra, French
Indo-China, Siam, the Malay Peninsula, Burma
to the Ganges and Bramaputra Rivers, and west-
ward to the Caspian and Urals, including Turk-
estan, the Khirghis Steppes and West Siberia.

Twelfth, the Empire of the West, of Charle-
magne and Napoleon, may again be reestablished
under William the Great. That will be his name
in the hereafter. His empire, in the event of such
victory, would include all the territory between the
Somme, the Rhone, Central Italy, the Mediter-

THE LAW OF BLOOD 77

ranean, the Black Sea, to Riga, to the Baltic, the
Skager Rack and Cattegat, to the North Sea to
France again. It might then include Africa, Aus-
tralia, New Zealand, New Guinea, Madagascar
and India (the latter for a time on paper). It
would include a people working wonders to de-
velop the populations under their guidance to
their ideals. Those, including some socialists of
Germany, who would like to have early peace
made, in effect desire that the heroes of Germany,
Austria and Hungary die in vain. But the hand
that wields the sword, the German Emperor, who
is but an instrument of God, will not stay until
the task be accomplished. And when that work
has been done and perhaps Europe and Africa
have been made over by the ceaseless efforts of
Germans to bring about better, stronger, saner
men, the world will be the permanent beneficiary.
Hence it is best for civilization that Germany win.
On the other hand, should the United States
enter the war against Germany the addition of our
virile blood would bring the conflict to a close
sooner and give victory to the Allies. But in so
doing the Republic of the United States would
utilize its immense resources in dollars, materials
and manhood in sustaining for a longer period the
effete Italian and British monarchies and retro-
grade France. If it sent troops to the Continent,
and several hundreds of thousands of our youth

78 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

were slain, nothing would be gained by us. No
territory would be added to our dominion. We
should not obtain the gratitude of the world by
being so unneutral, for other states would retain
their ambitions for the future. Nor would hu-
manity be advanced by the country of Washing-
ton and Lincoln giving comfort and helping to
extend the territory, at the expense of civilization,
of a Czar. Our participation would be contrary
to the orderly development of the centuries toward
liberty, lessen our influence as the friend of all
nations, and make more difficult and uncertain our
path in the future.

Such great changes as might follow the triumph
of German and Austrian arms are not unthinkable.
During the past few years seeming impossibilities
have come to pass in the destruction in this hemi-
sphere and on the Pacific Ocean of the power of
Spain by the United States, the withstanding of
the expansion of Russia in Asia by Japan, and the
practical elimination of the suzerainty of Turkey
in Europe by the Balkan States. And in view of
the fact that the law of blood works with exactness
the spreading out of Germany becomes inevitable.
This does not presage a limiting by Germany of
the growth and work of the United States. Peo-
ples without transfusion have been without em-
pire. The Irish with practically the same Cel-
tic stock for two thousand years were conquered

THE LAW OF BLOOD 79

by the nine times amalgamated British. The
negroid peoples of Africa, south of the great desert
and without transfusion, have made no impression
upon history. Only those north of that waste of
land who have mixed with Mediterranean peoples
have added to the pages of man's record. The
Philippines have produced no conqueror because
only an expansion of an older Malay race and not
an amalgamation, as in the case of Japan. South
America is of one Spanish blood, with the excep-
tion of uninfused Germans, Italians and Portu-
guese— the latter so similar to the Spanish by every
tie as to be almost one. That continent, for this
reason and also because of climate, holds for the
immediate future no conquering people. Nor does
Australia. In every other part of the earth each
people has had its day of expansion and
decay, with the exception of the Germans, Japa-
nese and Americans. The latter are the result of
the greatest conglomeration of blood since Adam.
They therefore have nothing to fear from any
modern Colossus which may arise and seek to be-
stride the world. Even colossae, as shown from
the beginning of history, have but short periods
of expanding strength. In their time, with the
force of their blood, the Americans will give to a
weary humanity the ideal of Tennyson,

"The Parliament of Man, the Federation of the
World."

CHAPTER II

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER

"Wars, therefore, are to be undertaken for this end,
that we may live in peace without being injured." —
Cicero.

"Terrible as war is, it yet displays the spiritual
grandeur of man daring to defy his mightiest hereditary
foe." — Heine.

In 1887 Aurelio Bertola, monk and historical
philosopher, made the prediction that the Euro-
pean political system had arrived at a perfect and
permanent equilibrium and that thereafter no fur-
ther wars would occur. Yet during the following
quarter century the continent was bathed in blood.
In the early part of 1914 Andrew Carnegie, philan-
thropist; Charles W. Eliot, president emeritus of
Harvard University; Theodore E. Burton, presi-
dent of the American Peace Society; William H.
Taft, later head of the League to Enforce Peace;
William Jennings Bryan, advocate of pacifying
nations with arbitration treaties, and Richard Bar-
tholdt, president of the Arbitration Group of the
Interparliamentary Union, were accounted leaders

in the United States of a movement to prevent all

80

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 81

future wars. Their efforts were vain. The
mightiest conflict in human story, perhaps the pre-
cursor of another twenty-five years of upheaval,
began in July of that year. Later some, like
Henry Ford, with the fanatical zeal of a Don
Quixote, were the more anxious to relieve human-
ity of the burdens of conflict and to "cry peace,
peace when there is no peace." Others were dis-
posed to imitate Burton, who, with the judgment
of a statesman, withdrew from the Peace Society
and became an ardent advocate of the prepared-
ness of the United States for any future attack.

How wide is the gulf between the dreams of
these who have idealized peace and the practical
facts of life may be gathered from the remark of
Frederick the Great that in looking over the pages
of history he had found not a decade in which there
had not been a great war. The gulf becomes
wider when we consider whether those wars have
harmed or benefited mankind. It becomes an im-
passable barrier when reflection is had upon the
question of whether the world is now ready for
permanent peace. For, as St. Augustine said, war
is the transition from a lower to a higher state of
civilization. Reactionary and medieval as this
conclusion may seem in the light of the suffering
upon the battlefields of our day, the facts of the
centuries completely vindicate it. Peace pleaders
are not new. For three thousand years there has

82 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

been seen upon the distant hill the beacon of war-
less brotherhood. The prophets of Israel saw it.
Jesus of Nazareth said in one breath that every
one should turn his left cheek to his neighbor when
smitten on the right, and in the next that he came
with a sword. Christendom in the two millen-
niums since has followed his example, idealizing
peace and turning from it when the reality ap-
peared. How disconcerting is reality!

The disparity between the great seers of Israel
and the leaders of the recent peace movement in the
United States is caused by the fact that the former
perceived amity at a far distant time as the ideal
of the earth, to be attained after countless wars,
and the latter have seen it in the immediate pres-
ent, to be brought about by the spending of money
or the holding of congresses. The Old Testament
is full of the admonition to fight for righteousness.
The Almighty says through Isaiah, "1 have created
the waster to destroy." And through Jeremiah,
"Cursed be he that doth the work of the Lord
negligently, and cursed be he that withholdeth his
sword from blood." It is only in the Gospels that
the ear of the centurion is healed in a twinkling
when Peter cuts it off. American advocates of
peace at any price are like those of whom Jeremiah
speaks :

"Then said I, Ah, Lord Eternal! behold, the
prophets say unto them, Ye shall not see the

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 83

sword, neither shall ye have famine; but a perma-
nent peace will I give in this place. Then said the
Lord unto me, Falsehood do the prophets prophesy
in my name; I have not sent them neither have I
commanded them, neither have I spoken unto
them; a vision of falsehood, and idolatrous folly,
and the deceit of their hearts do they prophesy unto
you. Therefore hath said the Lord concerning the
prophets that prophesy in my name when I have
not sent them, while they say, Sword and famine
shall not come in this land; by the sword and by
the famine shall these prophets come to their end."
And in Ezekiel: "Therefore, thus hath said the
Lord Eternal, Whereas ye have spoken falsehood,
and have seen lies: therefore I am against you,
saith the Lord Eternal. And my hand shall be
against the prophets that see falsehood, and that
divine lies; in the secret council of my people shall
they not be, and in the register of the house of
Israel shall they not be written, and into the land
of Israel shall they not come: and ye shall know
that I am the Lord Eternal. Even because they
have seduced my people^ saying^ 'Peace' when
there was no peace T

Are these latter day peace makers to be laughed
to scorn and sneered at, then, because their dreams
failed to come true? By no means. They are to
be appreciated as helping to keep mankind awake
to the great time for which the ages have waited.

84 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Andrew Carnegie, busily working to bring about
the brotherhood of man, will not have lived in vain
if he shall have made men discern the light more
clearly. Nor will Eliot, Taft, Bartholdt and
Ford. But they perhaps forget that they are now
older than they once were and that in their younger
days they overcame their rivals and by individual
war alone attained their ends, one as head of a uni-
versity, another as President of the United States,
still another as member of the House of Repre-
sentatives for two decades, and the last as the lead-
ing automobile manufacturer of America. Bryan
ruled the Democratic party for twelve years with
an iron hand, brooking no opposition, making his
will supreme. He never won a battle over party
opponents with a pact of peace. The older of
these men, having attained their utmost, are now
content to stand by and urge a milder dispensation.
If they had been so inclined toward peace in the
early part of their lives, they would not now be so
prominent.

So it is with every nation. When youthful and
vigorous it of necessity exerts itself and accom-
plishes its ends by conquest. When its time for
such exertion has passed it is content to remain
passive. From the lowest protoplasm to the high-
est organism in nature, when opposing interests
clash they fight. By this means the strong and
healthy force overcomes the weak and the fittest

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 85

survives. Nothing gained by struggle is lost. A
man fights for his living, gains it, is thereby en-
abled to marry and give children to the world, and
at the same period of existence contends for what-
ever he may undertake in mind or materials.
Then he enjoys what he has earned and gradually
passes to decline. An old man of ninety may pro-
duce intellectual results, but that which comes
from strenuous effort of nerve or muscle has passed
from him forever. And so all that mankind has
accomplished has been the result of struggle.
Added up, it expresses modern civilization. The
war in Europe indicates that the process has not
stopped. As men can attain nothing except by
contention, so states can give nothing to humanity
except by war. By battle they defend themselves
until they have expressed their civilization. By
war they extend it over the territories they con-
quer. The art and philosophy of Greece and the
law of Rome are at the disposal of a world to-day,
and only because the Greeks and Romans did not
hesitate at bloody strife when the occasion re-
quired.

War stimulates the highest and noblest impulses
in man. It is primal to be aggressive, to struggle,
to advance. The female admires the male who
can protect her and her offspring. The individual
who will not fight for his mate when she is at-
tacked, or for his brood, is not manly but effemi-

86 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

nate. The citizen who will not fight for his na-
tive land when it is assailed is no patriot, but a
coward. They who praise peace as a thing to be
desired in itself only indulge in cheap cant and
extol weakness and cowardice in the name of
humanity. They who declare that the time of
battle is not at hand in our country and that it will
not appear in the near future are without suffi-
cient energy to be aggressive, and are therefore not
the ones who should be leaders of a young and
vigorous nation and prepare it for its destiny.
The highest virtue is sacrifice. The utmost sacri-
fice a man can make is to lay down his life for his
family or his country; and it is not in vain if
thereby women and children and all the race in the
future are made happier. The womanly woman
who has a manly son desires that he fulfil the
highest and most normal instincts of the genus
homo, and that he always be prepared to fight for
the right alone; that he protect the weak and the
hungry, and that he aggressively devote his life to
a worthy purpose. Both men and women of this
nation should reject the counsel of those who think
they can stop human nature from asserting itself
and compel the clock of civilization to stand still
by their mere assertion.

Peace is stagnation. War is life. Its victories
mean progress. The conquerors have made his-
tory. Every war has left humanity better than it

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 87

found it. The American colonies fought in 1775
against the tyranny of a British king and for lib-
erty. The constitution of the United States, the
greatest republic the earth has seen, is the result.
Those engaged fought seven years. Did they die
for naught? It was war and the defeat of Napo-
leon on the sea that led to the Louisiana purchase,
extending up the Mississippi and to the Rockies.
The French Emperor practically gave this third of
the present territory of the country in order that he
might raise up a future antagonist of the British
Empire. It was war with Mexico that led to the
annexation of Texas, New Mexico and all the
lands on the Pacific slope, another third of the
present United States. Can it be doubted, in view
of the barbaric conditions which now prevail in
Mexico, that the land won by the spirit of the
Alamo, with its teeming population, is enjoying
more blessings under the segis of American insti-
tutions than would have been the case had the
territory remained in Mexican hands'? In i860
this nation was confronted by the alternatives of
slavery or freedom, disunion or union. Four years
of war decided the issues involved. A million
men lost their lives. Did those on either side die
in vain, if they thereby advanced the cause of free-
dom? In 1898 Cuba, Porto Rico and the Philip-
pines were freed from the cruelties of Spain by the
victories of Manila Bay, Santiago and San Juan.

88 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Have not the peoples of those islands and, indi-
rectly, all mankind thereby been benefited? The
work of Hamilton in the framing of the Consti-
tution would not have been possible without the
sword of George Washington. So impregnated
have Americans become in the last decade with the
ideas of those who hold up peace as a condition to
be beloved in itself that in their adulation of Abra-
ham Lincoln — all of it deserved — they have al-
most ceased to remind themselves of the achieve-
ments of that great hero of the nation, General
Grant, who preserved the Union. It was Grant
and not Lincoln who made peace with Lee at Ap-
pomattox after the entirely righteous ends for
which he and his soldiers had fought were accom-
plished. The constitutional amendments admit-
ting the black man to equal rights under the law
were written by the sword.

An individual passes through a tremendous crisis
in his life and is made to think more rapidly and
seriously and to produce more. That is why out
of struggle come the greatest achievements of
men. Musicians and artists working in a garret in
poverty but losing nothing of the spark within,
Demosthenes wandering along the sea shore with
pebbles in his mouth so he could speak better,
Luther begging for bread by singing in the streets,
Benjamin Franklin starting as a printer's devil,
Lincoln splitting rails and reading Blackstone by

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 89

candle light stand out as examples from myriads
of others of the same sort. The most grueling
crisis a man can pass through is war. There he
faces adverse conditions and even death with all
his manhood. After it is over he thinks in terms
of vaster things. Those who commanded in the
Civil War were also leaders afterwards when peace
came. The characters of iron that they had at-
tained in battle made them able to cope with op-
ponents in the intense rivalry of industry and the
professions. Out of that war came Grant, Sheri-
dan, Meade, Farragut, Porter, Garfield, Carl
Schurtz, Sickles, Benjamin Harrison, William
McKinley, James J. Hill, Andrew Carnegie and
most of the leaders of the House and Senate for
more than a generation. And out of it, too, came
Robert E. Lee, John B. Gordon, Beauregard, Joe
Wheeler, John T. Morgan, Stephen Mallory, John
B. Regan, Isham G. Harris, Bennett Young,
Charles F. Crisp, George Vest, John W. Daniel,
L. Q. C. Lamar and Edward D. White, chief jus-
tice of the United States. Hear the rebel yells as
the heroes of the Southland plunge up the steep
under Pickett and attack the batteries at Gettys-
burg ! Did they who gave their lives there die in
vain? Not if the South to-day profits by their
nobler manhood. And the victors fighting
through the fire and smoke of the peach orchard
and "little round top" saved the Union. Hor-

90 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

rible slaughter, wasn't it? Men were actually
engaged in killing each other. Think of that I
Blood was shed. The rivers ran with it. But
there were no mollycoddles to bleat in those
days except ehe Northern Copperheads. Men
took their medicine and took it grandly. Mothers
gave their sons and were proud of it. They
as well as the sons were exalted by the sacri-
fice. And Lincoln wrote to the mother of five such
who had perished on the field of battle that he
could add no word of praise to those who had
given all upon the altar of freedom. There were
maimed and halt, but the absent limb or arm was
more revered by a nation rebuilt and glad to ex-
press its gratitude on every occasion than the whole
carcasses of those who had crawled under the bed
upstairs when the recruiting officer appeared.
The South has cherished the memories of its heroes
with a sentiment and loyalty hardly less fervent
than in the strife itself. In an earlier day the
wars of 1845-6 with Mexico helped inspire the
pioneers of '49, who sought gold in the land con-
quered by that war. And at a later time the
Spanish War was followed by a decade of won-
derful industrial achievement in America. When
Ulysses had ended his struggles came Penelope and
Hercules. And so mankind has advanced by ter-
rible hardships in which the fittest alone survived,

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 91

by constant bloody contest and din of battle, and
always to higher things.

Few instances are required to prove that the ad-
vantages of armed conflict are not confined to the
United States. It was war by the barons at
Runnymede that compelled King John to grant
the priceless privileges contained in Magna Char-
ta, led Charles I to the block and established the
protectorate of Cromwell, overthrew Bourbon des-
potism in the French Revolution, caused the bene-
ficent work of Napoleon and then ended his sub-
version of nationality. It was grim death under
powder and shot that removed forever the horrors
of the thumb-screw and the rack and enabled men
to seek truth without risk of torture by either Prot-
estant or Catholic. This during two centuries of
almost incessant conflict in the Wars of Religion,
the Thirty Years' War, the fight to free the Neth-
erlands, and, in a lesser degree, in the wars of
Louis XIV and Frederick II and the battles of
Napoleon in Italy. Wars all through the Middle
Ages destroyed the weak and led to the rule of the
more vigorous. Charlemagne, fighting for law
and order, made men better. During the great
migrations of peoples after the fall of the Roman
Empire their conflicts gave new life to Europe.
Attila, "the scourge of God," assisted in this proc-
ess and at the same time exhausted his own Huns.

92 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Jenghis Kahn, Timur and many others did the
same for Asia, sweeping away the wastes of life,
reinvigorating the entire continent and carrying
the world onward to greater things. The crusad-
ing knights transmitted ideas and spread ideals of
courage and bravery. Wars protected Europe
from the Saracens, lifted Asia out of inhumanity
and stopped the savagery the colonizing nations
found. The Spaniards were unspeakably harsh in
Mexico and Peru, but they did away with a system
wherein the hearts of men were cut out while they
stood alive in front of the sacrificial stone. Also
all fundamental law has been made possible by
conquerors alone. The Code Napoleon was com-
piled after the subjugator of Italy had done his
work. After 1866 and 1871 came the present
system of administration in Germany. The bases
of the British constitution were laid by war. The
pandects of Justinian were made possible by the
arms of Belisarius and Narses. In so far as these
were only codifications of previous law, the latter
had in its turn been made possible by the wars of
Caesar and his successors. The capitularies of
Charlemagne followed his career in the field.
What potent deeds for humanity are represented
by the names of Washington, Grant, Dewey,
Moltke, Garibaldi, Wellington, Bliicher, Napo-
leon, Frederick the Great, William of Orange,
Turenne, Suleiman, Charles of Lorraine, John

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 93

Sobieski, Bernhard of Saxe-Weimer, Peter the
Great, Gustavus Adolphus, Oliver Cromwell, Nel-
son, Don Juan, Drake, Howard, Tromp, Timur,
Jinghis and Kublai Kahn, William the Conqueror,
Frederick Barbarossa, Marshall Saxe, Marlbor-
ough, Clive, Cortez, Pizarro, Louis XI, Alphonso
of Castile, Casimir IV, Canute, Hugh the Great,
Otto the Great, Charlemagne, Charles Martel,
Alfred, Harun, Mansur, Heracleus, Justinian,
Attila, Theodoric, Constantine, Aurelian, Septimus
Severus, Trajan, Tiberius, Marcus Aurelius
(despite his love of peace), Csesar, Marius, Chedo-
laomar, Apgar, Nurachu, Mithradates I, Seleucus
I, Hasdrubal, Hannibal, Pyrrhus, Alexander,
Miltiades, Sargon, Sheshonk, Rameses, Tethmosis
III, Joshua and David ! They cleared the way for
or were themselves the builders of civilization. A
mighty host, they ask where mankind would have
been without them and — more to the point — where
it would not be if it had been guided by the timid
souls who did not grandly dare but were content to
let the world remain as it was in the name of peace.
It is interesting to speculate as to what would have
been the result to all that the life of ancient Athens
meant if one of these latter had been the choice of
the polemarch instead of Miltiades at Marathon.
By battle, too, ideas have been promulgated.
Mahomet warred and to-day 250,000,000 people
accept his teachings. Christian princes fought,

94 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

carrying in one hand the gospel and in the odier
die sword, and half a billion of men pronounce the
name of Jesus as the Savior of the World. Wars
have helped to add another 420,000,000 to the
folds of Buddhism and Hindooism. Confucian-
ism, established as the religion of the state and up-
held by force, has 340,000,000 adherents. Men
have gained their ideas first by the inspired spirits,
then by battle and last by habit. Opposing prin-
ciples have been decided by gunpowder. Ambi-
tious kings have united peoples to crush opponents
and carry on the work of progress. New peoples,
new hopes, new ideas, new leaders have overcome
older and weaker ones. And so it has been
through the ages. Wars, wars, wars! Advance-
ment, advancement, advancement!

But what of the maimed and the halt? What
of the widows and orphans? What of the deso-
late homes and heart rending sorrow? What of
the awful agonies of the battle field, with comrade
disemboweled or his head blown off, with the
whizzing bullets laying many low, the groans and
shrieks of the sorely wounded and dying, the horse
torn asunder with none to help? What of the
hand to hand clashes, man braining his brother
man with the butt of his musket and wildly stab-
bing him to death with the bayonet? True, but
what of the benefits all this may bring to men in
general? Neither an individual nor a nation de-

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 95

velopes to the utmost without suffering. The easy-
way is not that to achievement. 'T have refined
thee in the fire of adversity." But it is such a
price to pay, it is urged. For what"? For the
more stable and progressive society war brings.
Men are brought back to the fundamental things
of life. Before the present cataclysm in Europe
the intellect of France had descended to "Cubism"
and "Futurism." It was time for the quickening
hand. Gunpowder clears the air. Men see God
again. And they perceive that the untold suffer-
ing is not too high a price to pay that an old
civilization may crumble and give way to a new
one which shall delight all future generations.
Each age of the world is better than the last and
is made so by the willingness of men to go through
just such harrowing experiences in order that those
things which they hold most dear may not be
taken away from them. The "noble six hun-
dred" who charged at Balaklava have made the
blood of men tingle for more than half a cen-
tury. The reason is that they had no fear.

That war does not waste the physical energies
of an otherwise healthy state and that, on the
contrary, it tends to stimulate them, may be
gathered from an examination of the birth rate in
Germany after the war of 1870-1871. In that
conflict 28,000 men in the German armies were
killed in action, about 3 per cent, of the 835,000

96 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

men placed in the field, and 101,000 were wounded
and disabled. In the ten years after the war
8,728,946 male children were bom and 8,287,591
females, a preponderance of males over females
of 441,355, or 5^ per cent. After 1865 in the
United States the lack of statistics between that
year and the census year of 1870, together with the
greatly increased immigration after the conflict,
makes it difficult to obtain exact figures, but in
the decade from 1870 to 1880, subtracting the
children born to foreign born parents, the pre-
ponderance of males is about the same as in Ger-
many. It seems to be a law of nature that in a
virile state twenty-one males are born to every
twenty females. In degenerate France during the
war with Prussia 156,000 men were killed and
143,000 were wounded and disabled out of a total
of 970,000 engaged. In the decade following
2,627,809 males were born and 2,728,737 females,
a preponderance of females of 100,928, or 3 7-10
per cent.

Socialists declare that all wars are brought
about by what they term "capitalism." The nor-
mal ambitions of men, their hatred of wrong and
their willingness to lay down their lives for jus-
tice and right are erased from the equation. The
great controversy over the question of the right
to secede from the Union, which went on for
twenty years through increasing acrimony with

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 97

Webster, Seward and Sumner on one side and
Calhoun, Hayne and Davis on the other had noth-
ing to do with the war between the States. The
fervor of righteous indignation against slavery
that swept through the North, fanned by "Uncle
Tom's Cabin," John Brown's raid and the firing
upon Fort Sumter, had nothing to do with the
outbreak of the struggle. It was "capitalism."
When the people of United America were roused
to fever heat by the cruelties practised by Weyler
and the blowing up of the Maine in Havana Har-
bor and went to war and crumpled the power
of Spain in order to make Cuba, Porto Rico and
the Philippines enjoy the benefits of their free in-
stitutions, it was really "capitalism" that did it all.
It was the same with those who desired liberty
more than life in the War of American Independ-
ence. Every conqueror in history who had ambi-
tions must have been a "capitalist." William
the Silent, fighting Spain for free thought in the
Netherlands, was no doubt one also. Gustavus
Adolphus and his Swedes at Lutzen were "capi-
talists." The Swiss defeating Charles the Bold,
of Burgundy, at Grandson with love of liberty in
their hearts had never heard the term used by Karl
Marx, but if they had they would probably have
known that that was what they laid down their
lives for. The Crusaders who sallied forth from
Europe with the ideal of regaining the True Cross

98 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

were really desirous of "exploiting" somebody.
Alexander was not animated with love of glory
and the laudable desire to extend the boundaries
and civilization of Macedon. He was a "capi-
talist." Henry of Navarre, fighting for years
with reckless courage, gained a throne and estab-
lished the Edict of Nantes, guaranteeing religious
toleration. What did capital have to do with
it? Robert Bruce, utterly discouraged, saw the
spider fall and rise for the ninth time, took cour-
age and won Scottish independence. Was he a
"capitalist?" Caesar risked all, crossed the Rubi-
con and gained an empire. Hannibal surmounted
the Alps and fought Rome for twenty years be-
cause it was the determination of the latter to
crush his native Carthage. Frederick H took
about with him a phial of poison. When de-
feated, worn, weary and tempted to take the dose
he, by his aggressive and mighty spirit, gathered
together his resources and fell upon the enemy in-
stead. Napoleon bridled the Revolution, which
had taken so many lives simply because they had
worn good clothes or been of noble birth or good
repute, and then by his indomitable ambition con-
quered Europe. Which does the world prefer,
the spirit that animated these heroes of the past
or that of those who ascribe all their noble ac-
tions to what they term "capitalism"?

But, the Socialist says, all this was long ago

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 99

and human nature as well as conditions have
changed since those days. This is the same error
as is made by those who contend that armaments
produce wars and that if the world did not have
them there would be no armed conflicts. Human
ambitions and hatreds and loves were created
long before gunpowder and armor and even
bows and arrows. The implement was always in-
vented to express the desire. When the savage
wished to rule the tribe and felt he was strong
enough he slew with a blunt instrument his near-
est rival and lorded it over the others. Then he
led them against another tribe and, after de-
feating it and perhaps roasting its members in a
kettle, seized its chattels and occupied its ground.
That was the beginning of war. The present ti-
tanic struggle in Europe was precipitated by a shot
heard round the world. The Austrians rushed
to avenge the murder of their crown prince. The
Russians hastened to the defense of their fellow
Slavs in Servia. The German Emperor warned
them that if they did, he would call out the Ger-
mans, who, being prepared, were willing to fight
that their civilization endure, as well as for Ger-
man ambitions on land and sea. The French ad-
vanced to the aid of Russia. Germany struck
at France through Belgium. Britain fought to
protect its aims in Belgium and, as Kitchener
said, to "pay a debt of honor which we owe to

5619524

loo THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

France." The Japanese entered the fight to ful-
fil the terms of their alliance with Britain. Italy
joined the entente because of ambition to gain
territory from Austria. Belgium and Servia en-
tered the war to protect themselves, Bulgaria
and Turkey to gain land by helping Germany,
and Rumania by assisting the Allies. Outside
of certain fundamental antipathies, these were
the causes of the war. What did "capitalism"
or armaments have to do with the cataclysm,
especially when 1,700,000 men, including So-
cialists, volunteered in Germany alone'? If there
had been no huge armaments the ambitions of
the individuals and nations, their mutual jeal-
ousies and hatreds, would still be present. With-
out such armaments it is probable that the con-
flict would outlast this generation.

Nations have their hopes, passions, obsessions,
discontents, ideals, hates and ambitions, just as in-
dividuals do. Every nation is normal in this re-
spect. Some of its citizens may be abnormal in
their vows not to do the normal thing to save the
state should disaster appear, but the healthy or-
ganism throws off this effect as a disease. These
vows are usually only mental and pass away in the
hour of excitement when the nation is attacked by
a jealous, rival and rapacious power. When the
call comes they usually remember that they are
human beings and patriots; theory is forgotten.

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER loi

If, however, the vow not to risk life and limb
and not to slay a fellow being for the sake of
what the national government represents be con-
genital, it should be remembered that there are
cowards in every land; and those of proper age
who refuse to fight should be detested as such.

On the other hand, those who are willing to
lay down life for liberty should the occasion of
danger arise have many compensations in the
training they receive for the task should it come.
Six months or even a year of strict military train-
ing, in the open air, with constant exercise and
contests of manly strength make any young man
much more fit than he would otherwise be for the
remainder of his life. The writer recollects how,
after the short campaigning or time spent in camp
during the Spanish War, the men came home
afterwards with heads erect, shoulders broad and
faces beaming with health. Stories of malaria
and canned beef were vastly exaggerated and due
to lack of preparation. It was not the old men
or the peace lovers, but the young men of red blood
and warm impulses who rushed to volunteer; and
upon them primarily the future of the United
States must rest. To place a million such youths,
the best blood of the Nation, in the field every
year would not be too much to ask of a people
destined to give the world liberty, especially in
view of the fact that such training would only add

102 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

to their economic efficiency at the expiration of
their service and develop character through the
learning of system and method, self reliance and
the spirit of comrady consistent with a democratic
state. One has only to recall the rare enthusiasm
for this extraordinary development of the physical
man to grace and beauty, to litheness of limb and
quickness of eye, with consequent effects upon
the intellect, in the Greek states, to realize what
might be done through the means of military drill-
ing in this free republic. Born commanders
would be an important result, as a matter of
course. And they, in the hour of its need, would
lead the nation on to victory. Every youth, rich
or poor, white or black, when he reaches the age
of eighteen, or a year later, if it requires that
much more time for him to complete his high school
education, should be compelled to submit him-
self to the recruiting officer. In 1910 there were
949,876 such youths of eighteen years in the
United States. With the usual increase in the
total population since that year, the million re-
quired could easily be made up. Great camps
might be established in the undulating or level
lands of the West or Middle West. Tents should
be used. Five dollars per month should be paid.
Otherwise only food, shelter and raiment should
be provided. Moving pictures and lectures
should give entertainment of the milder sort, and

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 103

the balance should be that of field exercise. Prac-
tically all the time, however, should be devoted
to hard work indeed in the training of every branch
of military science, so that the army thus formed
might take the field at a moment's notice and
with the full confidence of the Nation. The
boys who thus entered training would return a
year later as men and as hard as nails. Can any
one doubt that the following generation which they
would help to give the world would be stronger
and even more capable of such service than their
fathers had been?

The cost of such an immense force in time of
peace might be reduced to a minimum. Partly
due to the retention of expensive military posts
at unnecessary places, because of the influence of
members of Congress and the sanctity of tradi-
tion, it cost the United States $102,938,798 in
1915 to maintain an army of 4,701 officers and
87,781 men. For the year 1912 it cost the Ger-
man government $200,000,000 to maintain an
army of 656,144 officers and men. At the latter
reckoning, this country should support a million
men in military training for a year at a cost of
about $300,000,000. Let Congress lop off $100,-
000,000 from the $164,000,000 spent annually
for pensions and matters would be helped consid-
erably without increasing taxation. The pension
budget has reached this prodigious amount de-

104 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

spite the fact that the great war which called it
forth ended more than sixty years ago and that
few of the veterans of that conflict are living.
While the number has grown smaller year by
year the appropriation has until recently increased.
Pensions have been given as liberally by Congress-
men as for many years garden seeds have been
distributed. This under a general policy of
placing the money in circulation. But perhaps
the people would prefer to spend their own funds
rather than to have them used in making the gov-
ernment an eleemosynary institution. With a
million men trained annually, in twenty years
the United States would have twenty millions of
men ready for service, less the normal death rate
among them. Then or at any moment of that
time the Nation would be ready to perform its
task. And with great coast lines on two oceans,
the vastest wealth and the most priceless of gov-
ernmental gifts, liberty, to defend, the country
should be protected by the largest and best
equipped navy in the world.

In all this preparation and in the actual event
of war itself economic ends are advanced rather
than retarded. In the time of conflict fixed and
not floating capital is destroyed, and for the vic-
tor not even that. The medium of exchange
changes hands, but remains the same, unless de-
preciated for the time being. Men would eat

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 105

food and wear clothes in any event. The energies
of the nation are turned to the manufacture of
the implements of war and ammunition and to
feeding and clothing the soldiers. All these ma-
terials and eventually all energy are perishable.
To destroy them at one time is only a few years
difference from another. This is true of buildings,
public and private, and vast fields of ordinary pro-
duction which are swept bare by the storm of
war. Afterwards they soon regain their accus-
tomed appearance, and better, by the new energy
which is turned into them. Instead of causing
waste, war does away with it by subduing ex-
hausted peoples. These extend their credit and
expend their strength. At the end they are bank-
rupt and weakened. This leads to the rule of
the healthier organism. The latter pays back its
borrowed capital with the territory it has con-
quered. The war being fought on foreign soil,
even its fixed capital remains intact. Stimulated
energies and vastly increased production soon re-
move the debt to normal.

Not even life is wasted. Each of us has died
many times ; each will live again. What matters
it if one's head is blown off; the spirit survives.
That never dies. If men pass away in agony,
the pain is but momentary. If maimed for life,
they have the satisfaction of knowing that
they have helped the Great Order. And when

io6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

the percentage of actual deaths in battle is con-
sidered, it must be admitted that the chances
of passing through the ordeal without loss of life
or serious injury are very great — usually some-
thing over 90 per cent. The Christian, with his
fortitude and belief in immortality, should not
hesitate to take the chance. Certainly the Japa-
nese, with his feeling that the hero of the battle
held is rewarded in the hereafter, does not stop at
any daring deed. And so far as the compara-
tively small misery among troops is concerned,
that is largely minimized by the development of
medical science in the past half century. The
hardships caused among wives, mothers and chil-
dren gradually adjusts itself in a generation.
This may seem cruel, but it would be far more
heartless to an infinitely vaster number of men,
women and children in the future not to risk life
and limb for the liberties our nation and civiliza-
tion stand for.

It is proposed that all this might be done away
with by men submitting that which they hold most
dear to the arbitration of third parties. Where
disputes of a minor nature arise between states
and they can be readily adjusted in this way by
submission of the facts, it would be ridiculous to
think of war. But where the mighty aims of
great peoples, led by men ambitious for glory and
achievement, are involved, arbitrators are swept

WAR THE GREAT CIVILIZER 107

aside as mollycoddles. Think of a Richelieu
stopping the work of the rejuvenation of France
to listen to such sweet-faced brethren! There
was no compromise with him. He went ahead
with his grim work and the opponents of law and
order and civilization received the headsman's
ax. Louis XVI "arbitrated" his difficulties with
the revolutionists and paid for it at the guillotine.
Napoleon, peering over the fence on a July day,
reflected on how much might have been accom-
plished in defense of the King with powder and
shot. But Louis was not made of that kind of
stuff; his "children" should not be fired on by the
Swiss guards, he said. Arbitration treaties with
people we shall never fight are nauseating. Amer-
ican freedom and the fundamental principles
America stands for can never be arbitrated except
by the sword.

Does this mean that a state of war is better
than that of peace*? Certainly it is, if, again quot-
ing St. Augustine, war is the transition from a
lower to a higher civilization. Certainly it is, if
by peace men, nations and the world remain stag-
nant. Certainly it is, if, through aggressive strug-
gle, the highest aims of the earth are attained, and
if, through sorrow and suffering and sacrifice, men
gain in character and perceive more clearly the
fundamental verities of life. Certainly it is, if,
by war, men gain leisure to utilize their stimulated

io8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

energies in the paths of peace, until they relapse
into desuetude and another great war or series
of wars produces a mighty upheaval. Certainly
it is, if, as Jesus of Nazareth said, "the Kingdom
of Heaven suffered violence and men of violence
take it by force."

Will wars never cease, then'? Must men go
through the ordeal of battle all through the com-
ing time*? No; only until such time as each peo-
ple and nation has risen to its strength, accom-
plished its work in the world and fallen to decay,
and until righteousness and justice prevail upon
the earth. When that time comes wars will be
done away with. For that time men have fought
throughout the ages, steadily, step by step, ap-
proaching "that far off divine event toward which
the whole creation moves."

CHAPTER III

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING?

"Our environment is that in which we live and move
and have our being. Without it we should neither live
nor move nor have any being." — Henry Drummond.

When Gutenberg invented the printing press
in 1464, Columbus discovered America in 1492,
da Gama found a new route to India in 1498,
Luther nailed the theses upon the door of Witten-
berg in 1517, Magellan circumnavigated the globe
in 1521 and Copernicus completed his heliocen-
tric theory of the universe in 1530, there were
probably few who realized the significance of a
movement created by those events which was to
continue with ever widening aspects, adding more
liberties, shedding further light and opening new
avenues to wealth for four hundred years.
Hardly more than half a century had been neces-
sary to break away from old traditions, customs,
habits of thought and policies of government.
The ultimate result was freedom of conscience,
the sovereignty of the people and the development
of nationality. To-day, after many inventions,

109

no THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

unlimited printed knowledge, the law of evolu-
tion, critical examination of the sacred scriptures,
opening of the Panama Canal and the greatest
war man has seen, an era far more portentous
seems to be dawning.

In the past fifty years the entire relation of man
to life has considerably changed. In that short
space of time he has done more to conquer his en-
vironment than at any previous period. The re-
sult is that he no longer thinks so much in the
terms of the passions and prejudices of a given lo-
cality, but looks out upon a world transformed for
his benefit. His customs have become less en-
slaving. His entire life radiates from a wider
compass. He is a new man, another personality;
and hence he is about to conceive a new timxC.
The nature of the epoch he is about to create may
be discerned in the factors which have remade
him. The man of fifty years ago, our grandfa-
thers, was not the same as he who works and lives
in the heroic present. He was served by his neigh-
bors. His food was gathered from farms near at
hand. His clothes were homespun. His comings
and goings were with a horse. Books and pa-
pers were rare. His amusements were simple.
Laughter was often compounded out of tragedy.
The sole social center was the church. Ignorance
was rife. Prejudice held sway. There was lit-
tle else to do except be bom, till the soil, marry.

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? in

have children, attend church and die. The
change that has been wrought has been far more
a miracle than any in ancient days. Men and
women, old and young, have been lifted com-
pletely out of their environment.

Development of rapid transportation by land
and sea has enabled man to circle the globe in
less time than was formerly required to cross the
Atlantic Ocean. The continent is now crossed in
three and a half days, as compared to three months
in 1870. A network of steam railways gives local
accommodation to every part of the land and en-
ables all to travel at a minimum of expense. In
addition, trolley lines have penetrated wherever
the density of population has made them feasible.
Automobiles, bicycles and motorcycles have made
journeys pleasanter and more healthful, and ad-
vanced the people of the country and the city
beyond the strength of a horse. Anthracite coal
and electricity have largely done away with
smoke on the heavier trains. The Pullman and
similar accommodations have made long distance
journeys comfortable. On the sea the turbine en-
gine, the steel propeller, the steamship, yacht and
motorboat, to say nothing of superior and often-
times palatial furnishing afloat, have made travel
there speedy and agreeable. Railroad and steam-
ship risks have been reduced to a negligible quan-
tity for the 1,033,679,680 passengers carried on

112 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

the railroads alone in the United States in 1915.
Half that number were carried in 1900.

Means of communication have been multiplied
to such an extent that the farmer no longer feels
himself apart from the thrill of civilization. The
telephone, the inventor of which is still living,
has brought a continent beneath its sway and made
possible an intricacy of business undreamed of a
quarter of a century ago. It has brought men
nearer to each other everywhere, annihilated dis-
tance and made calls for help, convenience or news
instantaneous. A world is the debtor of Alex-
ander Graham Bell. The telegraph and cable
have united nations, continents and hemispheres.
The daily doings in the heart of Asia, up to a
generation ago unknown in their most important
relations until years later, are now flashed around
the earth in a few minutes. Communities are no
longer secluded or excluded from the pulsating
tide of life on the planet. The world moves by
ideas, and the individual sends them to the chief
centers and, in the more concentrated districts in
the United States and Europe, to every home.
Postal facilities, aided by the automobile and the
pneumatic tube, have increased at an enormous
rate, with the result that no man need remain
hidden if he does not desire to be. The remotest
farmer is now nearer to New York, Chicago and
San Francisco than the denizen of the village or

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 113

small city fifty years ago. The rural free delivery
has helped to accomplish this without delay.

These means of rapid intercourse between per-
sons have made the modern newspaper possible,
aided by the multiple rotary press. For so little
expense that the cost is not felt by the very poor-
est, each citizen keeps himself informed each morn-
ing as to the affairs not only of the locality in
which he dwells, but of the entire world. Busi-
ness and the consequent enhancement of adver-
tising support a machinery of news production
which has made man a neighbor to humanity.
Together with editorials and the Sunday magazine
section of the more important dailies, the news
is digested for every reader and he is instructed
as to all vital matters. There are now 25,000
newspapers in the United States. In addition a
vast number of periodicals of all kinds stimulate
thought and keep everybody who desires to know
informed on any subject. In the larger cities the
leading dailies have correspondents in every spot
on earth from whence news is likely to emanate,
serving it with such terse interest that the reader
easily grasps the simple facts and draws his own
conclusion therefrom.

Books, too, are now presented to the public
with a cheapness and attractiveness that have
brought the mind seeking knowledge through the
printed page within easy access, not only to the

114 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

immediate locality and time, but to the storehouse
of learning and fact of the ages. Intellectual
products of all periods may be upon the shelf of
the poorest at an expense which would have been
impossible a quarter of a century ago. Encyclo-
paedic knowledge is placed within arm's length of
the busiest man. Biography is written without
panegyric and only to portray the facts of the
subject. History, because of those archeological
discoveries which have laid bare the story of an-
cient empires, has been rewritten upon a scientific
basis, with regard to confirmable reality and not
to bear out an argument. Men are no longer
compelled to accept statements of opinion as au-
thoritative: they may seek the proofs and accede
to or deny the ideas presented. Books have not
only spread the gospel of learning and informed
the earth, but added to the happiness of the indi-
vidual and made him a citizen of the world.

In the home, where a generation ago genuine
comforts were the property of the few, all of those
with a decent income may now feel a joy in life
so far beyond that possible to the man who la-
bored with his hands heretofore as to make it
almost beyond belief that changes of such vast im-
portance to human kind could have been attained
in the short span of half a hundred years. Wher-
ever sufficient population warrants, the candle and
oil lamp have well nigh disappeared and gas and

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 115

the electric light have taken their place. He who
sits beneath the effulgent glow of the results of the
inventive brain of an Edison, shedding a warmth
about the hearth of man that it never knew be-
fore, can scarcely conceive of the barrenness of
the old method. New and constantly developing
processes have made possible the almost universal
use of the carpet and rug, brass and iron bed, wall
paper and upholstered furniture. Over them the
magic wand of art has cast a spell, and to-day the
domicile of the poorest, if a little taste be dis-
played, may appear a place that kings a century
ago would have envied. Plumbing conveniences
unknown to any but this contemporary time have
added immeasurably to comfort and health. The
tile bath has made cleanliness a duty and generally
prevalent. Towels, soap and various manufac-
tured articles of the toilette have increased the joy
of living. With a well-stocked library of instruc-
tive and interesting books and pictures, and numer-
ous periodicals which for a small amount give ex-
pression to the artistic sense and manifold activi-
ties of the life of man on the planet at the present
time, the home is another vehicle for lifting the
people of every civilized land above and out of the
limits of environment. The pneumatic cleaner
and the carpet sweeper have lessened the burdens
of women in the household. Invention, as in the
case of man, has lessened her toil and enlarged lei-

ii6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

sure for the enhancement of mentality and useful-
ness outside of the home. This is mainly respon-
sible for the increasing desire of women to partake
in greater measure of social and public activities.
The style of the housing of the people has
changed and made for community of interest.
Modern plumbing, the steel girder and the trans-
ference of large tracts of forest through the saw-
mill by cheap transportation to the chief centers
are responsible for the apartment building where
many hundreds may live together without any
knowing his next-door neighbor, and the great
business structure, reaching a height of fifty
stories, where several thousands of persons daily
have their headquarters and transact their affairs.
Electricity has brought the elevator and made it
possible for man to climb higher than the maxi-
mum of six stories of the structures at the close
of the Civil War. Cement, concrete and tile proc-
esses, with which engineering knowledge has kept
pace, have not only intensified the attractiveness
of the interior and exterior of all buildings, but
have become so cheap relatively as to enable build-
ing operations to take on a grander scale. Purely
by the inventive means of a single generation such
undertakings as the Pennsylvania and New York
Central stations in New York City, the Metro-
politan, Singer and Whitehall office buildings

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 117

there and the Union Station in Washington, have
been made possible.

Without the growth of desire for creature com-
forts and easy access to centers of mercantile ac-
tivity the department store — the marvel of a quar-
ter century — would have been impossible. Local
and special shops for immediate and particular
selection still have their place in the larger cities,
but the greater mart supplies readily the needs of
a community, and very cheaply because of greater
volume of purchases. Clothing has become more
varied because the wants of the individual are
supplied from a more extended field of produc-
tion and because machinery and diversified labor
have cheapened their cost. Good and attractive
apparel may now be worn more generally than
ever before. To the farmer and dweller in the
small town the facilities of the mail order estab-
lishments have become such as to enable all to
secure products a great city inhabitant could ob-
tain at a high class department store, by having
a selection presented to him through the printed
advertising page in newspaper and periodical.

Medical research has been revolutionized in half
a century with the result that health has been im-
measurably bettered and life prolonged. Chemi-
cal research has brought quick remedies for sim-
ple ailments within reach. Where manufactur-

1 18 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

ers have abused public confidence in these, an en-
lightened opinion has enforced the enactment of
strict protective laws. The process by which
light has emerged from the darkness of medical
methods of a generation ago has been the constant
application of analytical thought to cause and ef-
fect in accordance with the scientific spirit of the
age. A doctor in Porto Rico experiments at the
cost of his life and the truth he finds pro-
tects future millions of his fellow men from the
ravages of yellow fever. Others experiment,
stagnant waters are drained, mosquitos disappear
and with them malaria; the extent of the result
being dependent only upon the thoroughness of
the method. By the same means typhoid and the
bubonic plague have found their cause and
remedy. A physician carrying a particle of ra-
dium in his pocket and his hand coming in con-
tact with it, he finds eventually that it is an allevi-
ant and perhaps an antidote for cancer. Bac-
teriologists and pathologists concentrate their at-
tention upon the plague of tuberculosis, and hy-
giene and sanitation do the rest in lessening its
ravages. Diseases that reflect the darker and
more crassly selfish side of mankind are brought
to more thorough investigation, with the result
that the world is awakening to the steady and
terrible results of depravity, and that cleanliness
of life is the true remedy. The desire of human-

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 119

ity for the elimination of preventable maladies
and to know the why and wherefore of things has
caused those men of great wealth who desire the
esteem of their fellows to endow medical insti-
tutions and hospitals, as well as special means of
research, which have helped to bring greater and
more efficient changes for human good in the field
of medicine in the past generation than in all those
preceding since Hippocrates and Galen first
thought enough of the bodily woes of men to ex-
periment in order to eliminate them. Every good
physician, trained in a school of facts, every dis-
covery of causes for the prevention or remedy of
illness, every chemist with a new process for mak-
ing life cleaner and healthier has assisted in mak-
ing the individual everywhere less obsessed by his
own ills and his own environment, and given him
more freedom to comprehend and take part in
the world outside of himself and his locality.

Certainly not less important than any change
in the environment of man in the last quarter cen-
tury has been that in the field of amusements.
There the development of means of transporta-
tion, together with the asphalt pavement, cement
sidewalk and incandescent light, has, in the United
States especially, made possible a variety and
standard of attractions upon the stage that would
have excited the wonder and awe of our grand-
fathers. A cheap and melodramatic character of

120 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

production was that presented before the eyes and
ears of the people of the small town and even, to
a large extent, in the cities, in 1870. Then came
the vaudeville circuit and the stock company,
which, with the perfection of instrumental music,
gave much more life and hence a wider range of
inspiration to every small community. With the
working out of the details of electricity, Edison and
others brought out the phonograph, which, carry-
ing the divine harmony into every home desiring
it, enabled men, women and children to be lifted
above the cares of everyday life and to be part
of a world. With mechanical properties of the
theater enriched by electric and other devices to
give wider range to acting, the stage took on a
more instructive tone and broke away from classi-
cal rendition as the ideal. Then was created the
moving picture — still in its infancy — to bring to
the door of every person on the earth the story
and action of every other individual, age, race
and clime and to do it at an expense of a few
pennies. Everybody, rich or poor, has followed
this device like the Pied Piper of Hamelin, and
had his thoughts stimulated to a wider range of
vision. The saloon and the corner grocery, as
well as the dive and the music hall, have lost the
influence they once had. The moving picture has
wrought a new age and so quietly and steadily
that it is difficult to realize its full consequences.

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 121

Reacting upon the legitimate stage, it has made
it more reasonable in price and yet bettered the
class of its productions.

Education has been so extended that there are
in the United States alone 20,000,000 pupils an-
nually attending one form of school or another
and 600,000 teachers are giving them instruction.
This intense desire for knowledge is not confined
to this country. In Germany a universal system
of instruction prevails, and in England and France
are thorough means of training the youth which
are hardly less excellent. The demand for
knowledge and preparation for usefulness has
seized upon every land. But particularly in the
United States, the kindergarten, graded and sec-
ondary schools and colleges and universities are,
in a democracy where rich and poor, white and
black, Jew and gentile, boy and girl meet on a
common plane, constantly turning out citizens
among whom development of body keeps pace with
instruction of mind and who are thereby enabled
to look out upon the world they enter in a prac-
tical way with a wider knowledge than the pupils
of any period heretofore and with a realization
that theirs is a large share in the work of mankind.

Material avenues of enabling men and women
to enjoy a larger life have had their inevitable
effect upon laws and government. The vision of
happier conditions has been the incentive for the

122 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

eight-hour day, demanded by the worker in order
that he may have more equitable share in the
joys of the new life about him. Public sanita-
tion and laws to protect the life and health of
the toiler have been further results of material
factors. As men have been enabled to break the
shackles of their surroundings, they have had more
leisure to discuss the affairs of their fellows and
to arrive at a clearer comprehension of true equity
between man and man. Transportation and the
mails have made possible gatherings for the dis-
cussion of every subject, and the press has reported
them broadcast. Legislation for the child, the
amelioration of the condition of women and a
more strict accountability of those in authority,
whether industrial or political, has been enacted.
Mercy and kindness have shed their light in greater
measure in the daily life of the community, re-
moving imprisonment for debt, rescuing the heav-
ily laden debtor through bankruptcy so that he
may have new opportunity, lessening the rigors
of punishment of those who have offended against
law, giving free legal aid to the poor in obtain-
ing redress for their wrongs, abating the strictures
against divorce in order that mismated couples
may benefit themselves and the world in general by
parting, and providing such general advantages
as public play grounds and musical and other
amusements. Government has changed in a gen-

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 123

eration toward more and more utilization of com-
munity energy for the good of the locality or na-
tion as a whole, and even the conservation of re-
sources for the enjoyment of future generations.
Sociological education and the scientific tend-
ency toward social service have further concen-
trated attention upon the needs of humanity, with
resultant thorough and sometimes too methodical
agencies for assisting the poor. In fact, what
is known as settlement work is entirely the crea-
tion of a generation. And as schools, printed
books, newspapers and magazines have informed
and instructed every school boy, as statesmen were
not informed and instructed a century ago, the
pulpit has lost more and more of its influence.
At the conclusion of the Civil War the minister
was still a local oracle. Without the present
means of communication with the outside world,
either by travel or printed page, he enjoyed an in-
fluence in the community second to none. He had
leisure and opportunity for study which others
did not. On Sunday he was listened to with
something more than respect and less than adora-
tion. His sermon was the piece de resistance at
every table during the week. The great preach-
ers, Henry Ward Beecher and T. DeWitt Tal-
madge, were national figures. It is no longer so.
"Billy" Sunday, the most advertised of them, is
solely a sensationalist. The good minister who

124 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

tends his flock in every hamlet has lost none of
the respect, either of that flock or the community ;
but he is no longer an oracle. The sweet and
wholesome influence of the church and Sunday
School over the child has not grown less, nor has
that of the manifold social activities of the con-
gregation over the older folks; but men, women
and children alike have come to perceive that good-
ness is not confined to those who attend church.
Under the free institutions of the United States,
where none may be persecuted because his be-
liefs do not conform to those of the majority, the
mutual hatreds and jealousies of creeds have been
diminished to a negligible quantity, and we have
become aware that all that is required of us is,
as Micah said, "to do justice, to love mercy and
to walk humbly with thy God." Church, min-
ister and priest are the same, and their respective
message and work are not dissimilar, but we are
no longer content with forms and beliefs, and
have as our ideal only the simple doing of good
and service to others. The sympathy of a world
for men and of men for a world has brought a
clearer perception of "the fatherhood of God and
the brotherhood of man." In accord with a
scientific spirit, the human mind working upon
materials has wrought so much in the field of in-
vestigation and accomplished such tremendous re-
sults for daily comfort and well being, making it

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING^ 125

possible to overcome ills in larger measure, that the
people will no longer readily accept that which
cannot be proven. The value of cleanliness of
life, obedience to the Ten Commandments and
kindness toward others may be demonstrated, but
the efficacy in the daily life of man of mere tra-
ditional ritual and acceptance of articles of time
honored statement of belief is not easily to be
found; hence they are discarded by increasingly
larger numbers of people. As men have thought
less of impressing upon other men with refine-
ment of cruelty that they alone represented Al-
mighty God, they have by their kindness and
mercy been enabled to perceive Him more clearly
and to better understand and appreciate the Bibli-
cal injunction, "Fear God and keep His command-
ments, for this is the whole duty of man." It
may be expected that the pebble of this influence
thus thrown upon the receptive surface of an
awakened humanity will increase its circles until
it ultimately reaches the uttermost land.

These influences have had their effect upon
morality. An enlightened public opinion has
done away with the grosser forms of amusement.
Respect for the cleanliness and health of the hu-
man body has increased. Drunkenness is rare.
Temperance and total abstinence from intoxica-
ting liquors have become more prevalent. Vari-
ous forms of gambling have become less public

126 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and in some cities and states have been done
away with. Athletic contests and exercises and
outdoor games, together with the bicycle and au-
tomobile, have brought more life in the open air
and hence more wholesome living. And with all
the multitudinous communication and knowledge
between man and man, as well as respect for
public order, crime and hypocrisy have been made
more difficult if not less desirable.

Not among the unimportant tendencies of the
time is that to seek to penetrate the veil which
has until now covered the grave. Hardly more
than half a century ago the Fox sisters began in-
vestigations in spiritualism, in exact reproduc-
tion of the revelations of the Witch of Endor three
thousand years before. As the latter called up
the spirit of Samuel to answer the questions of
the troubled Saul, and she could see the departed
prophet in vision but the King could not, so these
sisters stated that they had held communication
with the so-called dead. The impetus which they
gave to the investigation of the subject was long
in reaching effect. But in the last two or three
decades the number of alleged instances of dem-
onstration of communication have become so nu-
merous as to arouse the interest of such scientific
observers as Flammarion, Lombroso, Sir Oliver
Lodge, Sir Alfred Wallace and Professor Hyslop.
A person who seeks light upon psychic phenomena

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 127

is no longer considered "queer." Clairvoyance,
clairaudience, mesmerism and similar terms have
become common. Mankind is awakening to the
fact that the theory of evolution failed to ac-
count for the human spirit, and dimly to perceive
that life is made everlasting by universal law.

With less immersion in his immediate surround-
ings and more respect for himself and love of
his neighbor, man has demanded a greater de-
gree of liberty, not only from unjust government
but from the drudgeries of toil. Slavery has been
done away with on this continent since 1865.
Serfs have been emancipated in Russia since 1881.
Republics have been established in greater num-
ber. Privileges have been swept away, and for
those that remain the world has a decreasing re-
gard. Even the Jews are in this free land be-
ginning to receive their just due. As industrial
production has become more varied and labor
more skilled the emoluments of toil have in-
creased. Women vote in some states and na-
tions. Universal suffrage has become more gen-
eral. Restrictions upon public assemblage and
free speech have been lessened. The liberty of
the press has increased in all countries. The ten-
dency of the age is toward liberty under the forms
of just laws and public order. Industry up to
half a century ago was largely local. It has since
become national and even international. Great

128 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

stock companies have been formed to carry on
worldwide industrial enterprises. Investment in
the shares of these companies have been purchased
by those who have surplus earnings everywhere.
Along with closer community of interests there
has come further discussion of the relationship
between the wage earner and the employer. Bet-
ter understanding has been sought. The three
industrial classes, the employer, the laborer and
the investor, have been brought into closer touch.
Fifty years ago the employer was allowed full
sway; to-day he is compelled by a new spirit
among men to act more equitably. The result
is an impetus toward the solution of the industrial
problem.

Events of startling world magnitude have taken
place in the last half century to make quite star-
tling the similarity between this period and that
of Columbus. As then the conquest of Peru and
Mexico added to the supplies of gold by which
Spain carried on its aggressive policy toward the
remainder of Europe, so in this generation the
production of that metal in the world has doubled,
with a resultant rise in prices and stimulated in-
dustrial development. As the great Genoese nav-
igator discovered continents, Magellan crossed the
two oceans and da Gama rounded the Cape, in
our day Peary and Shackleton have completed
man's knowledge of the earth on which he dwells

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 129

by finding the exact location of the two poles.
And for an age of new discovery of lands, ex-
citing the wonder of men, we have in our time
beheld scientific discoveries even more marvel-
ous in their significance. As trade routes were
changed by circumnavigating Africa and making
a new route to India, ruining the commerce and
power of Venice, so the Suez Canal has again
opened the old way to India and in some degree
resuscitated the importance of Egypt; and the
Panama Canal is about to bring the peoples and
continents nearer to each other and to give a new
life to the Pacific Ocean. For the substitution
by Copernicus, Kepler and Newton of the helio-
centric theory of the universe, as opposed to the
geocentric idea which had led to the belief that
man was the center of all things, we have had
Darwin and the theory of evolution, which has
taught that man was not created in a day in the
Garden of Eden but as the result of slow and
natural development throughout the ages. For
Petrarch, Boccaccio and the Revival of Learning,
this period has its tremendous interest in educa-
tion and investigation the world over. And for
the great Martin Luther and his defiance of the
church of his fathers, we in this time have seen
an IngersoU and a hundred others sneering at
the absurdities of old beliefs and creeds and seek-
ing to bring about a broader religion of humanity.

130 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Finally, as gunpowder, the disruption of Chris-
tendom and the rivalry of peoples for share in the
new discoveries brought Europe to prolonged and
bloody wars, so now the world's mightiest powers
and peoples are at each other's throats, battling in
the fiercest hell since the beginning of human
story.

Indeed, it may be said that mankind is in the
greatest state of transition since the dawn of his-
tory. It is true that during the short but event-
ful life of Alexander, and again at the time of
Caesar, new forces were let loose on the earth which
were to have a permanent effect upon the future,
but their impact was felt chiefly around the Medi-
terranean basin and not by the vast populations
of central and eastern Asia. When the Roman
Empire disappeared in its own decay and Chris-
tianity grew upon its ruins another vast change
was wrought. So it was when Charlemagne
started the activities of men moving in new direc-
tions. And also at the period of the Renaissance
and the Reformation when the modern world was
born. But to-day mightier forces are working and
with vaster portent than at any previous time.
Men are stirred as not before. Seeing institu-
tions and long cherished beliefs crumbling around
them everywhere, they perceive that a new age
is at hand. They realize that neither they nor
the planet will ever be the same again. And the

IS A NEW ERA DAWNING? 131

thought comes, what does it all mean'? Amid
the roar of cannon, a thousand inventions and new-
social, religious and political ideals, men ask
whether chaos or a brighter day is coming.

What is to make the new age entirely distinct
from the past*? How will it react upon man-
kind during the time to come*? As its causes are
broader and more far reaching than those which
formed any previous era, it must be apparent
that its effects will be more wide spread. And
as those causes have embraced the earth, so the
effect will be to provide means for a closer com-
munity of interest until it embraces the entire
race of man. The hatreds engendered by great
nations struggling at war do not long endure.
Two generations and they have passed away.
But the inventive genius of the individual and
the results of his inventions will go on, and, no
matter how extensive may be armed conflict, the
world will never return to what it was before it
gained a spirit beyond the borders of states. So
many citizens of the world have been created by
steam, electricity and the printing press that no
cataclysm can make them provincial again.

What, then, is the meaning of the age now
dawning if it is not that every man upon the
face of the earth shall be free from privilege and
monarchy and injustice, that each shall be able
to think and speak without prejudice or harm,

132 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

that every child upon the globe shall have an
education, that any person shall have a living
wage if capable of earning it, and that all shall
enjoy the splendid opportunities which inventive
genius has placed at the disposal of a world?
What is its portent if not that by means of physi-
cal and intellectual communication that time is
near at hand when the brotherhood of man shall
become a reality and the world will realize that

"He prayeth best who lovcth best
All things both great and small."

CHAPTER IV

THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE UNITED STATES

"Sail on, O Ship of State !
Sail on, O Union, strong and great!
Humanity with all its fears,
With all the hopes of future years,
Is hanging breathless on thy fate !"

• — Longfellow.

When a thousand years have fled and men read
and reflect upon a universal history, what will
they consider to have been the distinguishing char-
acteristics of this nation? What will they regard
as having differentiated it from any other state in
this or a more remote time? What will they
think its function, purely as a separate entity
among countries, in advancing the cause of civili-
zation? And to us in this period of a world in
collapse, what do we believe our land to mean?

It is likely that students of the future, as well
as the present, will find the significance of the
United States within the character of the people
who inhabit it and the institutions created by the
Constitution enacted in 1787, under which has
been found so much of happiness and orderly
progress. Columbus crossed the ocean in quest

133

134 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

of a new route to India; he discovered what was
eventually to become an asylum for the oppressed.
Long after the Great Navigator had passed away
there came to America those who sought escape
from tyranny and religious intoleration. Their
heads no longer in danger of the block or their
bodies of torture on the rack, they braved the
wilderness, fought savage Indians and established
a new civilization. These were our fathers.
They also came to seek greater opportunity. Some
were adventurous and desired a free life in the
open. In increasing volume they immigrated
from every European land. The hardy and prac-
tical peoples of the north of that continent built
the nation. Usually from each individual family
came the youngest and the most forceful and ag-
gressive. And some of these peoples gave of their
best blood when at the strongest : the Dutch when
at the height of their sea power in the seventeenth
century, the English when expanding into the
greatest empire the world has heretofore seen in
the seventeenth, eighteenth and early nineteenth
centuries, the Gemians and Scandinavians from
1845 to i860 and the Irish during the following
fifty years. Latterly have come the emotional
peoples of Southern Europe, the Italians, Aus-
trians and Hungarians. France and Switzerland
have contributed a smaller but steady supply.
Turks, Greeks, Balkan peoples, and, in the last

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 135

two decades, two and a half millions of Russians,
a large proportion of them Polish Jews, have
added more. Practically all of these vastest
hordes of human beings that ever migrated from
one cherished spot on the earth to another have
been without distinction or privilege ; the few who
had such honors were soon shorn of them in the
hardships of the common lot. Most of the early
settlers could not read or write and signed their
names with a cross. It was only at a later day
when education became more general in Europe
that some of the immigrants brought with them
the rudiments of an education.

The chief value of the Constitution of the
United States, the instrument framed to protect
and guide all these peoples and mold them into
one, is that it provides a governmental system of
checks and balances, conserves the rights of the
minority from encroachments by the majority to
which it gives control, guarantees religious lib-
erty and prevents centralization of authority in
executive or legislature. When it is remembered
that because of the lack of these benefits men
suffered untold miseries for centuries and are still
suffering from that lack the statement of Web-
ster that our Constitution is the greatest instru-
ment ever struck off at a given time by the mind
of man does not seem unjustified. Formed for
the most part by the spirit and genius of Alexan-

136 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

der Hamilton, in its essentials it seems an inspira-
tion from the Almighty. Surviving a great civil
war and the changes in customs and thought of
130 years, it still proves itself most just and prac-
ticable when its original spirit is strictly adhered
to. Nowhere does it seem more venerable than
when compared with the governmental charters
and systems of other nations. In former ages the
mind of the King constituted the executive, leg-
islative and judicial branches of the government.
In addition he was head of the army and chief
executioner. The Greek states proved for the
first time that philosophy and the highest expres-
sion in art and literature can never thrive except
under liberty; they also proved the crass injustices
of untrammeled majorities working under what
was known as pure democracy, but was an aris-
tocracy upheld by slavery. The blessings of
Roman law and administration did not provide
any check against the power of the Emperor.
Theodoric, Charlemagne and Frederick the Great
revealed the efficacy of monarchy in the hands of
a wise administrator and a great soldier and
teacher; but in the hands of weak or vicious men
monarchy becomes inimical to the welfare of the
body politic. This was especially exemplified in
the successors of Ferdinand and Isabella upon the
throne of Spain. The Holy Roman Church of
the early Middle Ages asserted its sway over a

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 137

multitude of persons and claimed jurisdiction over
a world, but it, too, suffered from the results of
an over-centralized authority; and great poten-
tates in the seat of the Papacy like Gregory I and
Hildebrand were succeeded by men whose mon-
strosities rivaled the basest of the Roman em-
perors. Before these latter, when the executive
was still subject to the will of councils, and after-
wards, when the church had lived and learned
and become more representative in its institutions
with an advancing public opinion, the popes gave
examples to mankind of austerity and saintliness
of life. Its organization, however, still remains
without local independence, the priest being given
to and not selected by the congregation, and the
bishops and archbishops being appointive. The
steps by which English liberty was established in
Magna Charta, the revolution of 1689 and the
reform bills of 1832 and 1867 gradually placed
the power of government in one house of the leg-
islature and entirely impaired the authority and
usefulness of the crown; they did not provide
for disassociation of church and state, nor did
they diminish the burdens of an hereditary caste.
The outbreak of the French Revolution occurred
four years after the government of the United
States had been firmly established. It swept
away old institutions and injustices, but the con-
stitution of the Year One was so loosely drawn

138 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

as to make necessary the constructive genius of
the Emperor Napoleon; and since the fall of the
second empire in 1871 the government of France
has been so volatile as to permit of thirty-eight
premiers in as many years. Under the German
Empire the rights of free speech and public as-
sembly have been abridged, and control of the
entire administration has been centralized in the
hands of the Emperor. In the great governmental
document of the United States the fundamental
evils of other states have been done away with
and a government ''of the people, by the people
and for the people" instituted among men.

While the executive in the United States is
clothed with more power than that of the King
in most constitutional monarchies, he is entirely
subject to check by the legislature. If he should
exceed his powers or seek to destroy the govern-
ment of a free people, he may be impeached
by a two-third vote of the Senate. He is com-
mander in chief of the army and navy and, if he
has genius as a commander, may lead in the field ;
but he is still subject to the will of the people
through their representatives in the legislative
branch. They and not he have the right to de-
clare war. He appoints to offices only in the
executive and judicial branches, and cannot in-
terfere with the legislature. Those appointees
may be removed for cause by the Senate sitting

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 139

as a court. The House of Representatives orig-
inates money bills, but cannot enact them with-
out the critical assistance of the Senate and the
signature of the President, who has the power to
veto them but cannot insist upon his opposition,
if both houses pass them again by a two-thirds
vote. The Constitution carefully enumerated the
powers of the branches of the Federal government
and those of the several states. It provides a
supreme court to pass upon questions at issue,
so as to keep the law in conformity with those
powers and the rights guaranteed to all citizens,
rich and poor alike.

No nation in history ever gave its citizens such
a share in the government or protected them
against themselves to such an extent as did the
United States in its Constitution. In that docu-
ment it gave every male of twenty-one years and
over the right to vote for all elective public offi-
cers, leaving to the states only provision for means
of voting. After the Civil War an amendment
was enacted providing that the right to vote should
not be denied or abridged because of race, color
or previous condition of servitude. Neither in
ancient Greece nor in any modern state was the
right to vote made universal among males ex-
cept in the United States. The small number
of those who voted for Washington in the early
period of the government has grown until to-day

140 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

nearly five times the total population of 1 790 par-
ticipate in the direct election of the chief execu-
tive of the nation. And of those who enjoy the
suffrage there is a growing number of women.
In all the Northern and Western States the negro
has been granted the right to express his prefer-
ence at the ballot box, but in the South he votes
but seldom, due to the efforts of those in control
there to prevent him from doing so. This is the
only anomaly in the carrying out of the spirit of
the free institutions of the United States, and it
cannot be answered by evading it. But in the
participation by the whites in the government
there is no flaw. No European country has given
voice to the people to the same unqualified ex-
tent. The latter own and operate the govern-
ment, subject only to the Constitution.

Never on the earth has democracy ever been
more pure than in this land where all men enjoy
the benefits of freedom. The governments of
Solon and Lycurgus were never extended to the
common man, the slave or helot. Under the
Roman Republic the people had no universal
means of expression. Class distinctions prevailed
both there and in Greece. America has placed
no restriction upon the free exercise of right by
any man. It made provision for no classes and
prescribed conditions where they would be im-
possible. The son of a former negro slave be-

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 141

comes the head of an institution of practical learn-
ing which is an inspiration to his race. A boy
bom in a log cabin and without schooling, except
that which he gave himself, by sheer merit and
love of his fellow man, is raised at a time of
stress to lead the greatest of nations. Another
rises from canal boy to the Presidency. Every
lad born within the borders of the country may
emulate their example, no matter how poor his
circumstances, even though an inmate of an or-
phan asylum. As Napoleon used to say that ev-
ery soldier carried in his knapsack a marshal's
baton, so each youth in the United States is re-
stricted solely by his own abilities, character and
opportunities from ultimately assuming the high-
est position in the land. Just so the avenues to
wealth are open to all. The originator of every
great fortune in America started without a penny
and by his own thrift, industry and shrewdness,
stimulated by his ambition, laid the foundation
of his wealth. Andrew Carnegie began active
life as a telegraph operator, later saw the possi-
bilities of the steel business, by his genius helped
to organize it, and reaped the reward of his abili-
ties as a pioneer. John D. Rockefeller began his
career as a bookkeeper. As such he met his wife.
By care and shrewdness he and those who were
later associated with him organized the oil indus-
try. A fortune estimated at a billion dollars re-

142 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

suited. With the new ideals of the time these
men have been benefactors of mankind by assist-
ing enormously in the spread of knowledge and
education and in the development of scientific re-
search of a nature calculated to lengthen life and
make the globe more habitable. As much as men
may deprecate some of the methods by which
Rockefeller attained his wealth, it should not be
forgotten that he merely availed himself of the
opportunities of a new age and that his fellow
bookkeepers had the same means at their disposal
without the same insight and craft. James J.
Hill, greatest of the builders of the Northwest,
worked his way from steamboat clerk to extend-
ing the Great Northern Railroad to the Pacific.
He became its executive and controlled it finan-
cially. Thomas A. Edison, George Westing-
house and Henry Ford started with nothing. By
perseverance, acumen and inventive skill they built
great fortunes, but not without benefit to human-
ity. The original John Jacob Astor was the son
of a butcher. By energy and sound judgment
he organized and developed the fur trade. Jay
Gould was bom on a farm and kept books for
the village blacksmith. By dint of hard strug-
gle he gained an education, became a banker and
finally, by shrewd strategy and manipulation, the
owner of railroads and the Western Union Tele-
graph Company, leaving a fortune of $72,000,-

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 143

000. Cornelius Vanderbilt, founder of die for-
tune of that name — estimated at $100,000,000
at his death — was also a farmer's boy and began
life at sixteen by carrying produce and passen-
gers in a sailboat from Staten Island to New
York. Then, taking advantage — open to all —
of the demand for and growth of transportation
he became a steamboat captain and the head of
a great railroad system. Another farmer's boy
was Marshall Field, merchant prince of Chicago,
who started as clerk in a drygoods store. In a
land of opportunity Jacob Schiff began his career
as an alien and with little help. By fighting his
way through hard work and honest dealing he be-
came a great banker. Benjamin Altman, another
Jew, started as a pedler and left $15,000,000
in art treasures to be enjoyed in perpetu-
ity by the people of the City of New York.
The first of the Morgans began with prac-
tically no assistance. His son, the elder J. Pier-
pont Morgan, was a genius as an organizer of
industry and profited by it, helping to build the
country and keep its financial honor intact in time
of peril. And so throughout the list of a thou-
sand millionaires it is the same. Starting with
nothing, with the advantage of compulsory strug-
gle, they took advantage of opportunities and,
with the thought that all was before them and
that they were dependent solely upon their own

144 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

energies and abilities, hewed out or organized
new fields of production, gave employment to
labor and bought with their rewards such com-
forts as stimulated the more general use of a higher
standard of civilization. Great lawyers, physi-
cians, newspaper proprietors gained their start for
the most part in the same way. Pulitzer came
to America from Germany as a cabin boy, sold
papers in St. Louis, by his genius developed the St.
Louis Fost'Despatch and New York World and
left a fortune of $30,000,000. The elder Ben-
nett of the New York Herald, the elder McLean
of the Cincinnati Enquirer, Horace Greeley of the
New York Tribune, Dana of the Sun and Medill
of the Chicago Tribune were dependent for their
success only upon their own acumen and energy.
The father of William Randolph Hearst was an
intrepid spirit, who, like Spreckels and Fair, took
advantage of opportunity in the days of '49, ex-
tracted gold from the earth and helped to build
California. Adolph Ochs, starting without help
and all the handicaps of the Jewish race, has
solely by his genius built up one of the greatest
newspapers in the world, the New York Times.
Thomas F. Walsh and John B. Haggin, with
nerve and daring in rough and wild mining camps,
dominated their surroundings and amassed not
only the means of obtaining palatial comforts for
themselves but of stimulating new industry by

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 145

their capital. The Presidents have nearly all been
boys very poor in circumstances but rich in char-
acter. And so it is with the members of the Su-
preme Court and the Senate and House of Repre-
sentatives, cabinet officers and governors. Some
have been wealthy, but the great majority have
risen from extreme poverty. "Broke" to-day, a
man may be rich to-morrow; he is no different
than his fellow citizens in this pure democracy.
Rich to-day, a man may be "broke" to-morrow;
he also is no different than his fellow Americans.
It is the spirit of American institutions not to re-
spect any man because of his position or wealth,
gained because of those institutions, nor to have
any lack of respect for him because of that posi-
tion or wealth, but to admire or criticize him be-
cause of qualities of personality and character
which would please or displease them in any man,
rich or poor. Feeling that he may rise to any
height of position or possession, if he has the
requisite capability, the true American has no
dislike for that which he might by nerve, patience,
perseverance, shrewdness, industry, thrift and so-
briety aspire to, or his children some day attain.

The term democracy is here used in the broader
sense of a government by the whole people with-
out distinction of class, law or custom, but, in
addition to fulfilling this definition to the letter,
the United States has conferred its greatest benefit

146 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

upon mankind by giving the highest expression
of a truly representative republic. Every man
has the right to partake of public life at the ballot
and to seek office. He may take part in party
affairs by helping to choose delegates to a conven-
tion or name candidates at a primary. He may
vote for the man or the party platform which
most nearly expresses what he believes should be
done to benefit the township, city, county, state
or nation. He may through the newspapers, mag-
azines, books or public meeting assist in influencing
his fellow countrymen. He may appear before
committees of the legislature he has helped to
choose. If public opinion, influenced by fact and
argument, become strong enough, the officers thus
elected may be rejected at the polls after a short
period in office of what is usually one, two, four
or six years; if satisfactory to a majority, they
may be reelected. Thus selected, being represen-
tative men of their respective communities, they
make as wise laws and regulations for the main-
tenance and conduct of the government as human
mentality and the spirit of the times will permit.
Despite all the heat and passion of party debate
and maneuvering, scrupulous care and patriotic
devotion are given both by Republicans and Dem-
ocrats to the wise conduct of public affairs. In
the press galleries of the Senate and House for
several years, the writer can testify to the fact

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 147

that the Congress of the United States is com-
posed of two bodies of men as high in character
and abilities as may be found anywhere in the
world. The same may be said of the local leg-
islatures as representatives of their respective
commonwealths. All of them make laws within
their lights, not for the few but for the many.
Subjected to every criticism in a land where party
government, strife and criticism are rife, and
where those favoring a party or idea stop at noth-
ing in blackening the reputations and motives of
their opponents, the representatives of the sover-
eign people of the United States have neglected
nothing within their power, from the Continental
Congress which framed the Constitution to the
present time, "to form a more perfect union, es-
tablish justice, insure domestic tranquillity, pro-
vide for the common defense, promote the gen-
eral welfare and secure the blessings of liberty
to ourselves and our posterity." Giving free op-
portunity to political talent, but saved from the
demagogue by the restrictions of the Constitution
and the spirit of our institutions, the people of
the United States have through their representa-
tive government given to the world some of the
greatest orators, legalists and constructive states-
men of any land, among them Franklin, Hamil-
ton, Washington, Jefferson, Jackson, Clay, Cal-
houn, Webster, Lincoln, Grant, Cleveland, Mc-

148 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Kinley, Root and Roosevelt. That government
still receives the admiration of the peoples of the
earth.

Under these free institutions, where unlimited
opportunity is given to the enterprising and skilful,
where property is protected by wise laws, the re-
sourceful and aggressive people of the United
States, the descendants of discoverers and pio-
neers have found means of expressing themselves
and bettering their condition by inventive capacity
which has astounded humanity and caused more
progress in the amelioration of human wants than
in all the centuries preceding the nineteenth.
The trolley car, motor propelled elevated rail-
road, subway train, motorboat, omnibus, auto-
mobile and motorcycle were created here, as were
the electric light, telephone, telegraph, phono-
graph, moving picture, steam boat and railroad,
typewriter, sewing machine, multiple press, wood
pulp paper and the modem newspaper and mag-
azine. With free initiative to develop to any
extent of wealth industrially, increasing desire
everywhere for the comforts and practical necessi-
ties of life, and a larger number of skilled laborers,
the people of this country have received higher
wages and professional income and attained a bet-
ter standard of living than anywhere on the earth.
The result has been inventive genius startling to
the modem mind.

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 149

The telephone was invented by Bell in 1876,
typewriter by Sholes in 1878, cash regis-
ter by Patterson in 1885, incandescent lamp
by Edison in 1880, phonograph by Edison
in 1878, electric furnace reduction by Cowles in
1885, electrolytic alkali production by Castner
in 1890, transparent photograph film by Eastman
in 1888, motion picture machine by Edison in
1893, button hole sewing machine by Reece in
1881, carborundum by Acheson in 1891, calcium
carbine by Willson in 1888, artificial graphite
by Acheson in 1896, split-phase induction motor
by Tesla in 1887, air brake by Westinghouse in
1869, electric welding by Thomson in 1889, tyP^"
bar casting by Mergenthaler in 1885, chair-stitch
shoe sewing machine by French and Myers in
1881, single- type composing machine by Lanston
in 1887, continuous process match machine by
Beecher in 1888, chrome tanning by Schulz in
1884, disk plow by Hardy in 1896, welt machine
by Goodyear in 1871, electric lamp by Brush
in 1879, recording adding machine by Burroughs
in 1888, celluloid by Hyatt in 1870, automatic
knot-tying harvester machine by Appleby in 1880,
water gas by Lowe in 1875, machine for making
barbed wire by Glidden in 1875, rotary converter
by Bradley in 1887, automatic car coupler by
Janney in 1873, ^ig^ speed steel b)^ Taylor and
White in 1901, dry air process for blast furnace

150 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

by Gay ley in 1894, block signals for railways by
Robinson in 1872, trolley car by VanDepoele and
Sprague in 1887, and Harveyized armor plate
by Harvey in 1891. And in an earlier day Ben-
jamin Franklin first discovered the electric spark,
born almost at the same time as the Declaration
of Independence, and precursor of this age of
enlightenment, both intellectual and practical.
Beside these American inventions in number and
importance those of other lands pale into compara-
tive insignificance. Electric steel was invented
by Heroult, a Frenchman, in 1900, dynamite by
Nobel, a Swede, in 1867, artificial alizarene dyes
by Graebe and Lieberman, Germans, in 1869, si-
phon recorder by Thompson, an Englishman, in
1874, gas engine, Otto cycle, by Otto, a German,
in 1877, wireless telegraphy by Marconi, an Ital-
ian, in 1900, smokeless powder by Vielle, a French-
man, in 1886, Diesel oil motor by Diesel, a Ger-
man, in 1900, centrifugal creamer by DeLaval,
a Swede, in 1880, manganese steel by Hadfield,
an Englishman, in 1884, electric transformer by
Gaulard and Gibbs, Englishmen, in 1883, cyanide
process for extracting metal by Arthur and De-
Forest in 1888, mantle burner by Welsbach, an
Austrian, in 1890, and the by-product coke oven
by Hoffman, an Austrian, in 1893.

To make this intense and practical life possible
the United States has accomplished more for edu-

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 151

cation than any other country, with the possible
exception of Germany during the past half cen-
tury. Following the ideal of Luther that every
child should receive an education, in 1647 ^^^
colony of Massachusetts laid down a system of
popular education for every child in free schools
which has been the model in principle of every
State in the Union since that time. At present,
of the white children of the entire country, be-
tween the ages of six and nine )^ears, 77.2 per cent,
are attending school and of the negroes 49.3 per
cent.; of the whites between the ages of ten and
fourteen jears 91.1 per cent, and of the blacks
68.6 per cent. ; of the whites between the ages of
fifteen and twenty years 33.7 per cent, and of the
negroes 26.5 per cent. Americans advancing
from New England and the East to the Middle
West and the Far West have taken with them the
little red school house, which has been the tutor
of many a future leader in life. Graded and high
schools and numerous colleges and universities,
as well as technical institutions, have been created
during the past half century to meet the needs of a
greater and more diversified population. Several
countries in Europe have since greatly developed
their educational institutions, but the people of the
United States were the first to provide universal
non-sectarian education for all of its children, rich
or poor. Catholic or Protestant, white or black.

152 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

No influence in America is more democratizing
than the common school.

In the United States, where there is absolute
equality under the law, is to be found the utmost
respect for public order. Great crowds on elec-
tion night or at any other public gathering need no
guiding hand. In the courts the jury system and
methods of appeal in both civil and criminal cases
give ample opportunity for even handed justice.
The rich are estopped from mulcting the poor by
the Sherman law and the poor are prevented from
stealing or destroying the property of the rich by
constitutional guarantees. Justice moves with
such celerity as crowded calendars will permit.
There is no respect for persons. In cases of mur-
der, four Jews, a prominent police lieutenant, a
Catholic priest and a Protestant minister pay the
penalty with their lives within a short time.
Every rebellion, whether against law and order or
against the fundamental conceptions of the State,
has been put down. If courts have erred it is be-
cause men have erred; and juries may also err.
But in every community throughout the country
the local people will testify that the judges who
have been elected or appointed are men of integ-
rity and repute, and students of jurisprudence in
foreign lands have paid tribute to the high charac-
ter and abilities of the bench of the United States,
as exemplified in such men as Jay, Marshall, Ful-

SIGNIFICANCE OF UNITED STATES 153

ler, Brewer, Harlan, White, Hughes and Taft.
The bar of the country, too, is careful to maintain
a high standard. William Nelson Cromwell, Phi-
lander C. Knox, Elihu Root and John C. Spooner
are the peers of the great lawyers of any land.

This, then, is the meaning of the United States,
known to every lad born within its borders and an-
nounced to the poor immigrant: that this govern-
ment of the free provides an asylum for the op-
pressed of every Caucasian and therefore assimil-
able race; that the many transfused into one are
making the American people, the most vital the
earth has known; that equal opportunity is af-
forded by democratic institutions to every indi-
vidual to attain to the highest position and great-
est wealth and to quietly enjoy without mo-
lestation the fruits of his toil; that Catholic,
Protestant, Greek or Jew may worship God in
his own way and without suffering from law or
prejudice; that the children of every citizen, na-
tive or foreign born, shall have the right of non-
sectarian education at the expense of the State;
that every male, and in some States females as
well, of twenty-one years and over shall have the
right to vote and hold office, and that under lib-
erty and wise laws every man, woman and child
in the land shall have greater comfort and joy of
living than anywhere in the world, now or
throughout the past.

CHAPTER V

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC

"The principle of democracy is corrupted not only
when the spirit of equality is extinct, but likewise when
it falls into a spirit of extreme equality, and when each
citizen would fain be upon a level with those whom he
has chosen to command him. Then the people, incapable
of bearing the very power they have delegated, want to
manage everything themselves, to debate for the Senate,
to execute for the magistrates and to decide for the
judges." — Montesquieu.

To those means provided in the Constitution for
giving expression to the popular will there have
sprung up vigorous opponents during the past few
years who have sneered at what they have termed
their imperfections, and declared that they are in-
adequate for the needs of a more diverse civiliza-
tion or to give force quickly enough to the wishes
of the majority. These opponents, therefore,
urge that extra constitutional powers be given to
the electorate. Principal among these are the
initiative of new legislation by a stated number of
voters, the referendum of important measures to
the people, and the recall of public officers and
judicial decisions distasteful to a majority of the
citizens. With these inaugurated in their com-
pletest extent the country would no longer be a re-

154

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 155

public, based upon truly representative govern-
ment, but a pure democracy patterned after that
of Athens subsequent to the reforms of Solon and
Cleisthenes.

Inasmuch as this problem of whether purely
democratic or genuinely representative govern-
ment is best for this country and in fact for the
world has been uppermost in the minds of political
thinkers, it might be wise to investigate whether
it would be harmful to make such a great change
at this time. If the legislative, executive and
judicial departments of the government have
worked so well and have brought a happiness and
prosperity greater than that ever given to any
people on the earth heretofore, does not the burden
of proof rest upon the opponents of this system
to show that it has outworn its usefulness? If the
American people and those who have come to these
shores together have gained a greater degree of
liberty, more comforts, higher wages and wealth
that has exceeded the dreams of avarice, do they
need added functions to express their will '? If an
American has a full chance to express himself at
the Australian ballot for measures, candidates and
officers, does he need a further voice in public af-
fairs than he now possesses?

No process in America is so easy as that of mak-
ing laws. In Congress a member of the House
and Senate, at the instance of a constituent or

156 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

upon his own initiative, drops into a basket in the
office of the file clerk, to be printed and referred to
appropriate committee, a bill for any purpose
ranging from removing the capital of the nation
to the Ozark Mountains to preparing the country
for the emergency of war. If the originator of the
bill is speaking for widespread opinion or genuine
merit, his measure is granted a hearing. Argu-
ments are made for and against, members of the
committee desiring to hear both sides, and if the
cause be not insistent in its necessity, it is left to
die, for the time being, by a majority vote. If it
has genuine merit or represents widespread opin-
ion, it is reported to the body which the committer
represents, a day set for its discussion and is then
passed or rejected. The men who make up the
various committees are those thought to be best
fitted for the consideration of such measures as are
likely to come before them. If passed, the meas-
ure goes through exactly the same channels of con-
sideration in the coordinate branch of the Con-
gress. In the forty-eight state legislatures the
process is practically the same. And so in a lesser
degree in the aldermanic body of most cities. To
assist in giving information of fact upon all meas-
ures intended to change or expedite the conduct of
the government various commissions and bureaus
have been created. No government in the world
has ever collected, digested and distributed to the

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 157

officials of the separate States and the people gen-
erally a wider range of useful knowledge. And
members of Congress have at their disposal one of
the three greatest libraries on the earth, any book
of which may be secured by pneumatic tube within
five or ten minutes. Party government prevails
and the measures favored indirectly through con-
vention platform by the people when they elect
their representatives are voted out of committee,
but are subject to the ardent criticism of oppo-
nents both in committee and on the floor. The
great appropriation bills are considered with little
party prejudice and with patriotic attention to
duty. To say that measures include "pork bar-
rels" and are subject to "log rolling" is only to
admit that men are human after they reach Con-
gress as before, as "pork" means merely an at-
tempt on the part of a representative to satisfy
the desire of the people of his district for a new
public building or improvement, and "log rolling"
a further effort to satisfy their wishes by combin-
ing with a sufficient number of others of the same
purpose to get the measure through. Without
careful analysis and submission of plans by the
architect of the Treasury or the engineers of the
War Department the details of these measures
would not get past the committee, and if they did
not for the most part contain much merit, they
would not be able to pass the criticism of the two

158 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

houses and the country. Even the much criticized
mileage is founded upon the just custom of mak-
ing it sufficient to pay for the expense of trans-
porting the member and his family to and from
Washington. Not even under Reed and Cannon
was the House of Representatives deprived of a
right or any freedom in expressing itself. The
speaker appointed the committees by and with the
consent of his party colleagues. His dictum in
that respect and as a parliamentarian was subject
to the genuine rule of a majority of the entire
House. Those two men were great leaders and
patriots and were so well thought of respectively
as to be prominently mentioned as candidates for
the Presidency. As strong characters they made
enemies, but the people or their representatives
were not less able to find expression because of
them. In the state legislatures the give and take
of party combat, or the agreement of some of the
members of one party to do certain favors if some
members of the other party will agree with them
on certain legislation, cannot be a ground for
stating that the majority of the voters cannot ex-
press its will through them, for the reason that any
real violation of ethics or flagrant waste is imme-
diately detected by the remainder of the represen-
tatives or the executive and his assistants in minor
offices and used for party purposes throughout the
general constituency of the State. Aldermen are

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 159

subject to the same fire of criticism through local
avenues of public opinion. Executives are sub-
ject to removal upon charges by the legislature at
any time. They or the legislators hold office but
a short period, from one to six years, the executives
usually from two to four years and the lower
branch of the legislature from one to two years.
The people may remove any or all of them at the
subsequent election and replace them by new men
more to their satisfaction. The supreme courts
help to keep the people within the fundamental
laws they have given themselves.

That the men who hold office either in the legis-
lative, executive or judicial branch of the govern-
ment are truly representative is indicated by the
fact that in nearly every district in the United
States from whence they have been chosen or ap-
pointed they are entitled to the respect and ad-
miration of their fellow citizens. Members of the
Senate and House and governors are looked up to
as men far above the average in their respective
communities, not merely because of their position
but their character and attainments. In the few
cases where the contrary is true the difference in
feeling is the result of disclosures after election.
And as much as their constituents may ultimately
come to differ with them politically, and though
they may be defeated for that reason, they are still
regarded highly by their contemporaries and some-

i6o THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

times eventually by the historian. Members of
the cabinet of the Presidents have been men of dis-
tinction and unsullied character, with very rare
exceptions. For the emoluments received and the
standard of position, lesser offices in both legis-
lative and judicial branches are filled by more than
usual ability, and, because of the American love of
public honors, men often give up more lucrative
vocations to serve the State. Judges of every
kind of court are looked up to and frequently re-
vered as having in their lives exemplified the jus-
tice they are expected to deal. In the United
States the ablest talent is enabled to reach the
highest position, and so on down through the dif-
ferent gradations to the lower officers. The occu-
pant of the lowest office, if he has the ability and
personality to serve and thereby please the people,
may reach the highest. The highest, if he abuses
the power the people have given him, may quickly
be removed. Some of the members of the Federal
Senate and House, of both parties, have served for
many years, a credit to their constituents, re-
spected by their colleagues and wise servants of
the nation. Having to deal with the making of
laws, most of the men in that body are lawyers,
but a large percentage of them are business men of
all kinds, with a sprinkling of doctors and other
professions. In the state legislatures and local
bodies practically the same average prevails. The

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 161

civil service laws make imperative an efficient
corps of expert public servants in every depart-
ment of the federal state and larger municipal
governments. A great body of postmasters,
postal clerks and letter carriers and the police in
the larger cities like New York, with the single ex-
ception of a Becker, testify to the character of
those employees. No men are so amenable to
public opinion, and so often frightened by it, as
members of the legislature and elected executive
officials. Sometimes irascible, but most of them
very approachable, they love power and the busi-
ness of government and loving that power they
desire to retain it. In order to retain it they know
that they must please their constituents, and that
is their constant motive. Some are too amenable
to their districts and hesitate to take action in a
definite way in a controversy where opinion is
quite evenly divided and bitterly ; if they feel that
there is a strong public demand for a measure and
they believe it is right, they lose no time in curry-
ing favor with their constituents and the country
by voting for it. Representatives like James R.
Mann, of Chicago, working unremittingly for
twenty years to know thoroughly every depart-
ment of the government so as to be able to prop-
erly criticize bad legislation and constructively
promote good statutes, such as his own pure food
law, and Senator Theodore E. Burton, of Ohio,

i62 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

with no thought but the common and material
good of the nation, are among the highest examples
of patriotic men who have served in the national
legislature. And on the Democratic side patient
and painstaking members and able speakers like
Champ Clark and John Sharp Williams have the
esteem of constituencies that have long honored
them, and of their party and opponents. In the
governorships men of the character of Charles E.
Hughes and Woodrow Wilson have felt their re-
sponsibility to the enlightened opinion of their
time and endeavored to represent and lead it.
And in their day in the Presidency no men could
have been more quick to respond to the awakened
conscience of the nation than William McKinley
and Theodore Roosevelt. A great majority of
members of Congress first served in the state legis-
latures. And in cities mayors, like William J.
Gaynor, of New York, the elder Carter Harrison,
of Chicago, and James Rolfe, Jr., of San Fran-
cisco, have not only been representative of and
quickly amenable to the best public opinion in the
community, but have been an honor to the con-
stituents who honored them.

Are these representative men, who are com-
municative and kindly disposed to their fellows,
with abilities far above the average in their respec-
tive constituencies, therefore popular and hence
elected, subject to the sinister influence, power

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 163

and even bribery of special and selfish interests^
Does a lobby exist in Washington which makes a
business of corrupting the men who make the laws
of the nation? It is true that there are numerous
and more or less well paid lobbyists who represent
only those who send them. If they have succeeded
in bribing a member of Congress, the careful
scrutiny of other members, and the vigilance of 1 54
members of the Press Gallery, who are the eyes of
the people in Washington, have been able to de-
tect very few instances of it during the past quar-
ter of a century. If money has been passed, it has
been rare indeed. And the character of the men
who represent the American people in both the
House and Senate would indicate that it had al-
most never been so passed and received. Prac-
tically every special interest has a representative
in the Capital. The farmers have sent officials
of the Grange to seek legislation which would
best affect the farmer. The American Federation
of Labor has maintained a paid lobby for many
years, endeavoring to have laws passed of ad-
vantage to union labor and frequently threaten-
ing members with defeat if its pleas were not ac-
cepted. Those in favor of the conservation of
national resources have maintained a representa-
tive and assistants to accomplish that which they
desire. So have the timber men. Manufacturers
of beer, wine and whisky, have ofBces, attorneys

i64 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and clerks. So has the Anti-Saloon League.
The National Association of Manufacturers has a
lawyer and offices, as has the Builders' Association.
Other influential attorneys are paid by the rail-
roads. During the consideration of a great tariff
bill the number of lobbyists is increased to a con-
siderable extent. They represent the various in-
dustries which would be affected one way or the
other by the amount of duty fixed in the schedules.
Sometimes more than one industry employs the
same man. Merchants, manufacturers, govern-
ment employees, all having special interests of any
kind or degree, have paid lobbyists at Washington.
Who then represent the people of the United
States ? Who are disinterested in the special pleas
of either of the lobbyists and desire only the com-
mon good? Alas I only the 435 men of tried
character and ability who serve them in the House
of Representatives and the ninety-six similar men
in the Senate. And the 1 54 eyes !

How does the paid lobbyist work and what does
he accomplish? With 6,361,502 farms, a farm-
ing population of 49,348,883 and a value of farm
property of $40,991,000,000 it is not surprising
that farming interests should, through the Grange
or other agencies outside the Department of Agri-
culture, seek to gain legislation of benefit to them-
selves, such as that providing for rural credits.
With a total of 2,604,701 labor unionists who

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 165

pay dues and desire to advance their own cause
it is not remarkable that they should attempt to
influence Congress. And so with 270,082 manu-
facturing establishments, 7,707,751 persons en-
gaged in manufactures with a capitalization of
$18,490,749,000, a total of 1,815,239 persons
employed by railroads and a capitalization of
$10,796,125,712 and the banking interests of the
richest nation on the globe. The duty of the
lobbyist is mainly to collect information as to
what measure of interest to his particular client is
likely to come up for discussion, to find or set a
day for public hearings, and then to send out let-
ters or telegrams to those he or his clients desire
to present the arguments of that particular side
before a committee. He also sometimes directs
through local affiliations the sending of thousands
of telegrams to members of Congress, all of the
same tenor, urging for the general good of the com-
munity or blasting as harmful to humanity in
general the legislation desired or opposed. Some
of these men are despised by members of Congress
as menials. Others are highly respected as emi-
nent legal talent or as authorities upon the subject
and interests they speak for. There being no
clericals, agrarians or special representatives of
any class in Congress, and each member being the
representative of all the people of his district, rich
and poor, black and white, it is perhaps a natural

i66 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

result that each body of citizens desiring certain
results at the hands of the representatives of all
the people by a majority vote should have repre-
sentatives of their own on the ground to supply
through the immense avenues of communication in
this country the information they need and to ap-
pear for them before committees and argue their
cases. So far as the writer has been able to judge,
through a quite thorough knowledge of these men,
gained while seeking news, they are on the average
men of standing and must have the confidence of
those they represent or they would not be there.
Members of Congress listen to them much as
judges would listen to lawyers. An individual
representative or senator might have sympathy for
the law or class desired, as in the case of a labor
leader sent to Congress; but through and back of
it all is the legislature of the elected representa-
tives of the people of the United States, amenable
to the will and sometimes the whim of the people
themselves, and therefore desirous of pleasing
them because subject to recall.

Some there are who believe that every woman in
the world is bad and every man a thief, that the
government of the people established by those who
have suffered from the errors of other political
forms has become a failure because all of its public
servants are crooks or in the pay of big business,
and that unless the people are given more power

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 167

than ordained for them in the Constitution they
will be unable to obtain the just rights there in-
tended. The fact is, however, that nearly all of
the women and nine-tenths of the men are good
and are well disposed toward their fellow men if
given half a chance, that the government Lincoln
described as the best that ever conserved liberty on
the earth never produced more honest, faithful or
efficient public servants than now, and that the
people have every means of expressing their will
fully at the present moment. Men and women
are what they are and not what they sometimes
think themselves, or what some people sometimes
attempt to make them think they are. They are
inclined toward better things and desire to hear
and do that which will bring those things nearer
to them and the community in which they dwell
and have citizenship. They are sometimes be-
fogged by those who make statements to them that
all the world is wrong and that the only true way
to set it right is by subscribing to the ideas pre-
sented by such persons. Sometimes these persons
are genuinely desirous of bringing about changes
in the complexion of the State that will give the
people more power. And there are also persons
who dislike to be tempted to take office, but would
gladly do so if they could thereby save the people
from the terrible crimes that are being committed
in their name. The people of America, it is stated

i68 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

by such persons, are capable of anything. The
printer's devil of twenty-one in the great modem
newspaper is as capable of giving expression to the
pulsating life of the nation as the editor in chief,
the young law clerk as much a master of the in-
tricacies of statute, decision and practise as the
head of the firm, the newest clerk of running the
Steel Corporation as Elbridge H. Gary, the fresh-
est brakeman of running a train as the oldest engi-
neer on the road, the newly graduated youth from
college of directing a great banking house as the
leader of Wall Street, the uninitiated who bets on
margins as the capable member of the Stock Ex-
change who has been buying and selling for forty
years, the city lad of sowing wheat, gathering and
threshing it as the wisest farmer, the land lubber
of running a ship in time of storm as the most
weather beaten skipper, the old maid of bringing
up children as the woman with several of them, the
entered apprentice of laying the compass and
astrolabe as the master mason himself. The
reason why each of these is as worthy and well
qualified as the other is that all are twenty-one
years of age. They vote; therefore the judgment
of one is as good as the other on any abstract or
technical question that may arise. These men and
women of twenty-one years and over are born
legislators and jurists. Irrespective of calling,
training or position in life, the loafer is endowed

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 169

with as much wisdom in deciding upon an in-
tricate issue before the municipality, State or na-
tion as the man who has given his time and
thought with great care to the subject, the inebri-
ate of entering upon the details of the case that a
court has heard perhaps for weeks as the generally
good man who has presided over that court.

All kinds and qualities of men have a voice in
the government of the United States, but the
framers of the Constitution designed that they
should express themselves indirectly and through
their representatives, so that they might secure the
wisest and most just laws. If any one will re-
flect, he must acknowledge that the men by whom
he is surrounded in his locality are not all alike.
Some have an aptitude for study and thought.
Others center their attention upon pleasures that
are different. Some are industrious and worthy.
Others are not. Some have great capacity.
Others have lesser abilities. All, whether trained
or not, have more or less common sense. That is
why all were included in the government. But
the best exercise of that common sense lies in
selecting men who have shown evidences of trust-
worthiness and more than average ability to repre-
sent them on the bench, in the legislature or in
executive office to hear evidence, discuss and de-
cide upon matters for their common benefit which
they have not the time or mental training to hear,

170 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

discuss and decide. The great public questions
which are constantly discussed they have the right
and the capacity to decide upon as they are pre-
sented to them in the party platforms. But while
they so decide such questions in this general way,
they elect a Congress, legislature or executive to
carry out in effective and just detail the planks of
the party platform that they have voted for.
This implies that the people constitute the fourth
and most important branch of the government.
They, too, must do their duty as effectively as
they demand that their servants do theirs.
They should go to the polls and vote. And
yet in 1916 a total of but 18,638,871 men
and women, black and white, voted in the United
States out of a male white population, twenty-one
years and over, of about 27,000,000. A few
years ago certain reformers declared that by giv-
ing all the people more direct power in Pennsyl-
vania through the primary and direct election of
Senators the result would inevitably be the driv-
ing out of public life of Boies Penrose, who was
said to be the worst type of boss — this principally
because he was an opponent. But when the peo-
ple did receive that direct power Penrose was re-
elected by a majority of 250,000 votes. The
reason was that Penrose was found to be a natural
leader of men, whether facing legislature or
primary.

The primary system, adopted in many States to

i

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 171

satisfy the demand for larger direct authority on
the part of the people, in order to make it easier for
the poor but independent man to serve the public
in office and to prevent cliques and interests from
controlling the decision of the electorate, has had
the opposite effect from that intended. Men con-
tending for important office have been subjected to
great expense under this system. Indeed it has
become more difficult for a candidate for an im-
portant office to succeed without the backing of
personal wealth or large interests. Under the
convention system each party placed in nomina-
tion its most promising, able and invulnerable
leaders in order to defeat the opposition at the
polls. The result was a Lincoln, a Grant, a
Cleveland, a McKinley and a Roosevelt. In sev-
eral of the States the primary has been used by
only a small percentage of the total number of
possible party voters. The selection is thus left
to those who are more or less directly interested in
party affairs. This only slightly differs from the
convention system, and is much more expensive
to the taxpayers. When Henry Ford, a Demo-
crat, is made a candidate for the Presidency in the
Republican primary in Michigan and defeats the
Republican contender,' the system becomes laugh-
able.

Also at an enormous expense special elections
have been held upon technical matters which

172 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

might have been left to the legislators to decide.
To merely place a certain issue upon a ballot does
not guarantee that it will receive thorough con-
sideration by the people as a whole. Not long
ago, because a spirit of discontent pervaded the
electorate, changes of fundamental importance
were made in the form of government of several
States and even of the manner of electing United
States Senators. Later on, when the tide had
turned against change, largely on account of the
European War, a constitution which contained
many wise reforms for the benefit of the people of
the State of New York was voted down by a ma-
jority of half a million votes. The voting of the
people as a whole upon an abstract question is al-
ways expressive of a tendency one way or the
other, and not of such judgment after careful or
expert consideration by the majority of the electo-
rate as has been given to it by its principal advo-
cates or opponents. These are ready and willing
to give it that consideration, but the people as a
whole have not the time or ability to do so. Few
men attempt to try their own case in court; they
employ a lawyer. So it is with the people; they
elect representatives. To contend that every man
who whittles a stick at the village store is not as
expert as the man who has given many years of
his life to the gathering of information, and who
is used to the consideration of evidence, is not

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 173

doubting the people; it is common sense. The
man at the village store decides upon questions in
a general way. He then helps to elect a repre-
sentative who will carry out his ideas in a specific
way. This is representative government. It has
stood the test of time, met every problem that has
so far come before the country, built this nation
into the greatest upon the earth and given birth
to some of the noblest characters of history.

Yet there come those before the court of public
opinion who pray that the methods of expressing
the popular will be changed so as to conform more
nearly to that of Athens, where the entire popula-
tion was half slave, where five hundred of the
people sitting as a court condemned Socrates to
death simply because he was opposed to the teach-
ings of Paganism and held that simple principles
of right living should be the guide to man, who
sought to assail Alcibiades, their ablest general,
for profaning the Elusinian mysteries when about
to set out to attack Syracuse, and who permitted
Miltiades, the hero of Marathon, to equip an ex-
pedition against Paros without telling them what
it was for and then condemned him to death be-
cause he failed. In the small community of
Athens it was easy for the people as a collective
unit to act upon the prejudice of the moment and
to be jealous of their power and of those who
might by great deeds serve them too well. They

174 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

trusted no representatives and had no courts to
compel them to obey the forms of fundamental
law that they had previously made. But this is a
government of an hundred millions of people,
whose leaders in the constitutional convention of
1787 and subsequent Congresses have profited by
the mistakes of other and earlier republics and
monarchies, prescribing checks against the suave
demagogue who would pave the way for personal
tyranny by smooth talk, and providing untold
blessing and happiness for all mankind. Ex-
pressing themselves in a general way and usually
with wisdom upon all questions, yet selecting the
men they can trust to enact them into law, the peo-
ple leave to those men the details, though reports
of their doings are constantly made to them
through the newspapers and the criticism of the
opposition.

Is it not a menace to the republican institutions
of the United States, then, to remove the safe-
guards for the making of wise laws by men best
fitted for the task? Is it not a menace if, in the
interests of what is called pure democracy, in a
land where all the people are already more demo-
cratic than ever before on the earth and where it
is so easy to initiate legislation if there is sufficient
demand for it, legislation is taken out of the hands
of the legislature, chosen because of its representa-
tive competency, at the instance of a minority, and

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 175

placed in the hands of the electorate as a whole, the
entire number of the individual members of which
cannot in nature of the case decide with business
judgment for the benefit of the taxpayer and the
community? Through the channels they already
have the people have unearthed insurance scan-
dals, legislated so as to prevent them in the fu-
ture, curbed the power of the railroads and other
great corporations, provided a much more perfect
currency system and established bureaus for sup-
plying information that will enhance vigilance
and elected officials of high character to govern
them. Is it not a menace to stability, and even-
handed justice, if after their representatives have
considered a problem from every point of view
and then decided as they deem right, the people
have the question referred to them for direct vote
when the air may be full of slander and clamor,
and perhaps upset that fair and wise judgment;
especially when they have the established and
proper authority to remove those representatives
at the subsequent election and place others in
power who will reverse the decision if after the
intervening time it has been proven to be wrong?
Is it not a menace to the wise safeguards of human
life and property provided in the Constitution, the
statutes, the common law and the traditions of
legal rights which have protected human society in
the past that the loser in a case in the courts de-

176 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

cided by a judge or judges selected by the people
for character and fitness, or appointed by execu-
tives selected for character and fitness, shall be
permitted with loud voice to befog the issue and
have it decided by the voters upon mere super-
ficial grounds? The men of prominence who
propose to make a democracy out of the republic
are usually men of great egotism and selfishness,
who chafe at the restraints of law in the accom-
plishment of their will, and seek to remove them
by honeyed words to the electorate, so that they
may gain power and use it to punish their enemies
and subvert the rights for which they have in wide
generalizations been so vigorously contending.
In the past they have sometimes succeeded by this
means. At other times they have not hesitated to
take up arms for what they pretend to be their
aims. Peisistratus is an example.

Assuming a measure for the preparation of the
nation for war as a case in point, what would be
the effect under pure democracy, if, after listening
to all the evidence before the committees pre-
sented by the officers of the army and navy, instead
of that striking and sensational part which is sent
out to the country through the newspapers, and
after discussing the question upon the floor of both
houses the bill adopted went to the President for
his signature and became law*? Those who desire a
smaller, and, to them, more reasonable defense are

MENACES TO THE REPUBLIC 177

regarded by the opposition as mollycoddles.
Those who desire the utmost defense are looked
upon by the other side as militarists. Feeling
runs high. Those who are in the minority after
their defeat in Congress are dissatisfied. Having
considerable opinion behind them, twenty-five per
cent, of the electorate bring on a special election
on the subject, and in the campaign the entire
matter is debated again, but without the same
minute and expert advice to be digested thor-
oughly by competent minds before decision. The
result might mean disaster to the country. And
if, under the system proposed, judges construed
the result as taking away constitutional guaran-
tees of the liberty of the minority of the citizens,
those judges might be recalled during the clamor.
Then not only the minority but all citizens would
ultimately suffer.

CHAPTER VI

MENACES TO LIBERTY

"Protection, therefore, against the tyranny of the
magistrate is not enough : there needs protection also
against the tyranny of the prevailing opinion and feel-
ing; against the tendency of society to impose, by other
means than civil penalties, its own ideas and practises as
rules of conduct on those who dissent from them; to
fetter the development and, if possible, prevent the for-
mation of any individuality not in harmony with its
ways, and compel all characters to fashion themselves
after the model of its own. There is a limit to the legiti-
mate interference of collective opinion with individual
independence; and to find that limit, and maintain it
against encroachment, is as indispensable to a good con-
duct of human affairs as protection against political
despotism." — John Stuart Mill.

The framers of the Constitution of the United
States determined to secure the blessings of liberty
to themselves and their posterity. They guaran-
teed to every State in the Union a Republican form
of government, declared that the right of the peo-
ple to be secure in their persons, houses, papers
and effects against unreasonable searches and sei-
zures should not be violated, and stated that the
enumeration in the document of certain rights

178

MENACES TO LIBERTY 179

should not be construed to deny or disparage
others retained by the people. Those who fol-
lowed them in the Congress they created provided
that the right of citizens to vote should not be de-
nied or abridged by the United States or by any
state on account of race, color or previous condi-
tion of servitude. It is not likely that either
the original makers or their successors con-
templated new forms of attempts to abridge the
liberty of the citizens, which would arise with the
development of the civilization they helped to es-
tablish. Nor is it probable that they foresaw that
the instrument they gave America in order to bring
about the benefits named in the preamble would
be so misconstrued in some instances as to prevent
the very rights stipulated therein.

Nevertheless there has manifested itself, along
with the tremendous industrial progress of half a
century, and with the desire to provide material
means for betterment and to do away with that
which is a harm to the individual, a tendency to
take away the right of a man to better himself and
to make it the province of the community to do
so, to deny rights of happiness and independence
to some unless conferred by the organization
which the great number have sworn allegiance to,
to stifle initiative, individuality and ambition in
the interests of what is termed the common good,
to deny the suffrage to large masses of intelligent

i8o THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

persons with life and property to defend, despite
the fact that they fulfil the stipulations of the
Constitution thereto, to increase governmental
agencies for investigating and regulating the con-
duct of private business, to establish a state within
the State in the interests of an organization out-
side of the State, and, in short, to establish, under
the name and form of the public weal, a tyranny
of the majority.

No monarchy, oligarchy or aristocracy in the
history of man ever inflicted such severe punish-
ments upon the individual, and always to what was
said to be his advantage, than a majority acting in
common to compel him at the point of the sword,
the rack or the law to do or believe the things ac-
ceptable to or decreed by the greater number of
members of the community, country or empire.
With cruel, and oftentimes inhuman, treatment
they deprived the minority of the right to think,
believe and act as they pleased, even when others
were not thereby harmed, and of happiness and
life. The Greeks banished and put to death those
who particularly disagreed with or displeased the
majority. Romans in the majority in their alle-
giance to Paganism impaled and threw to the lions
the Christians. Then, at the height of its power,
the Roman church, with a majority of adherents
in Christendom, invented refinements of cruelty
for those who differed with them, burning

MENACES TO LIBERTY i8i

them alive at the stake, torturing them with hot
irons, breaking them open or crushing them on the
rack for the good of their souls and because they
did not fully subscribe to the latest vagaries of
credulity. Protestants against this church, when
they gained the power of a majority under Calvin
in Switzerland, and Knox in Scotland, strung up
by the thumbs and slit the tongues of those who
did not attend church, or indulged in what to them
seemed innocent amusement. The Puritans in
Massachusetts placed in prison or the stocks and
led to the whipping-post those who did not wear
black or refused to obey their strict regimen. All
this also for the good of those punished and the
glory of God. During the revolt of the peasants
in Luther's time nothing was sacred or free from
the wrath and destruction of the majority in a
given locality who considered that they should be-
come the masters. Despite the reforms that were
steadily being made between 1789 and 1793, in
the latter year a great majority of the people of
France, taking the law in their own hands, guillo-
tined or otherwise murdered no less than 1,200,-
000 men, women and children who did not believe
as they did, or were suspected of having had some-
thing to do with aristocracy. Cromwell over-
threw in the name of better government one
tyranny in order to establish another.

The government of the United States is an at-

i82 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

tempt to safeguard the people who dwell within its
borders from abuses of power in the hands of a ma-
jority. It stipulates that the rights and interests
of the minority shall be protected. So far those
rights have been for the most part preserved, but
at the present time they are assailed to a greater
extent than ever before, with imminent danger to
that orderly liberty which gives to every man the
right to use his life as he will and for his own
benefit, so long as it does not interfere with similar
rights of others. This is nowhere more evident
than in the ranks of those who are opposed to the
use of intoxicating liquor in any form except for
medical purposes, and who desire to use the ma-
jority of total abstainers to prevent any man from
taking a drink. These Prohibitionists regard al-
coholic liquor as a poison. They say the effect is
to undermine the health, cause inebriety and
habitual drunkenness, destroy the stability of the
home, produce weak and badly nourished children,
distort the notions of the brain and lead to im-
morality and crime. Assuming such liquors in
whatever form to be poison, they propose that
their use shall be as effectually stopped as opium
or cocaine. They declare that what they call the
liquor traffic has corrupted legislators throughout
the country and attempted to debauch the public
conscience. This they say they will abolish and
save the land from the wreck and ruin of what

MENACES TO LIBERTY 183

they term its nefarious business. Assuming that
intoxicating liquor is actually, as it is alleged by
them to be, a deadly poison, it certainly would be
as much to the advantage of the public as the pre-
vention of the sale of cocaine to have the use of it
stopped. But physicians in all lands and climes
and ages have widely differed as to the effects of
the fermented grape or grain. Some claim that
the mild use of stimulants aids digestion, and cer-
tainly many there are who contend that it adds to
the joy of life without particular harm. Again
assuming that all who take a glass of beer, ale,
stout, claret, sauterne, Rhine wine, port, sherry,
chianti, port. Burgundy, champagne or cordial be-
come addicted to drunkenness, it should be stopped
as a certain means of depriving the State of man-
hood and womanhood. But drunkenness has al-
most ceased. Rare cases are conspicuous. With
enlightened public opinion against its evils, the in-
creasing demand for efficiency which is the result
of industrial development, vaster population and
more respect for himself on the part of the indi-
vidual, intoxication is reprehended. The ma-
jority of those men and women who do drink in the
saloon or the home imbibe so mildly that the ef-
fect is not such as to startle the neighborhood by
their inebriety. Such use of beer or wine does not
ruin or perhaps even harm anybody. And it must
be said that some in the community are weaker

i84 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

than others, not morally, it may be, but in
strength, and they need more stimulation than
those who have greater vitality. This, as has al-
ready been pointed out, is true of whole nations.
It may be that the crossing of races in America has
made for stronger men and women and that this is
a further cause of the legion of persons here who
dislike the odor and taste of liquor. Ice cream
soda is actually the national drink. But the ma-
jority should not, because of their distaste for
liquor, absolutely prevent the use of it by per-
sons who like and perhaps actually need it.

The charge that the liquor dealers are selfish in
their interests may be answered by the statement
that theirs is a legitimate business. They do not
desire that their vocation be taken away from them
by those who hold the view that they alone are
leading good and clean lives and that they should
compel everybody to be as good and clean as they
are. Then, too, the raising of hops for the mak-
ing of beer is an industry. The saloon has had an
influence in local politics only because it has fre-
quently been the poor man's club, and men have
congregated there to discuss over their liquor
ever}^thing under the sun ; but with the increase of
other and more refined forms of entertainment this
use of the saloon is diminishing. Liquor men ap-
pear before legislators and so do their opponents.
If legislators are drinking men in a mild way, and

MENACES TO LIBERTY 185

in all his experience the writer seldom saw a legis-
lator drunk, it is but natural that they do not
desire to have the right to a drink taken away from
them, and hence do not desire to deprive others in
the community of the same right. The writer
has been a total abstainer for many years, but that
does not make him think he is especially good and
that he should join those who would compel every-
body else by law to do as he does. Liquor drink-
ing is a personal question. Reasons of health and
economics decree that it shall be indulged in less
and less. But for the majority of those who ab-
stain to compel the minority to do so by force is as
much a tyranny as it would be for a majority of
the voters at the ballot box to declare that there
should be no more marriages because some hus-
bands beat their wives. Drinking, like mismat-
ing, is often merely a part of youth. Mistakes are
made in it and lives are sometimes wrecked by it,
but the great majority continue on in temperance
and happiness. Men cannot be made angels by
law.

Of hardly less importance to the liberty of the
toiler and of each independent citizen of the Re-
public is the attitude of union labor toward non-
union labor by which it seeks to prevent any one
from working in an industrial establishment un-
less he agrees to conform to the prescribed man-
dates of the union. Self interest is justifiable,

i86 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and the right of laborers of any kind, whether
writers, lawyers, employers or mechanics, to organ-
ize cannot be denied; but the practice by which a
majority of union men in a plant seek to forcibly
prevent independence of speech and action should
be prevented by just law or custom in the name of
liberty. By organization wage earners secure ad-
vantages in condition, wages and time from their
employers, and their privileges in this regard
should not be abridged. Sanitary surroundings in
factories, the prevention of child labor, extra pay
for overtime and a living wage should be granted
by employers and sanctioned by law. But the
United States is founded upon the principle of
liberty for every man within the law as a just
right to which he is entitled. It is an infringe-
ment of that liberty when a laboring man, who for
reasons of his own does not desire to join a union,
is knocked down on the street and brutally beaten
by members of the majority of employees who are
union men, when able by experience and capacity
to secure service and wages otherwise, simply
because he refuses to accept membership with
them. It is not less an attempt at tyranny and
to set up a state within a state when trade union-
ists use other than peaceable measures to attain
their demands from their employers, and also seek
in this way to prevent non-union men from taking
their places, as angry as they may be and as just as

MENACES TO LIBERTY 187

their grievances often are. They should find
means in the give and take of industrial con-
tention or within the law to seek that redress for
their grievances which the electorate would no
doubt be glad to grant if well founded. Should
men and women not receive the wages they are
entitled to, they should be given them, but that is
a matter which can be determined by reason alone,
and the justice of it cannot be proven by maiming
men, burning the plants of their employers or
using dynamite to accomplish their ends. Nor
can labor unionists appeal to the general public as
fair when they use the method of regulating the
speed of the laborer in a given work to the ca-
pacity of the slowest man, and hope to pad the
profits of their labor by compelling those who em-
ploy them to take more men in a given job than
are needed. When they adopt this method they
prove that they comprise a selfish interest in the
community which is seeking to prevent honest
competition and efficiency and to interfere with
the laws of supply and demand in order that it
may receive greater benefits than it would other-
wise receive. If a citizen does not desire to pur-
chase a product because it fails to bear a union
label, that is his affair; and if a number of such
citizens seek to prevent others who have no direct
interest in the controversy from buying that prod-
uct, it is an infringement of the liberty of every

i88 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

person to buy and sell in the market as he pleases.
Union men have the right to make their scale what
they please and to withdraw from work whenever
they please if their demands are not granted, and
the employer has the same right to employ other
men in their places if he chooses, for one has the
free right to sell his labor and the other the free
right to buy labor; but in a controversy of a peace-
ful kind the employer and employee should be
compelled by law to submit the honest differences
of both to a board of arbitrators so that approxi-
mate justice may be done. Many employers de-
sire that their employees organize so that it may
be easier to deal with them through collective bar-
gaining, but that should not deprive the minority
of non-union laborers in the plant of the right of
peaceful labor. Nor should unionists with red
badges be allowed the privileges of standing out-
side of a retail shop, as in San Francisco, and
warning passers-by from entering the place because
non-union men are employed therein. Unions en-
able men to act together for their common good,
but when they act together forcibly to deprive any
individual of independent work they become a
menace to the liberties guaranteed by the Consti-
tution and are opposed to the spirit of free insti-
tutions and to the highest economic efficiency.

Passing from the aims of the trade unionists,
which are mild and for the most part of consider-

MENACES TO LIBERTY 189

able benefit, the Syndicalists, Independent Work-
men of the World and Socialists advance much
further and seek not only to establish a tyranny of
the majority, but of mediocrity as well. They at-
tempt to set up classes in America, something
which has never existed since the government was
established and cannot exist where every man may
become a millionaire or a ruler and where every
millionaire or ruler is a laboring man. The pri-
mary assumption upon which the pleas of these
three organizations of extremists are based is that
labor creates value. If labor alone creates value,
then labor is entitled to its full return in the en-
tire profits of production. Proceeding upon this
assumption the Syndicalist declares that he will by
stealth or whatever underhanded means may seem
to him to be necessary, wreck the plant of his em-
ployer in order that out of it he may gain more
and more of the value of the product of his labor;
the I. W. W. that he will precipitate industrial
revolution by violent means in order that he may
gain the same ends; the Socialist that the means
of social production and distribution shall be
owned and operated in common. From this the
latter argues that there will no longer be what he
is pleased to term "exploitation" by "capitalism,"
that all will be treated alike; and that at last in-
dustrial and political justice will prevail. But
the assumption as to value is not justified by fact.

190 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Labor does not create value. If it did, the same
amount of labor of the same kind would produce
the same result. A man may work eight or ten
hours during a day in a gold mine, a saw-mill or
cheese factory, and his labor will be the same, but
his product entirely different. That which gives
the value to the gold, the planed lumber and the
cheese is its worth, regulated by supply and de-
mand, in the markets of the world. A man may
scoop placer gold out of a stream and give very
little labor to the task, but the gold is not less
valuable for that. Neither are diamonds, one of
which may be mined with comparative ease and
yield more value than many years spent by the
same person in milking cows. What a man sells
to his employer is not that which will make the
product valuable, but something which itself has
value — a day's labor. Every man is worth two
dollars a day from his neck down ; above that is a
matter of brains. It may be said that without the
labor to extract it gold could not be mined and
that without labor hsh could not be caught, but it
may be urged as well that the labor by itself is
worth two dollars per day while the gold by itself
is worth its value in the markets of commerce,
whether extracted by pick and shovel or ma-
chinery, and that the fish are valuable, not because
of the labor expended in catching them, but be-
cause people desire to eat them. A man without

MENACES TO LIBERTY 191

any financial means, believing he can find a gold
mine, borrows money, sets out for Mexico, spends
several years in hardships, adheres by strong char-
acter to his purpose, meets another who has a
claim, makes a contract with him to share the
profits, returns to his starting place, with his or-
ganizing ability and personality gets others to risk
their savings, thus gains sufficient capital to unlock
the secrets of the earth, forms a corporation, selects
those experts to run it who also have their price in
the labor market, sees that legal rights are pro-
tected, goes to the mine, gives his ability to the
new enterprise and employs laborers who have not
the initiative or ability to make more than a dollar
or two a day, uncovers a bonanza, and as his share
makes a million, while those who have invested
with him make tremendous profits. The laborers,
who took the employment because it was nearest
at hand and gave them three meals and a bed, now
come forward and state that it was their labor that
produced the gold and that they are entitled to the
full value of that labor; they desire that the result
in wealth shall be divided equally among them.
Is it just*? It is not, and the reason why the plea
is repugnant to the spirit of the United States is
that it would rob him who has initiative, thrift,
honesty, industry and frugality of the rewards of
his enterprise and skill and give them to those who
supply only their labor to the equation. It is also

192 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

a part of the plea of the three organizations named
that there is such a thing as "capitalism" which,
employing labor, exploits it for its own selfish
ends. But capital is nothing more or less than
accrued earnings. Any man who saves the re-
wards of his toil of no matter what kind, instead
of spending them for that which would delight him
for the time being, and has them for investment
in new or extended enterprise, is a capitalist.
When he and others combine their earnings or
capital to make a sufficient sum to develop a given
industry they employ labor at its value in the
local market and do not "exploit" it by giving it
the means of earning its daily bread. If that
labor is more skilled and therefore more scarce,
they are compelled to pay more for it. The more
skilled and valuable the laborer becomes, the
greater is his emolument, until, as in the case of
the head of the Steel Corporation, he receives
$1,000,000 a year. The latter is no less a la-
borer than the man who makes two dollars per
diem. The combined earnings of the past, run-
ning up into the millions or a few hundred dollars,
and invested in stock companies, receive a certain
dividend or return, give employment to great num-
bers of men, and help to produce products which
receive their value because of the demand for
them in the market, due to their worth and their
supply. The idea that all the laborers should

MENACES TO LIBERTY 193

share nearly equally in the returns, and that ac-
crued earnings, when used to give employment to
them is really used to exploit them, is an absurd-
ity; for any one of the commonest laborers may by
the same ambition, initiative, skill, frugality and
foresight invent something new to satisfy the
wants of mankind or invest his savings or capital
in that which will make practical the invention
of another person. To place industry in the
hands of the greater number, which means those
having the least skill, would mean not only a
tyranny of the majority but of the mediocre and
incompetent as well. The unenterprising are usu-
ally jealous of the skilful, and the enterprising
are always anxious to excel. The majority of
the unenterprising would appropriate the rewards
of the skilful to themselves, and the enterprising,
robbed of the large rewards of individual achieve-
ment, would lose the motive for initiative. With
that gone the whole world would remain stag-
nant, for while industries already started could
be taken over and owned and operated by all in
common, new enterprises would be stifled, for it
is only by initiative and ambition for large re-
ward on the part of the individual that they
do start. Nothing in the world has ever been
achieved in common. Every step forward in
history has been accomplished by the individual.
The mind of the human being working upon any

194 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

problem has solved it. Leadership is but an ex-
pression of personality. In battle it is the mind
of the general that controls and he wins with
the help of his soldiers. They cannot share their
glory in common; the foot soldier may distinguish
himself and become a general; to say that all
shall direct and receive a similar reward is pre-
posterous. In the eighth century in Tibet King
Muni Tsan-po, being determined to raise (or raze)
all his subjects to the same level, enacted that
there should be no distinction between the rich
and poor, humble and great. He compelled the
wealthy to share their riches with the indigent
and helpless and to make them their equals in
respect of all the comforts and conditions of life.
He repeated this experiment three times ; but each
time he found that they all returned to their former
condition, with the exception that the rich be-
came still richer and the poor still poorer.

When Karl Marx attempts to prove that the
guiding force of history is economic determinism
he but takes another way of saying that economic
conditions are the underlying bases of social, in-
dustrial and military action. But it is the mind
that rules the man, and, with strength of blood
to back it, the men of initiative, ability and per-
sonality have overcome, or led others to over-
come, old economic conditions and made new ones.

MENACES TO LIBERTY 195

Industry or anything else in the hands of the con-
tented many is repugnant to the spirit of a land
which of all others has progressed most by means
of the intrepid spirits who have had initiative, in-
dependence and ability.

Attempts have been made to prove to the peo-
ple at a time after the greatest industrial ad-
vance in the history of the world that some of the
men who have become very wealthy in that ad-
vance have made their gains by methods that
have sought to stifle competition. These attempts
have brought about a more critical opinion and
amendments to the laws to prevent monopoly and
injustice; but they have also, along with the tend-
ency to diminish the rights of the individual in
other ways, sought to secure more and more strict
governmental methods to pry into the citizen's
private business. At public hearings conducted
with acrimony by legislative inquisitors, or
manipulated so as to place at a disadvantage those
who have in order to curry favor with those who
have not, has been seen a tendency to go too far in
the direction of state supervision of all business
and actually menace that liberty of work and
achievement which have been held so dear in
America and have helped to make the nation so
great. Constantly recurring investigations of
matters which have largely been discussed and

196 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

remedied worries and harasses industry and mili-
tates against the free exercise of business initiative
and independence.

The same tendency toward deprivation by the
majority of rights of the minority is seen in the
hesitancy in extending the ballot to women, so
that they may take part in truly representative
government. In some States they already have
the right of suffrage, and so far have used it with
more enthusiasm and devotion to civic duty than
in the case of the men; but in the more conserva-
tive sections of the country, and where the popula-
tion is densely settled, the vote has so far been
withheld. There is no just reason why they
should not have it universally, subject only to the
same restrictions as imposed upon men. Women
have intelligence, therefore they think and form
judgments. Men have only to remind themselves
of their own mothers and wives to bear testimony
to that fact. And the contention that woman
when granted the privilege of exercising judg-
ment and voting would be less wives and mothers
is as much as to say that when men take two min-
utes to mark a ballot once a year they are on
that account less husbands and fathers the re-
mainder of the time. It is as ludicrous to con-
tend that the female sex is less conservative than
the male and that the stability of our institutions
would be unsafe in their hands. Indeed, the con-

MENACES TO LIBERTY 197

servative guardian of many a man's purse is his
helpmeet, who attends to the practical details of
life while he is away at the routine of his labor.
She has as much time for thought upon local and
national problems, is even more interested in and
sympathetic toward the well being of the chil-
dren, and has a way of looking at things, which,
added to that of man, is as essential to the sta-
bility of the State as to that of the home. And
with so many women now engaged in the avoca-
tions of active life and with income or property
to defend, they should have a voice in the gov-
ernment no less than that of the men. To deny
mature intelligence of either sex the right of free
expression at the ballot is subversive of liberty.

Through an attempt to establish a tyranny of
the majority in the Southern States, the negro
has been deprived of the rights vouchsafed to
him in the fourteenth, fifteenth and sixteenth
amendments to the Constitution of the United
States. The result of that policy has been
demonstrated in the burning of negroes at the
stake when only suspected of rape, and the
hatreds and injustices engendered have been
shown in such a case as that of Leo Frank, the
Jew, who was strung up, cut down and his dead
face stamped upon by a prejudice crazed mob.
In the South the negro has no rights any one is
bound to respect. In most places he is now com-

198 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES 1

pelled to walk in the street when a white person
passes by on the sidewalk. When a member of
the staff of the New Orleans Picayune years ago,
the writer used to listen to serious arguments be-
tween his colleagues on the question of whether the
negro was actually a human being or just an ani-
mal. It is true that after the shackles of slavery
were removed, the negroes, incited b}^ Northern
carpetbaggers, perpetrated outrages of government
in the Southern States, which are still felt in the
debts incurred. But in the forty years that have
intervened the blacks have been educated and
should be given equal rights under the law by the
ballot, though perhaps their common sense would
influence them to refrain for a time from holding
office. The English have in the West Indies given
the world a lesson in just treatment of the negro,
which this land would do well to emulate. The
subversion of the constitutional right of liberty
of governmental expression in the case of the
blacks is harmful to the whites themselves in mak-
ing them tyrannical and unjust, and causes this
government of free men to appear hypocritical in
guaranteeing rights without reference to race, color
or previous condition of servitude, after four years
of war to make possible those guarantees, and
then denying them for the sole reason of race,
color and previous condition of servitude. Lib-
erty is for the human race as a whole and should

MENACES TO LIBERTY 199

be as wide as the earth. It cannot be denied with-
out reacting upon those who deny it. Such lib-
erty does not include social equality or miscegena-
tion, for that is an individual matter, but the right
of equal protection under the laws and of free
expression at the ballot.

No free government can long endure which does
not vouchsafe to each citizen those inalienable
rights which it has in its fundamental law prom-
ised to him, which does not protect him in the
enjoyment of the fruits of his toil and genius,
permit him the free exercise of thought and action,
so long as they do not interfere with the safety
or liberty of any other man, ensure him or her
equal participation in the choice of those who are
to represent him or her political affairs, provide
impartial justice and order under the laws, and
prevent classes from arising within the State to
menace the liberties of any man.

CHAPTER VII

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED

"Government is a contrivance of human wisdom to
provide for human wants. Men have a right that these
wants should be provided for by this wisdom." — Edmund
Burke.

Such evils as exist within the United States, and
no country is without them, are not due to lack of
means of expression by the people through govern-
mental machinery, for they, as has been said, are
ample to meet every need, but to the lack of con-
centration of attention upon the conditions that
have caused them. B)^ continued investigation of
those conditions certain means of making the laws
simpler, and the life of each citizen easier, without
taking away initiative or independence, will ap-
pear.

It must become apparent at once to the most
casual observer that forty-eight separate state sys-
tems of law and administration within one na-
tion are incongruous, make a hodge-podge of de-
tailed statutes to obey, provide a heaven for law-
yers, and cause enormous and unnecessary expense

200

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 201

to the taxpayers. So flagrant is this weakness
that corporations and persons doing an interstate
business must be constantly mindful of conflicting
regulations. And with different States constantly
making new laws, commercial men find it increas-
ingly difficult to keep up with the changes that are
made.

Penalties are entirely different in many of the
commonwealths. Laws governing the principal
activities of men, women and children in all the
relations of life are so diverse as to be ludicrous.
Divorce is difficult in several States and decidedly
easy in others. Regulations in regard to legiti-
macy of birth, the age of consent, marriage, parent
and child, estates, property, contract, insurance and
stock companies are as diverse as the number of the
separate political entities of the Union themselves.
Many of the States maintain their own bureaus for
the investigation of corporations and insurance
and some for scrutinizing the conduct of all busi-
ness, as in California. Necessarily the enforce-
ment of these laws requires heavy burdens upon
property and individuals who are subject to tax.

In the early history of the government of the
United States the important cities and common-
wealths were widely separated by the difficulty of
transportation from one to the other. Two days
were required to travel from New York to Albany
and a week from Baltimore to Boston. The

202 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

packet post was slow in moving and a month was
needed to get news in New England of important
happenings in Kentucky. The Confederation had
proven a dismal failure, after a six years' trial of
the articles binding it together, because it pro-
vided no means of overcoming the jealousies of the
States toward the Federal government and each
other. The Constitution then enacted nicely ad-
justed the powers of the national and state gov-
ernments in enumerated particulars, but left open
the question of whether a separate commonwealth
might secede from the Union. That issue was de-
cided at Appomattox after four years of conflict.
It was then determined that the powers of the Fed-
eral government should be paramount. But in
the basic instrument of the government of the
United States the way had already been left open
for the extension of the Federal jurisdiction over
all in matters pertaining to all. National au-
thority was enumerated in particulars which would
make a nation, as in laying and collecting taxes,
borrowing money on its own credit, establishing
rules of naturalization and bankruptcy, coining
money, establishing post offices and post roads,
protecting authors and inventors, raising and sup-
porting an army and a navy, punishing piracies
and felonies on the high seas, declaring war and
constituting federal tribunals of justice. More
general power in the hands of the nation was im-

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 203

plied in the stipulation that the Congress should
regulate commerce with foreign nations and
among the several States, provide for the com-
mon defense and general welfare of the United
States and "make all laws which shall be neces-
sary and proper for carrying into execution the
foregoing powers and all other powers vested by
the Constitution in the government of the United
States or in any department or officer thereof." As
all the powers other than those enumerated were
vested in the nation, and as the enumerated denial
of powers to the States was solely such as to pre-
vent interference with that national authority,
and as no reserved powers were placed in the
hands of the States, it must be conceded that it was
the purpose of the original framers of the docu-
ment that the Federal government should have
the right to enact general laws, not merely for the
protection of its national existence, but in all mat-
ters where they would be generally applicable to
people as a whole. Further evidence that the de-
nial of powers to the States was not intended
merely as a means of protecting the integrity of
the Federal government, but also as a means of
preventing the States from exercising any general
powers whatever, is to be found in the provision
that no State should pass any law impairing the
obligation of contract. That the Federal govern-
ment, so far as the original and unamended docu-

204 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

ment is concerned, was exceedingly jealous of its
powers is demonstrated by the stipulation in the
Constitution that no State should without the con-
sent of Congress lay any imposts or duties on im-
ports or exports, except such as might be necessary
for executing its inspection laws, that the net
produce of all duties and imposts so laid should be
for the use of the treasury of the United States,
and that, even then, such laws should be subject
to the revision and control of Congress.

This was the Constitution adopted by the
fathers of the Republic September 17, 1787.
Writing in the ''New York Packet," January 25,
1788, to offset bickerings between the States that
had so recently been colonies, Madison says: "If,
in a word, the Union be essential to the happiness
of the people of America, is it not preposterous to
urge as an objection to a government, without
which the objects of the Union cannot be obtained,
that such a government may derogate from the im-
portance of the governments of the individual
States'? Was, then, the American Revolution
effected, was the American Confederacy formed,
was the precious blood of thousands spilt, and the
hard earned substance of millions lavished, not
that the people of America should enjoy peace,
liberty and safety, but that the government of
the individual States, that particular municipal
establishments, might enjoy a certain extent of

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 205

power, and be arrayed with certain dignities and
attributes of sovereignty'? We have heard of the
impious doctrine in the Old World that the people
were made for kings, not kings for the people. Is
the same doctrine to be revived in the New, in an-
other shape — that the solid happiness of the peo-
ple is to be sacrificed to the views of political in-
stitutions of a different form"? It is too early for
politicians to presume on our forgetting that the
public good, the real welfare of the great body of
the people, is the supreme object to be pursued;
and that no form of government whatever has any
other value than as it may be fitted for the attain-
ment of this object. Were the plan of the con-
vention adverse to the public, my voice would be,
Reject the plan. Were the Union itself incon-
sistent with the public happiness, it would be,
Abolish the Union. In like manner, as far as the
sovereignty of the States cannot be reconciled to
the happiness of the people, the voice of every
good citizen must be. Let the former be sacrificed
to the latter."

In spite of this reasoning, the jealous States,
stipulated in the Tenth Amendment to the Consti-
tution, adopted by Congress September 25, 1789,
that "the powers not delegated to the United
States by the Constitution, nor prohibited to it by
the States, are reserved to the States respectively,
or to the people." The balance of power was

2o6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

thereby changed from the federal to the state
governments, and it was not until the decisions of
Justice Marshall, the Civil War and the exigencies
of modern commerce and industry that the na-
tion gradually waived aside much of the preponder-
ant authority of the commonwealths constituting
the Union. Had the States themselves, acting in
concert, formed a federation, right would have
been with them; but the people themselves were
the authority, they alone formed the new and
greater government. "We the People of the
United States, in Order to form a more perfect
Union, establish Justice, insure domestic Tranquil-
lity, provide for the common defense, promote the
General Welfare, and Secure the Blessings of Lib-
erty to ourselves and our Posterity, do ordain and
establish this Constitution for the United States
of America." These same people, then, have the
right, if they will, to so construe the Tenth Amend-
ment as to take advantage of the alternative, "or
to the people." How shall "the people" express
themselves if not through their institutions?
And are not their federal representatives in the
Senate and House, elected by their direct vote, a
part of those institutions? Indeed, are not "the
people," as stated in the preamble and the Tenth
Amendment, not meant to mean the people of the
entire nation thus constituted, and not of a single
State or federation of States? Through their

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 207

representatives they may make general laws ap-
plicable to them all and for their benefit as a
whole. They may do so under a proper construc-
tion of the Tenth Amendment. Certainly they
may do so by its repeal.

Assuming, then, that the Federal government
has the absolute power to legislate for the entire
people upon subjects which concern them all alike,
and beyond such powers merely as help it to main-
tain itself, what rights should it take unto itself
which it has not yet exercised, and what powers
should it thereby subtract from the States, which
they now exercise? It should take all authority
from the separate commonwealths except the
police power, provision for education, carrying out
in detail the rights of suffrage, and such stated
powers as are conferred in the Constitution. The
national government has the right and should
arrogate to itself the function of making the com-
mon and statute law throughout the United
States perfectly uniform. It may be contended
that the Supreme Court has construed the ,Con-
stitution differently and to mean that the Fed-
eral authority in general matters outside of those
specifically enumerated shall apply only to inter-
state relations, but if the court did so it went
beyond the wording of the basic instrument it-
self. Ecclesiastical courts and councils for cen-
turies construed and misconstrued the Gospels, but

2o8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

to-day such authority as those Gospels exert over
the minds of men rests within their terminology
alone. Congress should enact a uniform divorce
law along lines similar to that of the Code Na-
poleon, which gave as causes adultery, extreme
cruelty, perpetration of a felony, malicious and
wilful desertion and mutual consent. Recog-
nizing marriage to be a contract, the code sought
to make its abrogation subject to the same mutu-
ality with which it had been entered into. It was
thought that the wife would not consent to sever
legal claim to her husband or vice versa until they
had agreed upon substantial justice between them
and for their children, if any. As there are said
to have been few cases where one of the prin-
cipals did not object, the provision proved a con-
servator of marriage instead of a loosener of its
ties; yet it rendered justice where both agreed to
disagree. Morality is not enhanced by laws pre-
venting a man and woman from remedying a mis-
take. The national government should also pre-
vent child labor in the remotest locality, under
heavy penalties, and should compel every youth
and maiden, white or black, to complete a free
grammar school education, leaving to the States,
counties or townships only the details of providing
school and maintaining them. It should enact
a uniform corporation law, and another covering
every subject of commerce. In fact, every act

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 209

which comes within legal phases and is outside of
the police power of the States should be legislated
upon by Congress. This implies a new code of
law, simple, readable by all, applicable in every
State and territory. This does not mean the call-
ing of a constitutional convention, for no change
in the fundamental instrument of the nation is
necessary. In fact, that document has called in
vain for such a sacrifice of ancient practise on the
part of the States for more than a century. The
result has never been attained heretofore because
of the distractions and jealousies of localities.
But now that the American people are being solidi-
fied into one and the distinctions of races are pass-
ing away, except as they may show the prejudices
of their fathers in the present war, and now that
San Francisco and New York are one by telephone
and telegraph and all parts of the country are
easily accessible to each other, they demand a body
of easily understood and universally applicable
law, just alike to rich and poor, conserving the
independence and interests of property and of
labor, of white and black, alien, naturalized and
native, with proper ease and celebrity of judicial
procedure. The time for a great law giver is at
hand, and that law giver the Congress of the
sovereign people of the United States. This
country does not need a single law giver, or vague
generalities put into print and called law, but a

210 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

body of law which will give specific justice to
every man, woman and child.

With this extension of authority, or under pres-
ent conditions, the national government should
take over and operate the telegraph lines on the
same principle that the post office department is
now operated. This was proposed a few years
ago by the ablest postmaster general the country
ever had, Frank H. Hitchcock ; but, due to the con-
servatism of the Taft administration, he was com-
pelled to withdraw the recommendation. Far
from a socialist, and thoroughly a business man,
the head of what is the greatest post office depart-
ment in the world urged the change in order that
the people might have the use of that utility at a
minimum of expense and even more generally. If
ownership of the telegraph system by the govern-
ment be a part of socialism, then the post office,
founded long before socialism was ever thought or
heard of, is socialistic, and the states of England,
France and Italy, where the telegraph is part of
government machinery, are socialistic. A good
is not less a good because also urged by those with
whom we do not often agree. Socialism is the
joint ownership and operation of all the means
of production and distribution, something entirely
different. The eight hour day is a part of the
propaganda of the socialist party in Germany, but
it is not essentially socialistic, as it has long been

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 211

urged by trade unionists in the United States and
Great Britain. The same argument applies to the
telephone system. Likewise the municipal owner-
ship of gas and electric lighting utilities should be
brought about in order that the poor may have the
advantage of those conveniences at less expense.
In taking over public utilities for ownership
the principle should be laid down that they
should only include those which can reach every
home in the land. Neither street railway lines
nor railroads come within this definition, techni-
cally speaking, though the time may come when
they, too, will be taken over and become a part
of the wealth of the city and nation. The coal
mines, the water power, and oil fields, sources of
artificial light and heat, and the manufacturing in-
dustries, should also ultimately be taken over by
the people. These principles are in no sense
socialistic, for their adoption would still mean the
sale to the government of his daily toil by the
toiler at the prevailing rate of wages; whereas
socialism would mean the joint ownership of the
railroads by all the employees of that industry,
by the coal miners and any other employees and
officers in common of the coal, and of the em-
ployees of the oil industry of the oil. Under the
right of eminent domain the government has power
to seize them all and eventually may do so, but
the time is far removed, for the people are yet un-

212 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

able to distinguish between socialism, which would
mean stagnation and the tyranny of the mediocre,
and ownership by the government for the people
as a whole of these utilities which are directly or
indirectly accessible to every home. It may now
be contended that the ownership by the govern-
ment— entirely different than common ownership
by those engaged in a given industry — of these
utilities, would mean the gradual taking over by
the government of all the great sources of produc-
tion and means of distribution, and that when
this had been accomplished there would be no
longer any labor as such engaged in any industry
outside of the government, that the rate of wage,
high or low, would then be regulated by Congress,
as in the case of civil and military employees at
the present time, that rates of wages would be-
come higher with the increasing efficiency brought
about by industrial education, that all crimes ex-
cept those of passion would disappear with the
abolition of poverty, that men and women would
participate alike in toil as now in the government,
that temperance and chastity would become well
nigh universal because of general self respect and
recognition of normal nature, and that socialism
would be the net result only by another means.
Such a conclusion is not justified. Even govern-
ment ownership of those agencies of production
and distribution which do not fall within the

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 213

classification of public utilities would not be toler-
ated by a free people intent upon the maintenance
of their individuality and independence. And as
the ownership of the great public utilities would
be no more a detriment to the well-being of the
individual than is the post office at the present
time, socialism, the joint ownership by the many,
would in no sense be the result.

While the public ownership of the greater pub-
lic utilities outside the telegraph may appear im-
practicable and afar off, there is another remedy
for the wage earner everywhere which could be
applied without detriment to the employer or em-
ployee. It lies in the enforced grant by the em-
ployer, no matter how small or great, of one-tenth
of his net profits, to be divided equally among the
total number of his employees. Thus the grocer,
butcher, barber or haberdasher would be compelled
at the close of the year, or such part of it as he
may have employed help, to yield ten per cent, of
the returns to whoever may have regularly worked
for him. So it would be with the farmer and the
proprietor of no matter what business. And every
railroad or other corporation would do the same.
The division of the ten per cent, would include
every employee from the president of the road
down, but in private business the owner would not
be included. The 7,405,313 persons in the
United States in manufacturing, which yields a

214 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

net profit of $8,529,261,000, would receive $115
per annum apiece. The average income from a
farm is $796, but at that figure few farmers em-
ploy labor. A farm which 5delds $3,000 per an-
num would employ one or two laborers. De-
ducting the expense of food not raised on the
premises, live stock purchased and overhead
charges on buildings, ten per cent, of the remainder
would be given to the employee, who now receives
an average wage per year of $223. If the farmer
employs hands only in the harvest time, then he
should only give for that part of the year;
but if the remedy of ten per cent, of the profits
were applied to the "hired man" who toils the year
round for board and a small wage, his life would
become that much more livable. The 1,815,239
employees of the railroads, from the president
down, would receive ten per cent, of the $369,-
077,546, or $203 each. This would include all
of those engaged in any kind of work on a news-
paper, but not employees in the professions of doc-
tors, lawyers and the ministry. Nor would
house-servants be included, though waiters and all
employees of restaurants and hotels would. But
greater satisfaction in the work each man would
do, because of more interest in the establishment,
would result, and the drift toward those industries
which paid more would result in higher wages in
those that did not pay the ten per cent. Averages

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 215

arc often unconvincing, when extended over the
entire country, but if the percentage be figured
in any corporation, firm or individual business, it
will be seen that the suggestion, if carried out,
would result in benefit to each of those employed,
when added to his wages.

Why not twenty, thirty or forty per cent.?
Why not all of the profits of the establishment *?
Here arises the most important argument against
socialism. The hundreds of thousands of in-
vestors of their savings or capital in industry,
whether corporation, association or partnership,
naturally desire that they shall receive a fair re-
turn from the fruits of their previous toil ex-
pressed in that capital. On the average, the re-
wards of manufacturing, transportation and min-
ing for this invested surplus of previous toil is
about five per cent. One-half of one per cent,
of this could easily be subtracted for the benefit
of the wage workers. The income of every man
investing in stocks and bonds of corporations em-
ploying labor, or employing labor himself, would
be diminished ten per cent. But the increased
purchasing power of those receiving the slightly
larger emolument, together with their stimulated
interest in their work, would make up the differ-
ence. Take away more than that from the re-
wards of the accrued earnings or capital of those
investing in industry and the temptation to invest

2i6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

in and thereby enhance industry and labor would
cease. Nothing is so timid as capital, the mean-
ing of which, properly speaking, is accrued earn-
ings for investment. For the employees to take
over the plant jointly and elect officers at higher
salary to manage it for their common benefit
would remove the tremendous incentive of a man
to surpass his fellows and gain that greater wealth
which is expressive of much comfort, means of
extended activity, heightened respect and per-
haps world-wide fame. The Socialist declares he
will harness this incentive by making it work for
all. But he cannot harness incentive; he can
only destroy it. It is that which has made in-
dustry and all activity advance. But granting
for the sake of the argument that it would be wise
to reorganize the plant on this basis, for what is
called common profit, would the manager selected
be of the kind to understand business and have
the talent to develop it to such an extent as to
overcome its competitors by superior product,
lower price and good sales methods? Organizing
and financial genius is not to be selected by a
given number, but to assert itself by hard work
and brain power in the struggle of life. And
again assuming, for the benefit of those who dis-
agree, that this could be done, what would be-
come of new enterprises*? Men do not do the

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 217

really great work in the world for salary; they do
it for themselves. ''But we shall take away all
selfishness,'' says the Socialist. Even granting
that, can the Socialist take away the ambition of
an intrepid spirit to conceive in his fertile brain
something new, overcome rivals, found vast indus-
tries for the employment of human labor and then
give all the immense wealth he has thus gained to
a project he thinks best for the common good?
The Socialist has placed his thumb upon the evil of
self-seeking, he thinks, but it has sprung up again
in that indefinable something which makes a man
what he is and in that holiest of selfishnesses — the
inordinate desire to surpass his fellows and attain
mighty deeds for the benefit of all. The division
of ten per cent, among employees would tend to
lighten and equalize the burdens of labor and
would be a wise reform ; but, even so, it could not
take away the burden of struggle, for that is what
gives strength to human nature and character.
They who believe that the millennium means an
absolutely equal share in toil and reward are mis-
taken; in the short space between the birth and
death of a single life men will remain as differen-
tiated as the billion and a half who inhabit the
earth; each will struggle on to the attainment of
what he feels within him to be his true aim; a
general panacea to make all happy would not fit

2i8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

when the time came to perfect it, if it did not take
into consideration individual desires, initiative and
abilities.

In order that all working men and women,
whether wage earners, employers or in the profes-
sions, may enjoy the full benefits of the new life
dawning about them there should be a working
day of eight hours and maybe ultimately of seven
hours for all, and a right on the part of every one
to enjoy the Sabbath. In many offices in the
large cities the lesser hours are already observed,
employees reporting for work at 9 a. m. and quit-
ting at 5 p. M., with an hour for lunch between.
This is just as practical as eight hours. With
industry developed to higher efficiency than is pos-
sible where some unions attempt to regulate the
speed to the slowest and, as in a department store,
where the wages are so low as to make effort irk-
some, as much would be accomplished in the
shorter time. If this seems premature, the fact
should be borne in mind that we are in the Twen-
tieth Century and that the time is here when men
must have a larger reward and more enjoyment
of their toil. The custom of working frail women
twelve hours in a hospital because they are nurses
and it is an eleemosynary institution is not less
hard on them than on these who are employed in
factories. Nor is the employment of women ten
hours on their feet each day as saleswomen, or lit-

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 219

tie children on farms and in sweat-shops, less en-
slaving if done in the name of maximum of out-
put. And each person under the sun should have
the benefits of a Sunday free from care. If it
be necessary for a business to be conducted on the
Sabbath, then every employee should have an-
other day out of the seven instead. In the Scrip-
tures God impresses it upon man that he shall
have that time for rest; and the inference is that
it does not make any difference whether Saturday,
Sunday or Thursday shall be called the Sabbath,
so that on one day out of the seven he shall be al-
lowed to leave whatever task he may be doing and
find amusement or cultivation or repose. Of
course, it is best for convenience that all enjoy the
Sabbath on the day generally adopted throughout
Christendom. The seven hour day may be some
distance away, due to the slow adjustment of the
mechanism of industry to a new spirit prevailing
among men, but Sunday practically is and should
be b}^ law within the reach of all.

In the incidence of taxation ten per cent, of
rents collected upon property upon which the
owner does not live should be taken by the State,
in order to provide more ample revenue and lessen
the direct tax upon the poor man otherwise. This
principle applies in a different way than with the
employer of labor, compelling the landlord, who
has used accrued earnings to build homes or office

220 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

buildings or other abodes or farms, to share his
profit to that extent in order that the burdens of
all may be lighter. Those holding large bodies
of tilled or improved real estate, whether indi-
viduals or corporations, would yield large sums.
If the owner actually and not technically lived
upon the premises he would be exempt; if he had
an office in the building, he would not. Only such
property as yielded financial return to the investor
would be thus taxed. To require the owner of
such property to pay ten per cent, of his rent to his
employees, if any, would be an absurdity, because
they take no part in the gathering of return upon
his surplus invested in real estate; but to demand
that he pay ten percentage of his property, which
neither he nor his immediate family use, to the
State is just and fair, would not deter any capital
from investing therein and would assist materially
in maintaining the expenses of government.
Buildings are put up in order to yield a return on
the investment of from five to ten per cent. From
one-half of one per cent, to one per cent, of such
income taxed by the commonwealth leaves a fair
interest to the owner. Such annual rental in the
entire United States is estimated by competent
realty judges to amount to more than a billion
dollars annuall)\ The result would be a satis-
factory adjustment of the contention that absentee
property as such ought to carry more of taxation ;

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 221

and if all excises were ultimately decreased by
eliminating overlapping state authority, this
should still remain to compel the owner who does
not live upon the property for which he receives
rent to share as much as practicable with the poor,
without losing incentive for investment. He who
owns an apartment building and lives in one of
the apartments would be exempt only to the extent
of his single apartment. Manufacturing and
general business plants owning their own im-
proved property would be entirely exempt. The
tax of ten per cent., both in the case of the prop-
erty owner and the employer, is a revival in essence
of the old Jewish custom of giving to the Temple
ten per cent, of the first fruits of production. It is
not an attempt to placate the Socialist by conced-
ing a part of his position, but to stimulate all in-
dustry in which others besides the original pro-
prietor are engaged, and make easier the burden of
taxation upon the small house-holder and business
man. Taxes upon personal property might be
largely decreased by this method.

With total bank deposits in the United States
in 1915 of $21,407,068,603, and much of it with-
out any interest whatever, and receiving compensa-
tion only in the safety of funds provided by the
vaults of the banks and the convenience of ex-
changing cheques through the clearing house, the
banks should be compelled to yield some return

222 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

to the depositors, wherever they do not do so now,
in return for the profits they are allowed to make
by interest on investments. If every bank were
compelled to pay 2 or 3 per cent, on all funds left
for any length of time, the depositor would have
that much more use of his money, which in its last
analysis represents the result of toil. Some banks
now pay more than that.

And, finally, the immigrant who enters the
borders of the United States should be capable
of assimilation with the Caucasian race. A
higher standard of living prevails here than in
oriental countries and it should be upheld. Japa-
nese, Chinese and Hindoos should be prevented
at all hazards from immigration, except as duly
accredited students. They do not intermarry, and
have a much cheaper standard of living. If al-
lowed to come in any appreciable numbers, they
would destroy the dignity and independence of
American labor. All aliens, European or other-
wise, should be prevented from immigration if dis-
eased or permanently injured. But the recent
placing by Congress of an educational qualifica-
tion upon immigrants in order to restrict their
coming is contrary to the spirit of American in-
stitutions. The movement inaugurated chiefly
at the behest of the labor organizations was
unfair, for the reason that the great major-
ity of our fathers could sign their name with

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 223

only a mark when they landed on American
shores. Character is more important than ability
to read and write. The latter is soon acquired
in order to meet the necessities of life in this free
land. The movement was also directed against
the immense immigration from the Catholic coun-
tries of Southern Europe. This, too, is unreason-
able, for Catholics make as good citizens as any
other element in the community. The country
needs the South European peoples. For a century
and more the practical peoples of Northern Eu-
rope furnished the backbone of America. Now
are coming the imaginative peoples. The two
forces amalgamated will make a greater and
grander nation in the future.

As free schools and a free state are synonymous,
it follows that it is to the best interests of the peo-
ple of the United States that their children, the
citizens of the future, be taught in such schools.
No institution, religious or otherwise, should place
its own interests above those of the commonwealth
as a whole by the establishment of a separate sys-
tem of education. Under the guise of tolerance,
the free state should not go so far as to permit a
very large body of its people to lose the benefits
of unprejudiced education and fair incentive in
the pursuit of knowledge, any more than it per-
mitted the Mormon church to practise what the lat-
ter claimed to be the God-given right of polygamy.

224 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

A wiser tolerance, indeed, is to compel all to re-
ceive the advantages of free non-sectarian school-
ing, just as under our legal system the funda-
mental liberties of each citizen must be respected.
As the public schools of the country are free and
are supported by the taxpayers as a whole, the
Roman Catholic Church, which in 1916 educated
1,500,000 pupils in parochial institutions, can
have but one motive in giving its own instruction,
no matter how advantageous otherwise, and that
to so construe the facts of history and of science
as to fortify its own claims to authorit)^ It can-
not with reason be contended that the moral and
religious training imparted by the Roman church
in the schools is superior and therefore a neces-
sity; for the kingdom of God is universal and no
single organization, creed or religion has a
monopoly of His mercy, grace or wisdom. What
the children of the people of the country need to
be taught in the moral field is love of God and
simple righteousness, in accordance with the spirit
of the age, and such teaching is daily imparted,
by example or directly, by the six hundred thou-
sand teachers in the free schools throughout the
land. Seven millions of Methodists and six mil-
lions of Baptists are content with the system of
popular and unbiased education provided by the
people through their government, as are all other
Protestant denominations, and the two millions of

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 225

Jews in the country. Why should not the Roman
Catholics also be so satisfied'? If the Socialists,
making the absurd contention that this is a capi-
talist ridden land, sought to establish schools of
their own so as to teach their children in accord-
ance with their ideals, would the Roman Catho-
lics be favorable to them'? If not, why should
the citizens as a whole be favorable to the main-
tenance, especially where taxed for the purpose, of
any particularist system of education in a state
where all men are free? The Constitution guar-
antees tolerance to all religions, but is silent upon
the question of whether any church. Catholic or
Protestant, shall educate its children to suit its
own ends. However, the spirit of the free school
institution, from its inception three hundred years
ago, is opposed to such distinction. It should be
unnecessary to say that I am not opposed to the
parochial school system because it is Catholic.
No person who has known the good priest and
sister of charity, been a patient in the Charity
Hospital in New Orleans, and recognized the fact
that the Roman Catholic Church is the church of
the poor, as I have, can deny that it is doing a
great good. Nor can it be said that its communi-
cants are not as patriotic as those of any other
denomination in the land. But the province of
any church is outside the domain of secular educa-
tion, which is meant to impart established knowl-

226 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

edge; religion is a matter of individual belief and
opinion; principles of right conduct are tacitly
agreed upon by all, and they are taught in the free
schools. Roman Catholics, particularly the Irish,
who have never been outdone in love of this land,
should be willing to share in the common lot of
the great democracy which provides the best com-
mon school system of education the world af-
fords.

Who can doubt that with a simple and uni-
versally applicable code of civil and criminal law
throughout the United States ; with each employee
in any kind of a producing establishment receiving
a share of the total of ten per cent, of the profits
and therefore each more enthusiastically interested
in his or her work; with ten per cent, collected
from the rents of absentee landlords, in addition
to the valuations already assessed, in order to ease
the tax burdens of the community ; with the great
public utilities in the hands of the government for
all; with each person enjoying one day out of
seven for rest and eight hours of daily labor ; with
women prevented from toiling long hours and
children under fourteen from being employed at
all; with a free compulsory system of education
for all and immigration from embattled Europe
wisely restricted, that every person in the land
would be happier, wiser and more comfortable,

SOME REMEDIES SUGGESTED 227

and that the next generation would breathe an
entirely new life and be thankful that this one had
accomplished such a work for its benefit?

CHAPTER VIII

THE UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA

"The time will come when the American people will
possess all the land between Behring Strait and the Isth-
mus of Panama." — William H. Seward.

In the event of the disintegration of the British
Empire, due to its own decay, and the continuance
of chaotic conditions in the republic to the south,
it will become inevitable that both Canada and
Mexico shall be taken over and annexed to the
domain of the United States.

It is but natural that, in giving that which is of
itself in government and ideals, this nation should
subdue other peoples. It will wield the sword as
all its predecessors in nationality on the face of
the earth have done. It will not do its greatest
work until three hundred years after the begin-
ning of the amalgamation of blood within its bor-
ders, and not until the American people, to be
the strongest of the ages, has reached its maximum.
That transfusion began in about the year 1638,
when the Dutch West India Company for the first

time threw open to the world the right to culti-

228

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 229

vate land in New Amsterdam in free allodial pro-
prietorship. All privileges were extended equally
to other nationalities in the same degree as to
Dutchmen. Indeed, direct encouragement to im-
migration was provided. Each man was given a
farm free for six years, with bam, horses, cows,
sheep and swine. The only monopoly retained by
the company was the carrying of settlers. The
way was opened for extended immigration of
Dutch, Swedes, Huguenots and Englishmen, and
subsequent intermingling.^ Furthermore, negotia-
tions for a federal union were begun in 1638 be-
tween the colonies of Massachusetts, Connecticut,
New Haven and Plymouth. Prior to that year
each of the bands of colonists had emigrated from
Europe in separate nationalities. Now com-
menced that process which was eventually to make
all one by a general transfusion. Three centuries
after that approximate date, the American people
should in the year 1938, reach their greatest
strength. And as during the generations since
the earlier date immigrants of every Caucasian
race have continued to come to the present terri-
tory of the United States — in recent years at the
rate of a million annually — the supremacy in
strength of the American people should, according
to the law of blood, continue for another three

1 "Dutch and Quaker Colonies in America," John Fiske.
Vol. II, pp. 170-171.

230 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

centuries after first attaining its zenith. By that
strength they will give to mankind the ideals and
institutions peculiar to this republic. In the
meantime, due to conditions, because of blood and
conditions, the people of this country are already
reaching out toward vaster things.

The American people are asking themselves the
meaning of their destiny, and, realizing the revo-
lutionary conditions by which they are surrounded,
now have less qualms at the thought of greater
territory. The Philippines, Hawaii and Porto
Rico have accustomed them to the idea of retain-
ing sovereignty over other lands. But the reasons
for expansion are principally within. Until late
in the nineties the easily tilled and virgin soil
of the present contiguous territory of the country
had not been taken up. Homesteads were to be
had for the asking from a generous and far sighted
government. Those farmers who had found diffi-
cult the earning of an increment from their land in
New England and the East sold it and journeyed
westward to gain a fresh start, in many cases leav-
ing behind them exhausted fields to become aban-
doned farms. Irrigation and drainage opened up
still further areas, and they, too, were for the most
part, soon also taken by the same process and the
immigration of aliens. Population had been in-
creasing, aggregating ninety millions in 1910.
And that population had more and more become a

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 231

representative American growth. This point and
the limit of easily accessible land being reached at
the opening of the new century, new desire for the
aggressive American spirit to expand was increas-
ingly stimulated by the pressure of life in the more
thickly settled regions ; with the result that a very
large proportion of those who had been citizens
of the United States joined the 300,000 who im-
migrated into the rich fields of opportunity await-
ing them in Canada. For several years they con-
tinued to do so, and still seek to obey the call of
the venturesome and hazardous to new endeavor
in strange lands. Across the southern border, in
Mexico, the same spirit evinced itself, though not
to such an extent, by advancing into the rubber
plantations and to gain wealth in mining. A
great war in which the Canadians are taking part
and constant disturbance during the last several
years in the southern republic have abruptly put
an end to this century-long conquering trek of the
American into the wilderness, but the desire has
not ceased and is only stimulated by the barrier.

Pulsating with life and determined to carry
along with them the civilization they express, the
American people must find a way to fulfil that
natural destiny which was in the mind of Seward
when he said in the Senate in 1851 that the time
would come when the United States would pos-
sess all of the land between Behring Strait and the

232 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Isthmus of Panama. They cannot remain stand-
ing still. No nation or people in the past has
done so. Nor can they stifle, if they would, the
energy that urges them on to do the work for
which they have been fitting themselves during
the nearly three hundred years in which they have
been transfusing their bloods into one. Adven-
turous spirit and intrepidity of character are rife
among them. It is their time, or at least the dawn
of their greatest day, and they must take advan-
tage of that incentive w^hich the root feels when it
bursts forth into grass and flowers, which the
youth of all lands have felt when they left the old
hearth and haunts to find new achievement and
to bring honor upon the mother who bore them,
which the men of Macedon under Alexander were
animated by when they advanced to give Hellenic
ideas, culture and government to Western Asia.
Because they are the most practicable and nearest
at hand, they should look with longing eyes upon
a land now a part of the domain of England
which is vaster in area than the entire United
States and to a turbulent little country, thrice the
size of the Lone Star State, which is rich in re-
sources and as alluring to the eye and the senses
as it was to the men of Cortez when they first
gazed on it almost exactly four hundred years ago.
If the determined and aggressive American peo-
ple, with a civilization and institutions to ex-

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 233

press, merely had it in their minds to seek further
lands and add them, by conquest if necessary, to
those they already possess, they would be guilty
of covetousness and the desire to expropriate to
themselves that which belongs to their neighbors.
But if they will look at the underlying facts more
closely they will see, perhaps, that they not only
have it dimly within their aims to take Canada
and Mexico, but owe a duty to the peoples of the
earth as a whole, the historical development of
nations and the inhabitants of the lands in ques-
tion to make them a part of the contiguous terri-
tory of the United States. They are and of right
ought to be the protectors of the North American
continent. The greatest, most enlightened and
intensely ambitious people of the Western Hemi-
sphere, they should turn from the counsel of the
kindly brethren who worship the god of things
as they are, and by the sword, if need be, carry
American liberty, order and law to the farthest
extent of territory on the continent and to the
limit of oceans alone. They should have a mil-
lion well trained men under arms and led by the
leaders who are to come to them, startle the bal-
ance of mankind by the quickness and despatch
with which they seize, secure and develop that
entire northern region named after Americus Ves-
pucius long ago. Death, pestilence, and shock of
arms should not deter them : theirs is a work to do

234 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and they must do it at the risk of many lives.
Canada is the only one of the four great de-
pendencies of Britain which may soon be left with-
out a master who has his seats in the chief center
of the German Empire. An expanse extending
from Atlantic to Pacific and the border of the
United States to the Arctic, comprising 3,745,574
square miles, it has no means by itself of defend-
ing its population of 5,371,315. It is without a
navy and in the present war estimates its land
strength of all ages at not more than half a million
men. Such of those who volunteer it is sending
to the battle fields of Europe as speedily as pos-
sible. At the end of a long conflict this number
must be considerably diminished; so that after
peace is made there will be for the defense of the
Dominion perhaps 250,000 trained soldiers, a
force difficult to attack and hard to overcome.
But against such an aggressive nation as the
United States, with twenty times the population,
Canada could not long compete because of one
blood, and it is reasonable to suppose it would be
helpless against Germany, to become the mightiest
empire on the earth until then, and Japan, also
with great ambitions. Stand alone it could not.
Germany or Japan could not attempt to take it
without the United States risking every man and
dollar to uphold the Monroe doctrine. If left by
itself, greater numbers of Americans than it now

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 235

has within its borders would seek its virgin soil as
an outlet from conditions more difficult because of
density of population, and they would also want
the perpetuation of the institutions they had left.
For the most part, having considerable dislike of
the United States and its people, the Canadians
would not permit the junction even then without
a struggle unless they were invited to become a
part of the Union immediately upon admission,
realized the essential similarity of fundamental
institutions and the helplessness of their position
without the protection of the United States, and
felt that they would be better off as a part of the
great republic of the future than the colonial
wilderness of an extinct empire.

If the Canadian people did not desire to accept
that invitation, and it is improbable that they
would, it might in time be the duty of the Ameri-
can people to take their land by force and add it
to the United States'? Why could this people
accomplish the task without qualms of conscience"?
Because the Canadians do not occupy a land they
can rightfully call their own. They are not a
people in the sense which all have been who were a
composite of several bloods and therefore had a
work to do. They are Britishers who have taken
the easily accessible land which they have found,
and Britishers they have remained to the extent
of nearly one hundred per cent. The French in

236 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Quebec, a small proportion, are also nearly one in
the blood of their motherland. The hundred
thousand Indians, original possessors of the land
who gave way before the strength, prowess and
civilization of the white man, are merely toler-
ated. To take over a territory greater than its
own, in order to find avenues for the expansion of
its surplus population, therefore, would be no
crime on the part of the United States, and the
mere fulfilment of its destiny to expand in its
immediately contiguous territory like all other
states. Such an extension of its jurisdiction and
institutions over Canadian lands would be no more
than the English have already done. And it
would mean the replacing of a monarchy by a re-
public. If it be contended that upon the demise
of the British Empire, Canada might also become
a republic, it may be said that the government of
the United States would be better and stronger
because a composite of all peoples instead of a
transplanting of one, that it needs the territory the
Britishers now hold for legitimate expansion, and
that it would be much better for the welfare of
the British who now inhabit the country if taken
over, shaken up, gotten out of their dowdy ways
and made through the next few generations to
lose the identity of an exhausted race in trans-
fusion into a greater people.

Assuming that it would be for the benefit of

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 237

both the Americans and British to take Canada,
what opportunity would it afford for the millions
of Americans who would undoubtedly find homes
there. The dominion is almost as varied in its
resources as the United States. It has nine prov-
inces and five districts. Three of the provinces
are about the size of the State of Texas, two of
them a third larger, one as extensive as Nebraska,
another like West Virginia and the last similar in
extent to Delaware. Two of the districts are
twice as large as Texas, one with about the same
number of square miles and another more ex-
tensive than California. Numerous rivers give
fertility. Nine lakes are more than an hundred
miles in length and thirty-five over fifty miles
long. The climate is varied. In this the Pacific
slope is like Western Europe. Only Ungara and
Labrador are very chill, because of the iceberg
laden current which sweeps along the Atlantic
shore. South of the Gulf of St. Lawrence the
temperature ranges from 40° for the year to 60°
in the summer. In Quebec and Ontario the win-
ters are brilliant but cold, and in the heated season
from 60° to 65°. On the plains, with clear and
bracing atmosphere, the climate is especially bene-
ficial to those suffering from lung trouble. Even
in the Mackenzie River Valley, near the Arctic
Circle the average temperature is not more than
^^''. Canada is a hunter's paradise. Animals

238 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

are varied among the musk ox, caribou, moose,
Virginia deer, pronghom antelope, Virginia
blacktailed and mule deer, bison, elk, grizzly,
black and cinnamon bear, timber wolf, coyote,
puma, fox, lynx, beaver, otter, marten, fisher,
wolverine, mink, hare and rabbit. Turkey,
grouse and geese abound. Eagles are numerous,
but for the most part birds are migratory and as
in the United States. The forest wealth of Can-
ada is still the greatest in the world. It is des-
tined to rank as perhaps the most important of the
wheat producing countries. Already it yields
about one-fifth as much as here. Samples of good
wheat were recently grown at latitude 61.52° at
St. Simpson on the Mackenzie River, more than
eight hundred miles north of Winnipeg and a
thousand miles from the boundary of the United
States. A quarter of a billion bushels of oats are
grown. Buckwheat is produced plentifully for
the national dish of buckwheat cakes and maple
sirup. Peas and vegetables of all kinds are to
be found everywhere. In the dominion are 2,-
019,824 horses, and cattle, sheep, swine and
poultry are aburfflant. Because of its immense
dairy resources, Canada has been called the "land
of milk and honey." In the manufacturing in-
dustries wood pulp, lumber and canned salmon
have the chief place, though pig iron and steel are
becoming important. Large bituminous coal de-

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 239

posits are to be found in British Columbia and
Nova Scotia. Canada is the world's chief pro-
ducer of asbestos, nickel and corundum. Copper,
lead, silver and all the important metals are mined
in the Rocky Mountain Region. Vast tracts of
virgin land, like those which inspired the builders
of the western half of the United States, are
available and given away by the government in
homesteads of 160 acres each. Educational in-
stitutions are everywhere; 86 per cent, can read
and write. Order is well maintained, and in the
Canadian Northwest seven hundred mounted
police or "Riders of the Plains" keep such peace in
the remotest mining camp as was not known in the
days of the "vigilance committee" in '49. Two
great transcontinental railways cross the continent,
one having its western terminus at Vancouver and
the other at Prince Rupert.

Such is the land which should in the near future
become a part of the United States. Having
fundamentally similar institutions, each province
enjoying a separate parliament and the dominion
itself a separate government under allegiance to
the crown, it might be suggested that the English
people, who live there in a percentage of 97 per
cent., might feel inclined to vote for union with
this country; but to any one who has lived in
Canada and knows of the feeling of dislike for the
United States this suggestion would seem most

240 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

amusing. Prior to the Civil War complete reci-
procity between the countries reigned, but after-
wards Congress, in resentment for the way Eng-
land had treated the United States in attempting
to aid the South, stopped all that. Canadians,
too, had their animosity aroused by the Fenian
raids. Since that time the Canadians along the
border have gained the reputation for narrowness
of mind, and during the Taft administration re-
jected any further reciprocity with this country,
so that they might not fail in the slightest way
in loyalty to Great Britain. Being British peo-
ple, simply transported across the sea, and their
allegiance renewed and intensified by participa-
tion to the limit of their resources in the present
war in Europe, it would be very unreasonable to
suppose that they would turn to this country as
the land from whence they should receive their
sovereignty and laws, after the great British Em-
pire has disappeared. Hence it but remains, when
the time comes, and only after it has re-
fused an invitation to come in peaceably, to annex
it by force of arms. This, so far as England is
concerned, will be part payment for her treatment
of the United States prior to and during the War
of 1812 and throughout the Civil War. Canada
should be invited to enter the Union with its prov-
inces as separate states, with its five separate dis-
tricts as territories, and with its people having ex-

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 241

actly the same rights as the American people now
have. Each should have two votes in the Senate
and members of the House of Representatives in
the same proportion to population as here. If
force proves necessary, this should be the ultimate
object in any event.

Mexico is a striking contrast to Canada in peo-
ple, climate and conditions. In that country are
13,607,259 people in a territory of 767,055 square
miles, about three times the State of Texas. The
temperature averages annually from 77° to 82°
and sometimes as high as 105°. Considering the
extent of land area, the number of people, salu-
brity of the climate and its resources in mines, for-
ests and soil, Mexico is one of the richest countries
in the world. And nowhere have such opportuni-
ties been more abused by oppressive conditions
and constant turmoil. The people are divided
among 19 per cent, of whites of Mexican de-
scent, 38 per cent, of Indians and 43 per cent,
of mixed bloods. The blood of Spain ran out
centuries ago and that of the Aztecs even be-
fore. Out of these, and those who have mixed,
has come a short but physically weak people.
The Spanish particularly are cruel and vindictive.
Unsanitary habits and surroundings prevail.
The adobe hut is the type of residence of the great
body of the people who inhabit Mexico. The
habits and surroundings of the Indians are so

242 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

squalid that the death-rate exceeds 50 per cent.
Tribal intermarriage is common. Peonage pre-
vails. The half breeds or mixed blood are
chiefly noted for their indolence and criminal in-
stincts. In 1 864 Don Manuel Orosco y Berra
found among the Indians hfty-one distinct lan-
guages, sixty-nine dialects and sixty-two distinct
idioms, a total of 182, each representing a distinct
tribe. Perhaps nowhere in the world are the
people so densely ignorant as in the land once con-
quered by Cortez. Fully ninety per cent, cannot
read or write. In 1904 there were 620,476 chil-
dren in school, but the past few years of revolu-
tion and rapine have destroyed the advance that
had then begun. At first, in the early days of the
Spanish rule, the countr}^ was entirely under ec-
clesiastical control, and there are to-day in the so-
called republic 13,533,013 Roman Catholics, 51,-
795 Protestants, 3,811 of other faiths and 18,640
of no faith. The Holy Inquisition was estab-
lished in 1571 and in 1574 its first auto da fe was
held with the burning at the stake of twenty-one
"pestilent Lutherans." This institution for the
defense of orthodoxy was continually active for
two and a half centuries and ceased only after the
revolution of 1820. It became necessary to stipu-
late in the constitution of the new government
that no senator or member of the Chamber of
Deputies should be an ecclesiastic. Under the

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 243

system of limiting the suffrage to all citizens who
possess honest means of livelihood above the age
of eighteen years for married, and twenty-one for
unmarried men, it has been possible for a regime
like that of the late President Diaz to re-
strict the right to vote to few and to intimidate the
rest.

"The great power exercised by the Roman
Catholic Church during the colonial period enabled
it not only to mold the spiritual belief of the
weak people, but also to control their education
and their industries and shape the political prob-
lems governing their daily life. In this way it ac-
quired great wealth, becoming the owner of exten-
sive estates in every part of the country and of
highly productive properties in the towns," says
the Encyclopaedia Britannica. In 1859 the
Church owned one-third of the real and per-
sonal propert)^ of the republic. Coupled with the
unjust distribution of property, due to the long
continued ascendency of the Church, and the ap-
palling ignorance and superstition of the masses,
is the national amusement of bull fighting. In a
land where ecclesiastical rule has held such long
sway and would be supposed to have inculcated
ideas of morality this is the favorite diversion of
Sunday crowds. The bull is brought into the
ring to face the matador, with his red rag, and the
poniard, which stings and thrusts him, until he

244 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

finally sinks to his cruel death, inevitable from
the beginning. The writer has several times seen
the horse ridden by the matador gored by the bull
until its intestines fell a foot or two from its
belly. The poor animal was then dragged out,
sewed up and actually used again for the same
purpose the following Sunday. This is the pas-
time of a nation inured to shedding the blood of
the helpless and of a people made cowards by
three centuries of show of military and ecclesi-
astical authority and denial of civil and religious
liberty.

Yet Mexico is a land richer for its size than
any on the globe. It abounds in mineral, forest
and floral wealth. It is a veritable paradise, and
to the intrepid American upon the horizon, strain-
ing his eye to discover new territory in which to
find free vent for his energies, the southern repub-
lic, which is such in name only, offers boundless
opportunities. Great coffee, sugar and rubber
plantations are to be found in the extreme south.
On the plateau a large part of the country has
thus far been found too arid for agriculture.
Crops of wheat, barley, Indian corn and forage
grasses are interrupted by long draughts, and the
people there are compelled to supply the deficiency
with importations of food. But in the Terra
Calientes are sugar, tobacco, indigo, cacoa, rice,
sweet potatoes, alfalfa, beans, Indian corn to the

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 245

extent of two or three crops a year, banana, plan-
tain, tuna, chili pepper, olive, cocoanut, or-
ange, lemon, lime, mango, pomegranate, pine-
apple, fig, papaya, gourd, melon, guava, plum
and zapote. Pulque, the fermented drink made
from the mascal sap, is the distilled spirit made
from the leaves and roots of the plant of the
same name. So much of this is consumed that
the making of it is the leading industry of
Hidalgo, Puebla and Taxcala. In the forests
the silk, cotton, rubber and vanilla tree, palm
oil, castor bean, ginger, mahogany, rosewood,
ebony, cedar and other valuable woods, nuts of
all kinds and fruits grow in luxuriant plenitude.
Pearl fisheries are industries on the coasts of Yu-
catan and Campeche. In 1902 there were 5,142,-
454 cattle, 859,217 horses, 334,435 mules, 287,-
991 asses, 3,421,430 sheep, 4,206,011 goats and
616,139 swine in the country.

Mexico's greatest resources, however, are to be
found in mining. Of the entire number of prop-
erties devoted to extracting metal from the earth
1572 are gold, 5461 silver, 970 copper, 383 iron,
151 mercury, 6 sal sema, 5 tourmalines, 1 bis-
muth and 1 turquois. Petroleum, asphalt, plat-
inum, graphite, soda and marble are also found.
Three hundred million tons of a low grade coal
ore, like that of Texas, is in sight. In the pre-
cious metals some of the great bonanzas of the

246 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

world have been opened. Mexico has yielded
a steady supply of gold. Transportation of this
from the mines is usually by the burro or mule,
though the picturesque but centuries old yoked
oxen are to be frequently seen laboriously pro-
viding means of transit. Two lines of railway,
owned by the government, run south from the
United States border and have their terminus
in the capital of the republic, and one cuts across
the country from Tehuantepec. Only five cities
have a population of more than 50,000. They
are Mexico City with 344,721, Guadaloupe with
101,208, Puebla with 93,152, Monterey with
62,266 and San Luis Potosi with 61,019. The
temperature ranges from 77 to 82 degrees, and
reaches as high as 105 degrees. The heat is more
constant than in the United States, but better
withstood for that reason.

From 1821 to 1884 Mexico was troubled by
continued wars. Then came Diaz and for nearly
thirty years maintained almost constant peace.
But as his hand grew older and more weak the
seed of dissention was sown, with the result
that in 1910 occurred the revolution headed by
an arch dreamer, Madero. Bartholomew Diaz
made an unsuccessful attempt to wrest power
from him, as did General Reyes. Then appeared
Victoriana Huerta. The power of the United
States wrecked his hopes of gaining outside means

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 247

of upholding himself and made a way for Car-
ranza. Too weak to subdue the turmoil, he
too was forced to let the troops of the Great Re-
public to the north prevent incursions into its
territor)^ and seek to punish Villa. In the
United States and Cuba plotters have contributed
gold to revolutionists in return for promises of
huge concessions, purchased ammunition and sent
it across the line openly if the Administration
in Washington happened to be friendly, and cov-
ertly if not, while such revolutionists have
armed men to keep up a kind of guerilla warfare,
seeking thereby to gain control over a horde of
persons unable to read and write.

In view of the awful conditions which prevail
in a land so given up to ignorance, supersti-
tion and cruelty, is it to be questioned that lands
over which the Aztecs once ruled would be far
happier, more industrious and in a greater de-
gree devoted to the enjoyment of a higher civiliza-
tion, if the United States were to enter with a
force of a quarter of a million men, establish
law and order at the point of the sword and
exterminate without stint the opponents of lib-
erty? In that case this country would be called
an usurper, but it might reply with Napoleon,
who in his address to the Irish parliament said:
"Be it so. What throne, what government ever
yet existed which has not been founded on usur-

248 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

pation. The facts which are universal can never
be particular. The history of mankind will in-
form you that the question which should interest
them is not who has usurped power, but what use
has been made of power when usurped'?" The es-
tablishment of universal free education, the
teaching of the English language, the opening
up of the great tracts of land to peaceful culti-
vation by the people, the assurance of equality
of right and opportunity, irrespective of faction
or religion, and the maintenance of as good order
throughout the 767,005 square miles of territory,
as in Massachusetts, would at the end of a gen-
eration be an answer to the question of whether
the United States had interfered in another state
for the benefit of the people there or of its own.
The Aztecs overcame the Toltecs. The Span-
iards conquered the Aztecs. The latter remained
a ruling caste and did not mingle with the earlier
people except to their detriment, leaving a de-
spised proportion, amounting to 43 per cent, at the
present time, of half breeds. Should the United
States conquer Mexico, giving opportunity for ex-
pansion from the Southern States of Italians and
other descendants of the peoples of the south of
Europe, used to warm climates, a century or two
would see all the persons living in that part of
the continent of North America as much typi-

UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA 249

cally American in type as any other. For the
eighteen little states now constituting the repub-
lic to enter the Union after being annexed to
the United States would be an injustice to the
older commonwealths. Because of the conditions
prevailing, they should be redivided into four
or six territories and governed as such before
final admission as states.

With Canada and Mexico both taken over,
there would be an immediate expansion of Ameri-
cans into those countries. They would be as-
sured of order, just laws and a voice in the gov-
ernment. New life, by further intermingling,
would be added to the nation. With greater
territory, in natural limits, the people of the
United States would in even larger measure feel
the greatness of their destiny, and so conduct them-
selves as to lend all mankind the hope that they in
their individual and independent spheres might
bear the name of republic and enjoy similar in-
stitutions. The United States, as the greatest
nation on the globe, would be more adequately
protected from invaders in any direction by be-
ing embraced within a single continent surrounded
entirely by water. As the original Romans in
their republic conquered and amalgamated with
the other peoples in the Latin peninsula, and
gained that territory which it was their natural

250 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

destiny, because of geographical and strategic con-
ditions to occupy, so the Americans should extend
their greater sway over the entire continent of
North America, including the West Indies.

CHAPTER IX

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN

"The theater of events in the great hereafter will be
upon the broad expanse of the Pacific Ocean." — Wil-
liam H. Seward.

To the west of the mountains across which
Balboa gazed at waters he gave a name suggestive
of their placidity, and toward that Orient, which
has until quite recently remained in mysterious
coma for many centuries, are dawning vast prob-
lems, the solution of which threatens to change
the face of the political, economic and religious
earth.

The writer has frequently peered at those se-
rene depths from the slopes of sunny California
and pondered the classical past of empires fallen
to decay upon its western lands which are now
the East — the long silence of inactivity which
proved to be but the preparation for succeeding
mightier overthrows; the adventurers of all lands
traveling ever in the direction of the sun, until
they saw it set in golden beams and blood-red

251

252 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

glow on the waters from whence man had started
ages before; Zoroastran, Brahman, Buddhist,
Confucian and Christian carrying their respective
messages along with the tides that swept their
sails afar, until even their advancement had
ceased; and then the activity presaging such new
life as in the time to come will unite the two
hemispheres.

Resting upon that ocean are four great conti-
nents which represent the past, present and fu-
ture of man. The nations bordering it number
in their population something like seven hundred
millions. China, India, Mongolia and Man-
churia signify the birth and early history of the
human animal, while on the western side of the
American Rockies are the outposts of the most
advanced civilization and the most vital people
of this day. Siberia, Alaska, Canada, Western
South America and Australia are the forge wherein
the two forces will work. Up under the roof of
the world they face each other at Behring Strait.
South of that narrow inlet is a string of islands
across which in days when more connected the
fathers of the ancient Toltecs, Aztecs, Incas, red
men, aborigines and mound builders may at one
time have crossed. Towards the Antarctic, west-
ward from Tierra del Fuego, is a far expanse of
sea to New Zealand, and then the way is easy
to New South Wales, Queensland and New

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 253

Guinea, through the Straits Settlements to Borneo,
Sumatra, Siam and Cathay again.

China proper has a population of 400,000,000,
Mongolia of 2,000,000, Siberia of 6,000,000,
Alaska of 64,356, Yukon Territory of 8,512,
British Columbia of 392,480, Washington of
1,141,990, Oregon of 672,765, California of
2,377,549, Mexico of 15,063,207, Central Amer-
ica of 3,000,000, Columbia of 5,500,000, Peru
of 4,500,000, Chili of 5,000,000, New Zealand
and Australia of 5,000,000, Java of 30,098,000,
Borneo of 1,250,000, the Celebes of 8^1,000,
other Dutch East Indies of 4,528,411, Siam of
8,100,000, Hawaii of 200,005, the Philippines
of 8,735,000, Japan of 52,985,000 and Korea
of 15,164,000. Yet these figures give inadequate
idea of the possibilities of the development of
peoples within the territories named. That China
itself is not overpopulated, except in certain dis-
tricts like that of Canton, is shown by the fact
that the 400,000,000 people are scattered over
an area of 1,500,000 square miles. Germany
supports a seventh of that number of people in
an area one-ninth as large. It is figured that the
new republic of China could, without inconven-
ience to the present population, hold 50,000,000
more. And so, considering area and fertility, it
is said that Manchuria can sustain 200,000,000
more than now, Mongolia another 100,000,000

254 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and Siberia a similar number. Alaska with a
climate milder than Sweden and Norway, and
with an area of 590,884 square miles, could hold
40,000,000 people. And to the south, in the
207,076 square miles of the Yukon Territory, the
355,855 exceeding fertile square miles of British
Columbia and the richest lands on the Pacific,
in Washington, Oregon and California, is room
for 300,000,000 more. In South America, west
of the Andes, 100,000,000 could be stowed
away. Australia alone is said to be capable of
sustaining 300,000,000. In short the countries
bordering upon the great basin of the Pacific could
supply life to a billion and a quarter more hu-
man beings than at present inhabit them. His-
tory has given much to them, but they are lands
of the future as well.

The natural resources of these regions are ex-
pressed in figures which stagger the imagination.
In British Columbia, Washington, Oregon and
California are 1,756,000,000,000 feet of timber,
ready to be cut down, milled and supply the
needs of the builders of both the Asiatic and
American borders of the Pacific. A billion bar-
rels of oil have been produced in California since
1891, that State now providing a quarter of the
world's supply. This is worth twice as much as
the gold ore mined in all the years since '49. In
California alone are grown 120,000,000 pounds

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 255

of raisins and apricots annually. In the Golden
State, too, with climate and soil like that of Italy,
and with vast supplies of grapes, it is likely, will
be found the vineyard of the Pacific Ocean na-
tions. In Oregon and Washington are potentiali-
ties for wheat growing larger than now, but the
great granary of the peoples east and west of
the waters discovered by Balboa will be in Can-
ada, which will probably in a few years produce
four times the amount of wheat grown in the
United States. In Alaska are 32,000,000 acres
of coal lands, with a possible total output of
150,000,000,000,000 tons. This includes lig-
nite and anthracite of the best quality, easy of
access to tidewater. The land sold to the United
States by Russia in 1867 for $7,000,000 has
within itself enough fuel to supply the nations
upon the great ocean for untold generations.
Alaska has given the world $200,000,000 in vir-
gin gold. There also are on the American Pa-
cific coast immense stores of copper, lead, quick-
silver, bismuth, vanadium, tungsten, nickel, iron,
sulphur, antimony, petroleum, salt, zinc, borax,
cobalt, gypsum, asbestos, ocher, kaolin, molybde-
nite, manganese, magnesia, mica, peat, and mar-
ble; in Mexico lie many a bonanza of gold and
silver. In Chile are the most extensive nitrate
beds in the world, yielding $30,000,000 in export
taxes annually. Australia has extended tracts of

256 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

untouched land like that of the United States in
the middle and latter half of the last century. It
should supply an industrious and highly developed
people in time to come. Despite its own immense
population, which subsists largely on rice, China
can export more of that staple than all the rest of
the globe combined. In Siberia also are vast
tracts for wheat production. Japan can outdis-
tance the earth in tea-growing. These are but
scant figures of the stupendous agricultural, min-
eral and lumber resources of the Great Basin.

The development of these raw products stimu-
lates manufactures. With the enhancement of
traffic through the Panama Canal, New York will
benefit by being brought seven thousand miles
nearer San Francisco, Europe five thousand miles
closer, and New Orleans and Chicago in corre-
spondingly nearer proximity to the Pacific coast
and the Orient. As in the case of the Nile, the
Tigris and Euphrates, the Amo, the Seine, the
Rhine, and the Thames, great civilizations have
followed the fertile valleys of the earth. So the
Mississippi Valley and its products will have a re-
markably stimulative and retroactive effect upon
the Pacific Ocean. This part of the United States
and also the Atlantic seaboard will help to supply
the tools, farming implements, electrical machin-
ery and the thousand articles needed for the rapid
development of new countries. But that portion

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 257

of the United States which will play the greatest
part in supplying the wants of the peoples upon
the Pacific Ocean will be the three States border-
ing upon that body of water, notably California.
San Francisco has the best harbor, with perhaps
the exception of Rio de Janeiro, in the world. As
the Eastern States were made rich in agriculture
and manufacturing while the Middle West formed
the outer settlement, and the latter was built up
into wealthy cities and farming communities while
the Northwest was the land of possibility, so now
the territory of the country west of the Rockies
will seek its prosperity in the quick development
of Siberia, China and Australia. All the Orient,
Western Canada, Mexico and South America
should be the recipients of the products created by
the cheap iron, coal, oil, lumber and unlimited
water power of that region. The Coast should
take the hemp, silk and wool of the Orient, make
them into various articles and send them back, just
as the United States formerly sent its wool and
cotton to Europe and then reimported the manu-
factured products. The moving picture has taken
prodigiously in Japan, helping to create a desire
for creature comforts there and in the East gen-
erally. Newspapers are being circulated to a
larger extent in China. Cotton and mixed goods,
underwear, boots and shoes are called for in greater
abundance yearly. The Pacific Coast, including

258 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Canada, can, through the ports of San Francisco,
Seattle and Vancouver become the distributing
point of flour to the lands beyond the Pacific
Ocean. Bread, the staple of the race, can be sup-
plied by it in inexhaustible quantities. There
was a time when California produced the finest
wheat in the world, but with greater profits this
gave way to fruit raising. This wheat and that
of the entire coast makes a flour second to none in
all the world for fineness and delicacy, and for the
purposes of the peoples of the earth who inhabit
the milder climates it cannot be surpassed. It
does not contain sufficient heat for the northern
races, but the Chinese like it, and there should be
an immense volume of trade with Southern Asia
with this as a basis. Oregon and Washington are
also capable of producing much greater quantities
of wheat and therefore of flour to meet the grow-
ing appetite for it on the part of the Orient.
Canada, however, containing a volcanic ash soil,
in a few years will outdistance rivals as a wheat
producer. Much of its product also will in time
be sent to meet this demand on the part of Asia.

It is not expected that Argentina wheat will
enter into the Pacific equation, as the demand for
its product is mostly from Europe. Siberian
wheat is too far inland to figure in the Asiatic sup-
ply, so far as it applies to the lands bordering upon
the Pacific. But in time the millers of the Pacific

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 259

Coast of America who supply the Pacific trade will
become more potential factors in wealth than those
of the northern Mississippi Valley ever were.
China and Japan cannot take our Coast wheat and
manufacture it into flour and do it profitably, be-
cause they have not sufficient demand for by-prod-
ucts. The experiment has been unsuccessfully
tried in Japan. India will not become a rival be-
cause it will consume all of its own wheat and
flour. An increasing market for the soft wheat
flour, so agreeable to the southern races, will be
northwestern South America.

Next in importance in feeding the Pacific peo-
ples with wheat, flour and similar products, and
this is peculiarly the opportunity of California, is
the production of dried fruits. Nutritious, de-
licious, easily prepared and transported and very
cheap, they are expected to be numbered among
the most popular staples of the Orient. It is con-
sidered only reasonable to suppose that when the
Chinese and kindred peoples begin to crave a
greater variety in eating they will first turn to the
cheaper foods and these they will find in Cali-
fornia's dried fruits. That this will be so is in-
ferred from the case of France which itself raises
prunes, but imports the prunes of the Golden
States in enormous quantities. Awaken the Asi-
atic to the delicacy of the California prune, apri-
cot and other dried fruits, is now the cry of the

26o THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

California merchant. Raisins are nothing but
dried grapes. California can produce an enormous
quantity of these and will undoubtedly supply the
Orient with them.

With the development of refrigeration and
faster steamship lines other fruits of the State and
of Oregon and Washington, such as apples, will
receive a greater demand from across the Pacific
Ocean, it is expected. All of the food products
of the Coast are now mostly consumed in this
country and Europe, and the demand for them has
made land in the State highly valuable. But with
the possibility of hordes of people in Eastern Asia
calling for them in addition, there is no limit to the
profits to be made, because the products themselves
are a monopoly to the Coast.

The hardier races of the Pacific region must have
a certain amount of meat. The Chinaman to-day
when he does eat meat considers it as a delicacy
and uses it about as an American would eat the
real Russian caviar. In time he may learn to con-
sume more, especially if he can afford more.
With the northern expanses of Asia filling up there
will be a natural and rapid demand for this prod-
uct from some source. That portion of the globe
cannot furnish its own supply because of the hard
winters and insufficient protection to cattle. Nor
can the United States requite the demand because
it will use more than it can sell. Even before the

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 261

war our meat exportation was falling off enor-
mously. Great ranges have been broken up to
make way for more profitable small farming, as
the result of the growth of cities. Hence a less-
ened supply, increased demand and higher prices.
Nor can Argentina, which is becoming one of the
principal abattoirs of the world, supply the meat
for the Pacific Ocean. Europe will consume the
surplus of the South American country for a long
time. But the more important limitation is that
the cost of refrigeration and the difficulty of carry-
ing the product so great a distance from Argentina
around the Horn to the Orient removes it as a
factor. What nation, then, is destined to supply
the meat for the Pacific and particularl}^ the
milder sort, such as mutton, to the inhabitants of
mild climates? This is conceded to Australia.
That country has almost limitless tracts of graz-
ing lands, which can be utilized for the purpose
for a long period. This fact alone is sufficient to
cause a rapid extension of population in Aus-
tralia during the next few decades, as rapid
as that which was coincident with the develop-
ment of the American West.

China will probably continue to be the chief
rice producer of the world for generations. This
is indicated by the fact that China now raises all
it desires for its own vast population, and enough
to send much abroad besides, and under the crudest

262 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

agricultural methods, with the exception of cer-
■ tain big plantations conducted under Occidental
auspices. Owing to the cheapness and value of
the staple as food the Chinese, Japanese, Hindoos
and Filipinos will undoubtedly continue its use
especially among the poorer classes, but as they
prosper it is expected that they will gradually ac-
quire the European habit of eating flour and meat.
And here arises a point which shows that the trade
will not all be westward, but eastward as well.
Think of California being referred to as the Far
East I Yet China will send back to what it will
consider this Eastern land increasingly greater
quantities of rice to the United States. As the
Oriental is rapidly acquiring flour as a food, so the
Occidental is adopting rice in place of meat, espe-
cially in the sections not subject to extreme cold,
where fat is required. The United States is rais-
ing rice in Louisiana, but not in sufficient quanti-
ties to supply more than a limited proportion of
our own population. The Indian rice is small and
inferior to the American rice product. The Japa-
nese rice is considered the best. The Japanese
export this largely and import the Indian, as it
is cheaper, and the difference makes a big saving
in their cost of living. They send quantities of
their own product to the United States and to the
better classes of China and India who are able to
pay for it. As rice is peculiarly well adapted to a

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 263

hot climate, South America will use a great deal
of it. In corn the North American Continent is
supreme. For a long time the United States will
continue to lead the world in the raising of this
staple so vital to humanity. That the commodity
will enter largely into the transpacific trade is
doubtful, because it is mostly the food of Northern
nations. Asia is able to produce enough for its
Northern climates, and America will be busy sup-
plying itself and much of Europe.

Vegetables must be considered perishable, and
hence cannot be transported across the Pacific un-
der present conditions. But with the develop-
ment of canning on this side of the water and the
enormous supply of such products capable of being
raised in California, it is believed that San Fran-
cisco will become the center of a great canning in-
dustry to feed the peoples of the Orient. In this
the packers of Chicago have also entered, with
headquarters on the coast. Australia is expected
to be only a slight competitor. California berries,
peaches and other delightful products of its soil, as
well as many varied products of other parts of the
Coast and the Mississippi Valley, will go sailing
over the sea in constantly increasing quantities.
With cheap water transportation and the practical
certainty of increasing wants in this direction on
the part of the Orient, it is anticipated by the Cali-
fornia canner that he can lay the product of the

264 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

California farm at the door of the housewife in
Hong Kong or Shanghai as cheaply as in New
York, and even cheaper. Hence he is hoping to
reap an immense harvest. This survey does not
include the products of tropical countries, which
the United States and all the countries around the
Pacific will consume in increasing quantities.
The future of Pacific South America in the feed-
ing of these peoples will be in cocoa. This de-
licious, highly nutritious and healthful food
is now shipped to the Orientals, who have de-
veloped a taste for it.

The great rival to the commercial activity of the
United States upon the Pacific Ocean is Japan.
That country comprises 1 56,673 square miles situ-
ated, like Britain, in islands. In a similar area are
all of the New England States, New York and
Pennsylvania. This is the most densely populated
portion of the United States. It contains 16,-
208,696 people. Yet within the narrow limits of
Japan are 52,865,259 souls. They live under a
government where the Emperor has exceptional au-
thority and is looked upon as a god. His person
is sacred. But the Japanese are progressive, am-
bitious and exceptionally efficient. They demand
an outlet in Asia and will find it. The food and
population problems form the basis of an inter-
national policy. The total annual production of
rice, the chief means of sustenance, is valued at

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 265

640,000,000 yen out of a total agricultural yield
valued at 1,300,000,000 yen. Nearly 900,000
people are engaged in the production of tea. At-
tempts have been constantly made to add to the
wealth of the country by the stimulation of manu-
factures. Thus in 1868 the value of all exports
and imports was 26,246,545 yen. Forty years
later this total reached 926,880,219 yen. The
chief import is raw cotton and the chief export is
raw silk. A million people are engaged in the
fisheries. Half as many have "weaving houses"
in what in Japan is a home industry. In these are
800,000 looms. Sixty thousand make paper and
an hundred thousand manufacture mats. These
small establishments are a part of Japanese life
and are peculiar to itself. The manufacture of
machiner)^, chemicals, food and beverages takes up
considerable of the effort of the industrious popula-
tion. Compulsory education has been adopted
and 97.8 per cent, of children of proper age of
both sexes attend school. The system of govern-
ment is representative and constitutional in theory,
and partially in practise, but rests fundamentally
upon the feudal and centralized authority of the
Emperor. The representatives and nobility gain
their power in the constitution through him and
not from themselves or the people. Shiritoism,
or ancestor worship, Buddhism and Christianity
are the chief religions. Numerically their rela-

266 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

tive standing is as follows: Shintoism 766,685,
Buddhism 28,510,382, Christianity 140,208.
Telegraph and railway lines are owned by the gov-
ernment in Japan. The Japanese are naturally a
sea-faring people. The state has subsidized
steamship lines running to North America, the
coast of Eastern Asia and India. The navy is
the third largest in the world and the army has a
peace footing of 220,000 men, with a trained re-
serve in the first line of defense of half a million
men and, altogether, of fully a million men. Un-
der the present system this is expected to reach in
ten years about a million and a half.

Such is Japan, a nation aroused out of its sleep
since 1868, and, trained in a military way and in-
dustrially, now seeking its future on the face of the
great waters wherein its islands rest. Having in-
sufficient food supply for its surplus population,
Korea is seized. But Japan desires vaster terri-
tory in order to gain the raw materials for its
manufactures and thereby to supply the awaken-
ing peoples of Eastern Asia. An imitative and
not a creative nation, it would be difficult to com-
pete with the United States in the fields of pro-
duction peculiar to the latter until after imitation
of them. But seizing all of that territory, in
which the competition would be, it could impose
commercial restrictions upon this country's prod-
ucts which would close what has been known as

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 267

the "open door." Further than that, Japan de-
sires to impress its will and civilization upon the
entire Pacific and the nations bordering it. What
field more inviting than the rich and surpassingly
beautiful hills and valleys of California, where
30,000 Japanese already dwell *? The Japanese
government takes the position that its people are
equal to those of any other nation, and that the
United States should accept them as citizens on
equal terms, as holders of property in the same
right and as recipients of school privileges on equal
terms. These are questions which now remain in
status quo and may have to be again handled by
the Department of State, if not by the sword.

Facing Japan, on this side of the great ocean,
is the American people, loving liberty, ambitious
to sell its products in fair exchange to the Orient,
determined to maintain the same high standard of
wages and life as now. The time has come when
this people must expand on the waters where their
interests already lie by possession of the Philip-
pines and Hawaii. This will not be by further
taking of territory, and in the time to come both
those possessions will be restored to the people
who occupy them, but by argosies of magic sails
carrying American made goods, symbols of our
arts and crafts and productive soil, and the word
of freedom to all men, sent by wire and book and
paper. The Asiatic and the American do not amal-

268 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

gamate; that is, they do not intermarry, except in
rare cases, and the Asiatic does not accept of and
imbibe of methods of life in a land made of a com-
posite of all Caucasian bloods. He undersells
both our labor and our product. Japan desiring
the most alluring tract on the globe on the Pacific
Coast of North America as a further outlet for its
people and perhaps as a held of eventual con-
quest, hardly yet within the minds of Japanese
statesmen, and determined to become the com-
mercial and political conqueror of the marvelously
rich lands bordering the ocean, including Aus-
tralia, and the United States having its own ideals
and vital and expanding people, there must be a
contest for supremacy that will clear the air and
determine the entire future of the Eastern Orient
and Western Occident. This may come within a
few years. The reason for this is that with the
decline of the British Empire its voice on the
Pacific Ocean in protection of its interests in Aus-
tralia and Canada will be stilled, and then will
be the time for Japan to advance rapidly toward
what it conceives to be its destiny — the suzerainty
of the Pacific Ocean.

The outcome of this struggle cannot be in doubt.
The course of empire has always advanced west-
ward and not eastward, from Malay and Cathay
of old to Babylon, Nineveh and Egypt, to Greece
and Rome, to the lands of Western Europe, to re-

THE FUTURE OF THE PACIFIC 269

publican and democratic America. This in itself
would not be sufficient to defeat the ambitious
and energetic Japanese. More than theory is
required to do that. But the Japanese people
have not the blood, the strength, the stature to
compete with the virile Americans. And there
are lying dormant but ready to be awakened the
marvelous resources of the United States. While
the population is but one-half, the military train-
ing of the Japanese is at present so far superior to
that of our own people as to be beyond compari-
son. This country has no ambition upon the Pa-
cific other than what the name of the ocean itself
implies. But when the Japanese attempt to im-
pose their will upon the Coast people who seek to
protect their civilization from the unassimilable,
or shut America out of Asia commercially, then the
dogs of war may be unleashed and the titanic con-
test commence. It will be such a war as this land
has never seen. It will arouse the American peo-
ple from the sickening cant of some who think the
United States can repose in silence and peace and
not do its mighty work in the world. It will help
to make this a nation of soldiers. Some of the
greatest leaders of all time will appear when the
battle drums roll. It will result in the utter
demolition of the Japanese Empire, in loosening
such shackles as it may have imposed upon the
Asiatic Continent, in the confining of the rem-

270 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

nant of the Japanese after expansion within their
own islands, and in the freeing for the future of
the nations and countless generations to come upon
the broad expanse of the Pacific for the ideals
and aspirations but not the conquering sword of
a republic of free men. This in the ages to come
will be the benefit derived from the United States
by the soul of '49 upon its western shores.

CHAPTER X

THE ATLANTIC OCEAN AND SOUTH AMERICA

"The sea has its duties and offices to perform ; so, we
may infer, have its currents, and so, too, its inhabitants;
consequently he who undertakes to study its phenomena
must cease to regard it as a waste of waters." — Maury.

As during the past four hundred years the move-
ment begun by the daring of the spirit of Colum-
bus resulted, on the sea along which he sailed west-
ward, in constant discovery and development and
a succession of the maritime empires of Spain,
Portugal, Holland, France and Britain, so now
are gathering forces on that ocean which may
eventuate in a mightier struggle than that which is
taking place at the present time in Europe.

Spain built in the New World a dominion

which survived it long beyond the period of its

greatest strength. It gave laws, institutions and

religion to South America and the lower portion

of North America. Portugal, spreading out,

planted its masterpiece of colonization in Brazil,

a country larger in extent than the United States.

Its imprint and that of Spain are so similar, ex-

271

272 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

cept in language, that they may be said to be one.
The Dutch founded New Amsterdam, only to have
it taken away from them and named New York,
and left but a trace of territory in Dutch Guiana.
Frenchmen took Canada and explored the Missis-
sippi, finally giving the Code Napoleon to Louisi-
ana, where it remains as the fundamental law of
the State of that name. Their vast possessions
were either seized by the British or purchased by
the United States, leaving the English common
law and representative institutions to have perma-
nent influence upon the North American conti-
nent. Questions of sovereignty had long since
been settled in the Western Hemisphere when
Africa, almost unknown until 1850, was discov-
ered and colonized, in this process the Germans,
Belgians and Italians joining the older colonizing
nations. Now the greatest of those people which
have contributed so much to the past of struggle
and mighty adventure, in an epic of the human
race on what is the greatest of the oceans in his-
toric activity, are testing by powder and shot
which shall survive and give new life to the world,
and which shall pass away in influence and power
forever.

From the nearer glance of prejudice and ties of
motherland this combat seems one of titans, but
when one regards the fighting as a part of the proc-
ess of history and realizes that, even though several

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 273

years may be required to work out the result, the
healthy and vital organism alone survives, he sees
that there is but one titan, and that is Germany.
This is the land which has planted half a million
of its people in Brazil, taken over German East
and West Africa, given 25,000,000 of citizens to
this republic, and was rapidly forging ahead by
method and energy in attaining commercial su-
premacy when a shot at Serejavo put an abrupt
end to its peaceful expansion. In the event of
British fleets being destroyed and British, French
and Italian armies beaten in the field, Africa being
eventually taken over by the Germans, and the
energies of the latter people, stimulated by war,
again turned to commerce, there will come a new
life and a more spirited struggle upon both the
North and South Atlantic Oceans. That contest,
which will not be settled for a generation, will be
between the German Empire and the United States.
Africa, assumed to be a German colony, will
have restrictions placed upon its commerce, how-
ever slight, which will place trade with the United
States at a disadvantage, but it ma)^ be consid-
ered as an immense prize and as having potentially
an important influence upon the future of the At-
lantic Ocean. Negroes, Bushmen and Aborigines
inhabit the interior. In the northeast are
Egyptians and Abyssinians and in the north the
Arabs and Berbers. The principal staple of food

274 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

of these latter is dates. South of the narrow
fringe of territory along which they subsist are the
deserts of Sahara and Gobi. It is not until their
lower limits are reached in Central Africa that the
flora and fauna which are to supply the coming
ba^is of civilization in Africa commence. In that
region are to be found tracts of forest for the de-
velopment of rubber, many kinds of woods, and
rich agricultural, grazing and mineral lands.
Since the war began the diamond and gold deposits
have ceased their output. Subsistence by farming
alone remains. In the past the United States has
had considerable trade, especially in agricultural
machinery, with South Africa. That this will
grow at the conclusion of the conflict is likely,
but it may be presumed that the German manu-
facturers in Germany itself would be favored as
much as possible should German territory in-
crease.

The remarkable change that would thus come in
Africa, and have a far reaching effect upon the
four continents facing the Atlantic Ocean, would
be away from the present exploitation of negroids
for the benefit of the nations which hold territory
in what has been known as the Dark Continent to a
great civilizing force in the hands of an empire
equipped to develop the lands from the Mediter-
ranean to the Cape, economicall)^ physically, edu-
cationally, politically. Such a vital and energetic

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 275

empire working in Africa would transform the
continent in a few years. Africa would then be
prepared to take a part in the affairs of the world
such as it has never held in human history. This
would not be merely of an aggressive political
character, as in the days of Egypt, Carthage and
the Caliphate, but of a commercial nature.
Transform by the railroad, electricity and modern
machinery, as well as by education and the tech-
nical arts, the vast tracts where Livingstone and
Stanley explored, and, at the rate of present
human progress, a hundred millions of people
would be added to the creators and users of the
earth's goods.

At the conclusion of the prolonged conflict now
being waged in France, Italy, the Balkans and
Russia the nations of Europe will not longer be
great colonizers, with the exception of Germany.
South America cannot be utilized in this respect
because of the Monroe Doctrine. Neither can
Africa, if in the hands of the victor. The same
limitation applies to Australia and India. With
Japan seizing Eastern Asia, as it gave every evi-
dence of intending to do when presenting de-
mands which meant the relinquishment of sover-
eignty by China, room for seizure of territor)^ in
that direction under one philanthropic pretext or
another would cease altogether. For the present
belligerent colonizing nations, which have strug-

276 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

gled and gained colonial supremacy in the past,
to compete further is out of the question; they will
be exhausted. After having exerted itself to the
utmost and passed into decay, a state never returns
to conquering strength unless it should have a fresh
and extended transfusion of blood. For the
reason that every power in Europe, with the single
exception of the German Empire, has had its time
of expansion, it may be concluded that, with the
defeat of the older peoples, the virile nation ruled
over by William II will have paramount power on
the continent. That being true, Germany will
not be compelled to prepare for a fresh coalition
against it, but, maintaining a dominant influence,
will turn its attention in other directions. It will
become a great manufacturing nation, drawing the
raw material from its vast colonies to feed its in-
dustries. It will do more; it will seek to gain the
commercial supremacy of the world. "Made in
Germany" will mean more than in the past, be-
cause of the larger resources of a greater empire.
Steel, machinery and every commercial product of
Germany will be utilized in Africa and wherever
it may possess land. Emigration will cease except
to its own new fields of exploitation. In South
America will be found an inviting market for sur-
plus production. Looking toward unlimited
means of enhancing German prosperity, the seizure
of Africa, Australia and even of India, together

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 277

with great influence in Europe, the addition of
South America to its peaceful conquest with Ger-
man goods would go far toward the attainment of
the ultimate ideal. And in that continent the
chief commercial rivalry of Germany with the
United States may come.

South America now offers greater opportunity
for quick and extended development than any
similar expanse on the earth. It has the fertile
valleys of the Amazon and Parana. The interior
is almost unknown. A great range of mountains,
with some of the highest peaks in the world, ex-
tends north and south almost the entire extent of
the continent. In this are deposits of the pre-
cious metals which made rich the Spanish grandees
of old, with other minerals of every kind, and
enough coal in Chili to supply Latin republics
for some time. Vast sweeps of grassy plains give
ample means for cattle grazing and farming. Al-
ready Argentina is one of the leading wheat pro-
ducing nations, the principal coffee supply of man-
kind is raised in Brazil, and rubber is a principal
crop of a territory like that of the United States.
Areas of timber lands similar to those to be found
in North America a century ago await the hand of
man to cut them. These include mahogany and
other hard woods. Argentina is an important ex-
porter of meats and hides. Sugar and tobacco are
promising crops. Some of the richest soil on the

278 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

globe is to be had for the asking. Means of com-
munication are primitive in the greater portion of
the continent, but, in those sections where popula-
tions has required it, modern transportation facili-
ties have been provided. No long trunk line of
railway runs north and south, however, and none
crosses South America at its widest point.

That South America will become, in the course
of the next half a century, one of the greatest agri-
cultural producers may be judged from its tremen-
dous virgin resources. The Amazon River is navi-
gable for 2,200 miles and is 3,300 long. At the
point of entrance into Brazil it is two miles in
width and at its mouth is 150 miles from shore to
shore. Together with its tributaries, it forms the
largest river system in the world. To-day there
are in Brazil alone 23,070,969 people. Less
than half are of white blood, and of these
some are mixed with Indian and negro strains.
A third are half breeds and the balance pure negro
and Indian. Portuguese is the language spoken
and the basic stock is of that descent. Half a
million Germans are in the State of Rio Grande dc
Sul and as many Italians in San Paulo. Yet with
so large and fertile an area Brazil could easily sup-
port 150,000,000 people. As railway lines are
extended and the Amazon becomes a scientifically
improved system of internal waterways, carrying
commerce back and forth in the interior, Brazil

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 279

will become one of the chief marts of the world.
It already has what is perhaps the finest of all har-
bors at Rio de Janeiro. Argentina, situated in a
temperate zone, contains farming and grazing pos-
sibilities which are being rapidly utilized.
Columbia, with an area two and a half times the
State of Texas, has a population of 5,076,000,
mostly mixed white and Indian. Pure whites
comprise less than ten per cent, of the total. With
the Panama Canal in near proximity, it offers fine
opportunities for exploitation in agriculture,
minerals and timber. In the small country of
Ecuador, with an area of 116,000 square miles,
the 1,500,000 people are mostly Indians and half
breeds; only 200,000 are estimated to be pure
whites. In British, French and Dutch Guiana the
people are mostly negroes. Those of Uruguay, on
the contrary, are almost entirely pure Spanish and
Italian. Though the smallest country of South
America, with an area less than Nebraska, the for-
eign trade of that country in live stock and agri-
cultural products exceeds $100,000,000, and is
second only to Argentina, Brazil and Chili.
Venezuela, with 2,743,000 people in a territory
of 394,000 square miles, has potentialities depend-
ent upon the Panama Canal and the development
of the Caribbean Sea region. The total popula-
tion of South America is 49,000,000. The con-
tinent is capable of sustaining 300,000,000 easily.

28o THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Though it has a very large supply of water-
power and an abundance of coal and iron, South
America has only latent possibilities for manufac-
turing. Agricultural products are exported north-
ward and eastward. The principal manufac-
tured articles are exchanged for those from the
United States, Germany and the United King-
dom. In thirteen years the value of these im-
ports from the former increased from $38,337,-
667 to $145,724,022. It will be some time,
a generation perhaps, before the inner recesses
of the great expanse of land is discovered and
brought to cultivation. This process will be
more rapid than in the case of the United States
because of the world's development of transporta-
tion, electricity and machiner}^ But were the eco-
nomic condition different, the people would still
be held back by the fact that most of them are still
of one blood, so far as any true amalgamation is
concerned, and are lacking in the vital energy to
be found in the United States. The largest pro-
portion of the inhabitants are Spanish, Portu-
guese and Italians, of the European stocks, and ne-
groes and Indians of the remainder. Each of
them has remained for the most part distinct.
Falling into old Spanish ways in education, re-
ligion and life, and conducting commercial affairs
largely on a social basis, the people who have im-
migrated to build new lands have not had the same

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 281

hardihood, initiative and quick perception of the
American pioneer. Made up of races of mild
climates in Europe, which had their day of greatest
expansive power several centuries ago, the South
Americans look at life from a different viewpoint.
Easier means of livelihood and the accentuation
of purpose upon enjoyment rather than ambition
are more apt to be the rule. At the conclusion of
the present war there will undoubtedly be a big
influx to new possibilities and fields of production
in the Latin-American continent from the southern
lands of Europe especially, and perhaps from cen-
tral and northern Europe as well. If there could
be a great admixture of all the races of Europe in
South America, as has been the case in the conti-
nent to the north of it, and if the climate of Brazil
were cooler, there might be a hope that another
mighty race like the Americans would come into
being in the valley of the Amazon and the Argen-
tina Republic. But such, in the nature of things,
will not be the case. The French, English, Rus-
sians and Scandinavians have done most of their
peopling in other lands.

The Germans in Brazil will probably remain as
they are, with natural additions and slight accre-
tions from the Fatherland. The Irish have chosen
but one land of adoption. Immigration to South
America, then, will continue to be largely confined
to the peoples from the southern half of the Euro-

282 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

pean Continent, who take the line of least resist-
ance in language and climate. The latter is a
great drawback to the quick development of South
America, especially in manufacturing. The Ama-
zon runs almost parallel with the Equator, and
nearly all of Brazil is situated in a zone exactly
similar to that from the great central line to the
southernmost limits of Mexico. The latitude of
49° south, which corresponds to the northern
boundary of the United States, falls in the lower
part of Patagonia, almost at Cape Horn. The
rays of the sun subdue the haste of man. In
Argentina and Chili alone it is possible to build,
so far as the climatic conditions are concerned, a
great people in South America. Also lack of
skilled labor will retard growth. As nature does
for man in a tropical country what his energies do
not permit him to do, it also takes away initi-
ative for manufacturing and leaves him dependent
for such products upon his hardier neighbors.
The great manufacturing nations of the world have
been those with the most abundant energy.

That South America is prepared for speedy de-
velopment of population and trade with other
continents is evidenced by the fact that the govern-
ments of the several nations of that immense do-
main are more stable than formerly. From the
time of the throwing off of the yoke of Spain, un-
der Simon Bolivar in 1821, until a few years ago,

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 283

revolutions and dictators followed each other in
rapid succession. Tyranny was often exercised
under the name and form of a republic. Corrup-
tion and favoritism thrived. Privileges were bar-
tered. But in the course of the last generation has
grown up a more orderly condition. Life and
property have become more secure. As none of the
fears on the part of the South American States of
future aggression by the United States is justified,
and as the land of Washington and Lincoln has
vouchsafed to each of them protection against
European aggression under the doctrine promul-
gated by President Monroe, it may be concluded
that government by the people has permanently
taken possession of all South America.

With Germany determined to become the prin-
cipal trading nation on the Atlantic Ocean, and
therefore to enhance its position in South America,
where it stood second only to Great Britain before
the war, it becomes the duty of the United States
to take advantage of this war to prepare a mer-
chant fleet adequate to meet the demands of a
growing commerce. This aim should be assisted
by the establishment of American banks and
branch houses in South America, the teaching of
Spanish and German for two years each, instead
of four years of classical Latin, in every high
school in this country, and the adaptation of sales
methods to South American habits, customs and

284 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

needs. There was a time before our own Civil
War when the United States had a merchant
marine that meant something in the world's give
and take on the high seas. This was then an agri-
cultural nation. Its people were frugal. Their
wants were simple. Their standard of living was
on a par with their rivals in shipping. But during
the Civil War the greater number of American bot-
toms disappeared, and then, with the enhancement
of manufactures and a much higher standard of
wages and living, it became more difficult to com-
pete with foreign ship rates, because of the ad-
vantage to the marine of other countries of lower
wages. To regain the position formerly held by
the United States in the ocean carrying trade, it is
imperative not only that ship building be stand-
ardized to single patterns for equal size, but that
cargoes to distant points be subsidized to such an
extent as would not enrich the many at the expense
of the few, but cover the disproportion between the
cost of maintenance at home and abroad, as in the
case of the tariff. After the war a system of dis-
criminating duties against goods imported in for-
eign bottoms might be an alternative, but in that
case the nations flying their respective flags on
those bottoms might retaliate, as they did when
they forced France to abandon such duties. The
question then resolves itself into this: What
benefit would be derived by this country from hav-

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 285

ing its trade carried in its own bottoms and under
its own flag"? The answer is that a foreign flag,
carrying its own captain and seamen and its own
cargoes principally, and those of the United States
only incidentally, is much more interested in its
own trade than in ours. Shipping has always car-
ried civilization in an awakened desire for goods,
customs and even institutions. This has been so
with Tyre, Greece, Rome, Venice, Portugal, Spain,
Holland, France and Britain. The earth is cov-
ered with a net work of wires to-day, and the same
prominence is not given to the arrival of a vessel
in port as in former times, but the principle sur-
vives and undoubtedly has an effect upon trade.
Those who have seen the benefits of the protective
tariff, without its abuses, believe that a mild and
just subsidy would stimulate our foreign com-
merce. The amount should not be agreed upon
haphazard, but after thorough governmental in-
vestigation.

To protect the commerce thus developed the
United States should have a fleet as great if not
greater than any other in the world. If liberty is
worth while, it is worth protecting by an adequate
navy. This country should have no desire for
conquest outside of its natural territory on the
North American continent. But it must be pre-
pared to uphold the Monroe doctrine against any
nation that might attempt to menace it. Ameri-

286 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

can inventions, secretly patented and paid for by
the government, should assist in the building of
such a navy. Battleships, cruisers and submarines
of adequate number should be ready to carry out
the destiny of the United States on both oceans.

With the close of the conflict in Europe, men
and women in all the countries embroiled will turn
their attention again to peaceful pursuits. Six
per cent, of casualties resulted in 1870. In this
war they may amount to ten per cent., which
would be a tremendous death rate considering the
large numbers engaged on both sides. The re-
maining 90 per cent, will take up the vocations
they learned before the clash of arms began, or
such new ones as economic necessity may demand.
Women, having entered the field of industry, will
make an additional productive asset. Indeed,
they will more than make up for the losses sus-
tained in the several years of struggle. All the
method and systematic effort utilized by entire na-
tions for war purposes will be turned to manu-
facturing, agriculture and other forms of industry
and commerce. The result will be an intensified
production, just as there was after the Civil War
in the United States and the War of 1870 in both
Germany and France. The more intensified the
production, the greater will be the demand for
foreign markets. For a time wages will be lower
than before the conflict began, the costs of pro-

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 287

duction will be less, and the consequent lower prices
for manufactured articles should make it more dif-
ficult for us to compete. Hence the even greater
necessity for the development of American markets
in South America to the utmost at once, while in-
dustry in Europe is still largely paralyzed.

With the exception of Germany, and perhaps
Russia, the population of Europe will in all proba-
bility remain about stationary, the expansion of
the present peoples having already taken place.
The Italians are a prolific race and as emigration
continues to South America and California it is
likely that their numbers will be resupplied.
Should 28,000,000 of Germans emigrate to the
lands conquered by it, and 20,000,000 of the in-
habitants of other European countries take ship
to find larger opportunities in North and South
America and Australia, there would still be made
up in a generation the numbers lost. With room
for a quarter of a billion more persons in South
America, 200,000,000 more in Africa and 150,-
000,000 more in the continent of North America,
it is idle to lessen immigration by a literacy test
into this country, about to spread out and take
Canada and Mexico, though Congress has so de-
creed. Character is the true test, and this the
pioneers who have come to these shores in cease-
less streams have had in abundance, or soon de-
veloped it under our representative institutions.

288 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Facing each other on either side of the Atlantic
Ocean will be two mighty opposing forces. On
the western side, in both North and South Amer-
ica, have been built up in the course of a century
republican institutions which have withstood the
trial of war and civil strife. When Canada has
been added to the United States, no lands in the
Western Hemisphere will be left subject to the
rule of a foreign potentate, with the exception of
British and Dutch Guiana, a very small remnant
of once expansive territories which 150 years ago
resounded with the lash over the slave, the ex-
ploitation of the native by those in clerical au-
thority and the clash of king contending with
king for supremacy. By an international doctrine
made by President Monroe, the ties between them
became more and more interlinked, the sincerity
of that protectorate being proven by this Republic
taking over Cuba for a time and then giving it
freedom again. In a few years there should be
built, mainly by the people of the United States, a
great intercontinental Pan-American railway run-
ning down both sides of the Northern Continent
from Alaska and New Foundland to Panama and,
branching out again along the east and west coast
of South America, to a grand terminus in Pata-
gonia. This project, long contemplated, will unite
the two continents commercially as never before,
but not politically. It may be that with similar

ATLANTIC AND SOUTH AMERICA 289

interests of blood and language the individual re-
publics of South America will unite in one state,
as in North America. However, as some of them
are separated by natural barriers and have main-
tained separate identity so long, such a process
must necessarily be postponed.

On the eastern side of the Atlantic Ocean ap-
pear two great continents, both, for the most part,
composed of monarchies, or subject to monarchy,
and the greatest possessor of territory within the
Continent of Europe an absolutism. The govern-
ment of some of these states have been modified by
constitutional principles ; others, as Spain and Aus-
tria, have remained imbedded in the mud of the
past. In Africa the Berber is as he has been since
the decline of the Caliphate, an ignorant nomad.
Further to the south an hundred millions of deni-
zens of the forest toil under an equatorial sun,
subject to the will of European potentates. Only
in South Africa, in the temperate zone, has a civi-
lization developed which may be accounted new
and promising. That, too, is subject to the juris-
diction of kings. This underlying condition of
monarchy, and peoples, subordinated to the will
of sovereigns throughout both continents, will,
with the triumph of German arms, have one stout
exponent to defend it, the last and greatest of the
monarchies.

CHAPTER XI

GERMANY AGAIN

"Though the mills of God grind slowly, yet they grind

exceeding small ;
Though with patience He stands waiting, with exactness

grinds He all." — Sinngedichte.

Germany has the strength to win the present
war, and should do so in order that it may accom-
plish its work in advancing civilization; yet the
empire carries within it the causes of its ultimate
destruction. Every organism in nature contains
the germ of its own decay. As a man developing
to the fulness of his manhood also has in his
blood that which leads him by steady processes to
the grave, so a nation which may be engaged in
crushing decadent opponents, has in itself that
which will deprive it in its turn of suzerainty and
power. To examine the course the German Em-
pire will take at its apogee and the reasons for its
declension to its final end is the purpose of the
present chapter.

That this empire at the utmost limit of its effi-
ciency will be content with anything less than vast

290

GERMANY AGAIN 291

dominion is not to be conceived, any more than
Macedon under Alexander, Rome under Trajan,
the Caliphate under the Abassids, the Empire of
the West under Charlemagne, the Mongols under
Jenghis Kahn, the Berlas under Timur, Spain
under Charles V, Britain under Chatham, Russia
under Catherine, or France under Napoleon.
Germans are proud of their civilization, with its
science, education and art, and of the strength of
their arms. According to the law of blood, cer-
tain to win in the present conflict, it naturally fol-
lows that the same aggressive spirit will arouse a
desire that their civilization pervade all peoples.
That the vital German organism is far superior to
the decadent Russian, British, French and Italian
ones is amply proven by heroic victories and by
the reasons touched upon earlier in this work.
But whether it would be best for Germany to be
the world force of the future is another question.

Probably no nation in history ever made such
rapid progress as may be expected within the Ger-
man Empire after this war. Every trained re-
source will be turned to the development of in-
dustry. It may be taken for granted that the Ger-
man government will assist to the fullest extent
the efforts of its merchants to gain world trade.
As before the conflict it assisted its shipping in
order to meet competition and shaded its tariffs to
offset those of foreign states, so it may be believed

292 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

it will do in the future. Then it was second in the
commerce of the earth and was rapidly gaining
upon Great Britain. With the latter out of the
way, it will have in the near or distant future" one
serious rival — the United States. It will attempt
to undersell and underbid, as great corporations
of the United States have often sold far beneath
their home prices in order to get business. And
with cheaper labor and raw material it will have a
natural advantage. This may be overcome to
some extent by the creative resource of the people
of the United States. And to overcome it the
manufacturers and merchants of this country will
be compelled to aim in great measure to please the
taste as well as the wants of other peoples, whether
it be in Europe, Africa, South America or the
Orient. In machinery, dyes, cutlery and novelties
German competition must be met by new indus-
tries developed in the United States. The genius
of America is invention. That should provide the
means.

So long as the present Kaiser lives Germany
will thrive. The reason for this is plain. The
institutions of the country were formed for a
strong central authority. In the hands of an ag-
gressive personality like Bismarck, who shaped
them to give scope to his capacity, and of an able
potentate like William II, who will develop his
kingdom to its utmost limits under them, they

GERMANY AGAIN 293

have worked for the benefit of the empire as a
whole and hence indirectly for the advantage of
all men. The Kaiser has absolute control of the
army and navy and has expended his utmost effort
and treasure to extend them to their utmost effi-
ciency. He alone makes treaties of peace. He
appoints the chancellor, who is the sovereign's
mouthpiece and head of the administrative system,
as Bismarck intended he should be, and is respon-
sible to him alone. He names the committees on
the army, navy and fortresses in the Bundesrat, the
less numerous body of the legislature. He alone
enters into alliances and makes treaties with for-
eign countries. He has the right to appoint
through the chancellor and dismiss at will all im-
perial officials, including those in the diplomatic
and consular, post and telegraph services. In all
fundamental ways the responsibility for the gov-
ernment of the state rests upon the man who is at
the same time King of Prussia and German Em-
peror.

This entire system of centralized authority,
working in thorough administrative and legal de-
tail, is closely akin to that of the Roman Empire.
Any difference lies in the development of the
Kaiser's realm to suit the needs of the modern
world. As the Roman officials worked under the
direct control of the Emperor, so do they in Ger-
many to-day. As the Roman Senate had no final

294 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

authority, so the Bundesrat is selected by the states
of the empire and is partially under control of the
Kaiser. The Reichstag, elected by the people,
while having more authority than the ancient
body, is in the same general sense subject to the
will of the sovereign. That authority rests
hereditarily in the family of HohenzoUern. As
in Rome the throne was upheld by the army, espe-
cially the Pretorian guard, and the monarch there-
fore sought to propitiate the cohorts by dotations
and other favors, so in the German Empire the
Emperor, realizing that his chief dependence is
upon the army and navy, propitiates them; with
this variation, that in Germany the Kaiser and
both arms of the service have the hearty support
of the people. As consols, prsetors, sediles,
tribunes and questors were subordinated to the
higher central authority of the princeps, so all the
administrative system of modern Germany is sub-
ject to the will of the Emperor. In both cases a
bureaucracy existed for all practical purposes.
The pandects of Justinian have this to say:
"The pleasure of the Emperor has the vigor and
effect of law, since the Roman people by the royal
law have transferred to their prince the full extent
of their own power and sovereignty." As Gibbon
remarks, "The will of a single man, or a child per-
haps, was able to prevail over the wisdom of ages
and the inclination of millions."

GERMANY AGAIN 295

This centralization of authority was for a time
highly beneficial to the Roman people. Harbors,
roads, bridges were built, waste lands were re-
claimed, commerce was regulated and encouraged,
loans were advanced to the farmers at small inter-
est upon the security of their land, and the finances
of the Empire were supervised by trained adminis-
trators. So it is in Germany, where under a great
bureaucratic system every agency of the com-
monwealth has been utilized for the benefit of the
citizens. Internal improvements in the building
of harbors, military roads and post and telegraph
communication has gone on with the highest effi-
ciency. Deep waterways and canals have aided
commerce. Tariffs have regulated it. Public
sanitation and other rules for the furtherance of
health, order and obedience to the police power
have restricted the lives of men. Transplanted
across the Alps in new soil throughout many cen-
turies of interacting relations between Italy and
Germany, that jurisprudence of the Romans
wherein the state was everything and the indi-
vidual comparatively nothing, has found its coun-
terpart in Germany. And none will contend that
its effects have been less beneficial for the time
being to the average of citizenship. Also in their
colonial policy of treating the peoples under their
sway as a part of the great machine for develop-
ment, these ancient and modern empires are simi-

296 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

lar, as evidenced by German East Africa and
Kiou Chou. The Romans were not among the
great colonizing nations. Maritime genius did
not come to them as a gift, as it did with Phoenicia
and Greece. Nor have the Germans been among
the colonists of the modern period, as Portugal,
Spain and Great Britain. Germany has taken
over its extensions of territory by force and held
them for its development and their own. New
lands thus conquered, as Alsace-Lorraine and
Poland, have been transformed by method and
scientific administration.

It was said by a celebrated historian that no age
in the history of the world was so peaceful, orderly
and happy as that of the Antonines. Then the
good emperors reigned. Hadrian was succeeded
by Trajan, and he by Antoninus Pius and Marcus
Aurelius. All four were famed for statecraft,
soldierly qualities and moral principles. The
public welfare was their sole aim. The ideals
of Plato and Aristotle of centralized authority in
the hands of a good man were highly exemplified.
But that same authority when placed in such suc-
cessors as Commodus, Pertinax, Caracalla and Al-
exander Severus gave the people who inhabited the
empire hideous examples of injustice and infamy.
Without the check of a strong legislature or an
independent judiciary, based upon popular sup-
port, their own will made the government. In

GERMANY AGAIN 297

the long line of emperors that followed it was
only an occasional man of genius, armed with su-
preme power, who restored anything of the great-
ness of the Roman name. Thus it is with the
German Empire. In the hands of a wise, strong
and essentially good man, like William II, the en-
tire body of subjects reaps the ripest benefits of
intelligent rule. The legal avenues between him
and them are unimpeded by intermediary author-
ity not within the scope of his will. The ablest
citizen of a great state, he guides it through the
time of its zenith. Because he expresses their
highest ideals, he is the leader as well as the king
of the German people. But upon his death,
should his power descend to a less competent, wise
and efficient monarch, the entire system of ad-
ministration, so praiseworthy now, will become
the engine for cruelty and oppression. And
should that authority be placed in the hands of
an irresolute, selfish, headstrong, egotistical son,
believing it to be the destiny of Germany to make
the world like itself, the result would be unpro-
voked wars upon the flimsiest pretexts in order
to attempt to surpass the glory of his fathers'
as well as internal corruption and chaos.

At the present day, with the nation at its max-
imum, this does not seem possible for Germany.
But in the recollection of all the centuries that
have preceded the twentieth it not only becomes

298 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

probable but inevitable. William II is no better
than either of the four good emperors. The Em-
pire itself, to be mightiest of the modern world,
cannot surpass by contrast with its contemporaries
the grandeur that was Rome. Yet those poten-
tates were succeeded by bad ones, and the power
and authority of the Roman state passed into ob-
livion a millennium and a half ago. Spain,
France, Russia, all saw great rulers followed by
weak ones, who by their less vigorous character
assisted in the decline of power of their respective
peoples. The present crown prince of Germany
is not without virtues, but he does not appear to be
gifted with the powers of a Bismarck or his father.
He is impatient, dictatorial and has at times been
wanting in filial devotion. In his operations on
the western front of battle he has not distinguished
himself as a great military genius. No man can
transmit his spirit to his son. That son has his
own character which will prove itself, whatever
it may be, when the scepter of the Hohenzollerns
has descended to him. It is certain that the eldest
son of the crown prince and those who follow will
be weaker still.

Ridding itself by blood and iron of its rivals
in the several years required for the task, Ger-
many will become the highest expression of mon-
archy. Even now the authority of the sovereign
is there asserted as in few other countries on the

GERMANY AGAIN 299

globe. Resplendent in power in Europe and in
suzerainty over vaster dominion than at present
embraced within the limits of Great Britain, it
will stand as the greatest exponent of the prin-
ciple of the right of might to subject other races
and nations; in their turn vigorously asserted by
the Russians, French, Turks, Austrians and Eng-
lish. With harshness and hardness it may be ex-
pected it will exact what it considers to be its
destiny. Having gained its immense power over
men by the sword, it will lay stress upon powder
and shot as its weapons of achievement and will
seek to extend its dominion by them. This tend-
ency toward sinister disregard of human right
will be enhanced by the Germans themselves and
their institutions. The methodical efficiency of
the people has lent scope to paternalism and hence
to monarchy. Individuality and individual lib-
erty have been ground out in the process of mak-
ing the state a means of benefiting all men
through governmental machinery. Socialism
was born in Germany, and nowhere has its central
idea of a crushing tyranny of the majority had a
greater vogue than there. Organization of mili-
tary forces for the defense of the Fatherland
against possible invaders has helped to teach the
utmost respect for authority of superiors, whose
jurisdiction is accepted as a matter of course.
Men are regarded merely as cogs in the great ma-

300 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

chine. Haeckel among German thinkers expresses
the view of a strictly material evolution, in which
there is room for neither God nor spirit. All
these tendencies will be accentuated after the pres-
ent conflict. The belief will become general that
by men, horses, brains, cannon, powder, organiza-
tion of material forces of every kind, can victory
alone be won. German soldiers and civilians are
now held above this by the Kaiser, who in simple
humility bows before the All Wise King who rules
the world. But when directed by a less godly and
more materially minded man, Germany will wield
a mailed fist that will know no pity for subjected
commonwealths or remorse for rights removed.
Monarchy, abetted by national characteristics,
finds and will find its last word in the German
Empire.

In the attributes of its people, the forms of its
institutions and its highest ideals Germany is in
direct antithesis to the United States. Its rule
is that of monarchy. Ours is that of a republic.
In Germany individuals are subjected to a gen-
eral system for the good of all. In this country
leadership is the sum total of developed individu-
ality. There power rests primarily in the sover-
eign. Here the foundations of authority rest in
the people themselves. In Germany is nominal
control of religion by the state. In this land
every faith may thrive without molestation by

GERMANY AGAIN 301

any other, and without the least interference from
governmental authority. In the Empire there is
not only a differentiation of the population into
classes in the minds of men, but in fact as well.
An hereditar}^ caste usurps privileges given to an-
cestors. The Kaiser himself gains his throne solely
because he is the eldest son of his father. A gov-
ernmental or bureaucratic class is the natural out-
growth of the Germanic system of administration.
Laborers, expressing themselves through social-
ism, place themselves in a separate class. Cleri-
cal interests are -represented in the Reichstag. In
this country an opposite system prevails. Every
citizen contains within himself the potentiality of
sovereign or millionaire. No classes or privilege
exist. In Germany the soldier has a tendency to
command with his sword the respect which he is
led to believe is due him. Temporarily, at least,
he is apart from the people. In free America
the soldier of the time being remains simply a
part of the body of citizens. He has no king to
defend; only his country and fellow citizens.

One of these two systems of government must
perish from the earth. Germany is the epitome
of the one and the United States of the other.
From Babylon and Nineveh to Rome and thence
to the old Holy Roman Empire, ruled over by
Hauenstaufen, Swabian, Franconian and Saxon
emperors, to the Spanish Charles V, the House of

302 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Austria and finally the Hohenzollerns, the mo-
narchial traditions of the Empire are clear. Those
of America are drawn from the republics of
Greece, Rome, the free states and cities of the
Middle Ages, Holland, Switzerland and six hun-
dred years of development of constitutional gov-
ernment in England, from Magna Charta to the
Declaration of Independence. The constant con-
comitant of monarchy is subjection; that of a re-
public is freedom. Monarchy implies a limita-
tion of effort and opportunity and, in bad hands,
a menace to welfare. A representative govern-
ment like that of the United States provides limit-
less development of free spirits, subject only to
the order and law imposed by the people them-
selves.

If one of these systems alone can prevail, it will
be that which is best for humanity. That which
lends the fullest expression of life, breaks every
shackle in the way of betterment and gives promise
of a constantly increasing degree of happiness, con-
tentment and accomplishment in the future will
succeed in the gigantic struggle to take place in
the years to come between Germany and the
United States, It is likely that twenty years will
pass before that contest on the land and sea which
is to decide the fate of the world. Yet it is as
certain to come as that struggle develops character
or that Halley's comet will return to the view of

GERMANY AGAIN 303

the people of this planet in 1990. For the eventu-
ality of such a contest, as well as for the conquest
of the continent of North America and the defeat
of Japan's design to control the Pacific Ocean, the
citizens of the United States, black and white,
rich and poor, male and female, must prepare.
When it comes it will be enhanced by rivalry for
the trade of the world and for influence in all
spheres of activity, but perhaps by feelings of
horror and amazement against methods pursued
by the German Empire toward nations and indi-
viduals alike.

It would seem that at the close of the present
war, with blood and iron in the ascendent, Ger-
many will be in a better condition to contest the
influence and power of the United States than at
any other time. With vastly greater resources
than now and the tremendous advancement in in-
dustry in the years following the close of this con-
flict, the United States would not at first glance
appear to be able to withstand further German ag-
gression. But the German Empire during its
present mighty efforts to subdue its numerous de-
generate rivals will by the long and grueling proc-
ess have exhausted itself in attaining its widest
limits. Its supreme hour of victory will also an-
nounce that its supreme strength has been ex-
pended. It will have performed its greatest serv-
ice in doing away with the power outside their own

304 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

immediate borders of decrepit states. It will
reap the reward of dominance by prosperity and
the success of its message throughout the territory
conquered. But the blood of the German people,
having expended its strength, cannot withstand a
younger nation with a far greater transfusion and
therefore with much more strength. The Empire
will reap the reward of victory by the sword and
then pass away, as all other nations have pre-
viously done. With universal military service of
all of its youth of whatever color, race or creed
the United States will rapidly become the greatest
military nation the earth has ever seen. With in-
exhaustible materials at hand and a genius for in-
ventive capacity, it will surprise its opponents
with its arms, munitions and methods. The art
of war has constantly changed, as everything ex-
cept the human soul, during the five thousand and
more years of history. The American people will
contribute their new ideas to this field of human
endeavor, with the result of salvation of the earth
from tyranny, monarchy, privilege and caste.
The German legions of the future cannot prevail
over the armies of a free people, armed cap-a-pie
and led by men of genius. Those legions will be
ground to pieces and the German Empire will be
severed, dismembered and disappear.

The final test of the law of blood will come
when this people shall have reached their zenith

GERMANY AGAIN 305

after exactly three hundred years of transfusion of
blood, about 1938, and shall by the mighty power
of muscle, brawn and quickened energy give their
own message to the earth. Should this test be
precipitated by an attempt to overthrow the Mon-
roe doctrine, and to set up in South America the
jurisdiction of a successor to William II anxious
to overthrow liberty, the final victory would be
obtained only after much sacrifice. Our navy, it
must be insisted again and again, should be more
daring and efficient than any that has ever faced
hostile fleets on the seas. The battles on water
and land to determine whether the world of a bil-
lion and a half of souls shall be ruled by a useless
and capricious monarch, even though limited by
a constitution, or rule themselves through their
own representatives, will be fought against the
selfish vanity of king and empire and for the free-
dom of all men. That such a frightful catas-
trophe can occur on the planet, despite all the
lovers of peace everywhere, may be inferred from
the bitterness already engendered among large
masses of Germans and Americans against each
other. Much of this feeling is caused by a disre-
gard of the rights and motives of Germany on the
part of some Americans, and by a misconception
on the part of Germans that such disregard ex-
tends to all Americans. Though this may be
temporary, national prejudices when once started

3o6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

are difficult to allay and at a later time in any
crisis between the two states would be likely to
flame at once into hatred. This is especially true
where such nationalities are great rivals.

Germany has a destiny to fulfil in giving its
civilization to the peoples conquered. But hav-
ing accomplished that work, under so great an
emperor as William II, and having become ex-
hausted in the doing of the task, in the hands of a
weaker successor it may seek to contest the rising
prestige and power of the United States, asserted
in international politics, commerce and intellectual
achievement. That this country will be the
aggressor against Germany in policy is unthink-
able, because it is not the aim of a government of
free men to subject any of the States of South
America. It will, however, attempt to gain the
utmost trade there within the limits of fair mari-
time rivalry and to keep it in the face of any pres-
sure of any kind brought to bear from Europe.
To, any great empire constantly extending its
power by its strong right arm, the attempt of the
United States to set up an arbitrary limit to its
aggression and to state under the term of the Mon-
roe Doctrine that it shall not encroach farther
upon the territory or liberties of any republic in
South America, might seem the result of a mere
figment of the imagination of an earlier President
of a combination of States east of the Mississippi.

GERMANY AGAIN 307

It might be urged by any future chancellor of the
German Empire that such a doctrine is merely the
selfish design of a nation seeking to protect itself.
The test of whether it is selfish or for the good of
mankind to protect all of South America from
European aggression, so that republics and not
monarchies may endure in this hemisphere is to
be found in the aims of the people of the United
States. Their ideals lend full sincerity to the pur-
poses stated by Monroe. But the final proof of
the endurance of the doctrine is to be found in the
armies and the navy of the Great Republic.
They alone can maintain it against any power.
With England vanquished, there can be but one
empire which would seek to destroy the segis of
the United States in the Western Hemisphere.
That is Germany.

When such a conflict does come troops from
other nations may lend aid to each side, but the
future of the United States and the world will
depend upon the transfused blood of many
peoples into the one American stock. More men
will lay down their lives than ever before. In the
air, on the land and sea, under the water, across
the Atlantic and Pacific, in Asia and Europe, and
perhaps in South America and Africa the greatest
of all wars will be waged. Of that struggle
JDaniel spoke when he said, "there will come a time
of distress such as hath never been since the ex-

3o8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

istence of any nation." The magnitude of the
present world conflict will pale by contrast. The
reason for this will be that the fighting in the
Great Time will be done by peoples with mightier
energies than any that have preceded them.
Across continents and oceans the Stars and Stripes
will be borne, and always to ultimate victory.
The greatest of ambitions will be in the balance.
Racial antagonisms will be at fever heat. In-
vention and science will have contributed their
last effort to death dealing devices. The greatest
of stakes — world supremacy and liberty — will be
contended for.

And when it is over, when the last of the em-
pires has in its turn decayed and passed away, the
United States will give its message to a humanity
wearied by conflict. The Japanese and the Ger-
mans, the only two great peoples that have not yet
achieved their utmost, will then in the nature of
things have been vanquished. Exhausted men,
careworn women and tear-stained children will
long and hope for a new dispensation in which
there shall be surcease from sorrow and in which
there shall be found delight for the human heart.
Then it will be that free America will say: Let
there be no more war. Thus far and no further
shall the ambitions of nations and peoples go.
Let us make every human being on the globe free
from servility and woe. Let us do away with

GERMANY AGAIN 309

monarchy, privilege and tyranny, whether in the
name of religion or the state. Let us give to man
those blessings which were promised him by the
Almighty through the prophets of Israel in ancient
days. Let us melt down the states of the earth
and make them one great republic. Let us place
all religions in the crucible of criticism and expe-
rience, so that there may emanate from them a
common humanity and a common God.

CHAPTER XII

THE MAN

"Ah God, for a man with heart, head, hand,
Like some of the simple great ones gone
Forever and ever by.
One still strong man in a blatant land,
Whatever they call him, what care I,
Aristocrat, democrat, autocrat — one
Who can rule and dare not lie."

— Tennyson.

Every nation which has a stupendous labor to
perform produces a preeminent personality to do
it. The mightier the nation and the task the
greater the man seems to be to those who come
after him. The United States, having before it
the superlatively momentous work of history, will
give to the world the figure best equipped for it.

Leadership is as essential to the development of
humanity as vitalit)^ As the spirit guides the
body, so intelligence rules the earth. Genius is
only inspiration. History is the sum of the work
of human genius, of those inspired men through-
out the ages who have advanced the cause of man-

310

THE MAN 311

kind. They in all lands and climes have been
guided intuitively by the infinite intelligence of
God. The sublime messages of life are given
through individual men who are the simple serv-
ants of the Most High. Moses, Samuel, Isaiah,
David in Israel, Rameses and Thutmosis III in
Egypt, Alexander, Socrates, Aristotle in Greece,
Csesar in Rome, Hannibal in Carthage, Mahomet,
Mansur, Haroun in the Caliphate, Buddha in In-
dia, Confucius in China, Zoroaster in Media, Jus-
tinian and Heracleus in the Byzantian Empire,
Charlemagne in Francia, Columbus and Michel-
angelo in Italy, Magellan in Portugal, Cortez in
Spain, Charles V in Austria, Peter the Great in
Russia, Alfred, Shakespeare, the elder and )^ounger
Pitt in England, Napoleon in France, Luther,
Frederick the Great, Bismarck, William II in Ger-
many, Washington and Lincoln in America are
among the achievers of all time who have ad-
vanced humanity step by step to greater things.
Praxiteles, Lysippus, Pheidias, Polyclitus, Damo-
phon, Michelangelo, Piasno, Cellini, Bartolome,
Berini, Canova, Houdon, Gilbert, St. Gaudens,
Rodin, in sculpture; Scopus, Cossotus, Vetruvius,
Mucius, Rabirius, Ristori, Pontelli, Anthemus, Isi-
dorus, Bramante, Wren, Michelozzo, Inigo Jones,
Steindl, Wallot, Barry, Visconti and White, in
architecture ; Polygrotus, Micon, Pansenus, Zeuxis,
Parthasius, Protogenes, Leonardo da Vinci,

312 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Raphael, Rubens, Rembrandt, Velasquez, Van
Dyck, Henner and La Farge, in painting; Hippoc-
rates, Galen, Theophrastus, Herophilus, Erasistra-
tus, Isaac Ben Emran, Rhases, Avicenna, Kalid,
Valentine, Priestley, Lavoisier, Lister, Virchow,
Welch, in medicine; Hipparchus, Eratosthenes,
Ptolemy, Kepler, Copernicus, Newcombe, in as-
tronomy; Euclid, Newton, Liebnitz, in mathe-
matics; Archimedes, Hero, Gutenberg, Whitney,
Stevenson, Fulton, Bell, Edison, in invention;
Magellan, Vasco da Gama, Cook, Hudson, Peary,
in discovery; Othman, Albertus Magnus, Roger
Bacon, Humboldt, Darwin, in scientific investi-
gation; Socrates, Plato, Aristotle, Bruno, Kant,
Descartes, Spinoza, Comte, in philosophy; Ter-
tullian, Augustine and Luther in religious reform;
Homer, Pindar, Hesoid, ^Eschylus, Sophocles,
Euripides, Virgil, Horace, Ovid, Petrarch, Boc-
caccio, Montagne, Shakespeare, Lope de Vega,
Moliere, Corneille, Voltaire, Rousseau, Hugo,
Dickens, Tolstoy, Poe, in literature ; Demosthenes,
Cicero, the elder Pitt, Gladstone, Mirabeau, Peel,
Webster, in oratory; Herodotus, Thucydides,
Livy, Tacitus, Gibbon, Mommsen, Motley, in his-
torical composition; Moses, Hammurabi, Solon,
Lycurgus, Justinian, Charlemagne, Gregory VH,
Napoleon, Langton, Cromwell, Hamilton, Bis-
marck, in justice; Tribonian, Papinian, Thomas-
ius, Grotius, in legalism; Dana, Greeley, Bennett,

THE MAN 313

in journalism; Epaminondas, Don Juan, Tromp,
Drake, Nelson, Dewey, in naval warfare ; Croesus,
Crassus, the Medici, Contarini, the Fuggers, the
Rothschilds, Morgan, in finance and commerce,
have made their indelible imprint upon the life
of man. They and those like them, individuals
all, have brought humanity down to date. Sweep
away those who have labored and struggled singly
in leadership of their fellows throughout historic
life on the planet and man is back under a tree in
the forest, subsisting on the line of least resistance.
And without the individual help of those good
women who have been the wives and mothers of
the world, as well as those inspired feminine char-
acters who also assisted in the leadership of man-
kind, such as Semiramis, Cleopatra, Zenobia, Brun-
hilda, Isabella, Catherine, Elizabeth and Joan de
Arc, there would be trees but no men and the
planet would be unthinkable. All these mighty
spirits added to the conquerors and statesmen,
have fashioned the world we live in, wresting
something new in government, thought or material
out of old conditions to make them better.

Vitality, determination, opportunity, inspira-
tion provide the means by which the great men of
the world perform their deeds. They spring for-
ward for the occasion and seem to have been cre-
ated for it. In moments of supreme decision they
see more clearly than others what should be done

314 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and advance toward its accomplishment with as-
surance. Through boyhood and youth they give
evidence of uncommon and natural precocity.
They understand problems pertaining to certain
activities as though they had had long experience
in them. Their fellows, even in youth, appreciate
their abilities and give way to them. As they
grow older a glamor attaches to them. Men de-
light to know and follow them. This is due in
large measure to the fact that they utter the truth
and convince, or by the magnitude of their opera-
tions attain success, but also to what is known as
personality. In times of stress they realize them-
selves and express that which is the nature of their
being in deeds. It is then that clearest inspiration
comes to them. They feel that certain things are
or should be so. This is direct and immediate in-
tuition. Millions had seen apples fall, but when
Isaac Newton did so he perceived the law of gravi-
tation. Martin Luther said: 'T do not know
where my ideas come from." Napoleon said:
"No great general ever profited by experience in
war." His rivals said of him that he showed an
uncanny intuition on the battlefield. At twenty-
four Cavour wrote that he already saw himself
minister of the Kingdom of Italy. Mommsen
says of Csesar that ''his remarkable power of intu-
ition revealed itself in the precision and practical-
ity of all his arrangements, even when he gave or-

THE MAN 315

ders without having seen with his own eyes." ^
The prophets of Israel saw ages ago what would
come to pass in the hereafter. So far each one of
their visions capable of fulfilment up to this time
has been realized. All of them will be in time.

God is infinite intelligence, infinite individu-
ality, infinite personality. As man is in spirit
finitely, so God is infinitely. He is the Most
High, the Almighty, Lord of Lords and King of
Kings. He alone rules the universe. Force and
molecular energy are but His own laws. The
Everlasting One, the Eternal, holds within Him-
self all natures and things and understands the
minutise of worlds. Nothing is hidden from Him.
His will it is that rules the destinies of men. Je-
hovah knows the mind of every man, woman and
child. The most penetrating intellect oftentimes
only reflects His will. His is the divine plan for
the world. Is not this revealed in the beautiful
symbol of Nebuchadnezzar, brought low and
forced to eat the grass of the field in order that he
might see in his lost pride, as Daniel said, that the
rule of the Most High is over every generation?
As men through hardship and struggle are broken
to humility and the realization that they can gain
inner light and happiness only through kindness,
mercy and simplicity they are brought in harmony

^ "History of Rome," by Theodore Mommsen. Vol. IV, p.
424.

3i6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

with and therefore nearer to that apperception by
which they find surcease from difficulty and res-
toration of soul. Saint Augustine, turning from
his "fill of hell" and "fog of lustfulness," as he
termed them in his "Confessions," to the con-
templation and work of the Living God, became
the light of a thousand years. As one can see the
stars in the daytime only from the bottom of a
well, he can behold the truth more keenly in the
adversity which brings sorrow and unselfishness
into his heart. This is true of Saint Francis of
Assisi and all that royal line of mystics who have
discerned love of God in love of man. The truly
great have ever been as simple as Lincoln. But in
themselves they were not great. They only
seemed so. They were enabled to do great things
by their own initiative and that inspiration and
kindness which the Lord God vouchsafed to them.
"If God is with a man he cannot fail; if He is
against him he cannot succeed," said the leader
bom in a log cabin in Kentucky who was given the
task of freeing the slaves and saving the Republic.
Before every battle the mild and sensitive Wash-
ington, the "father of his country," knelt in
prayer. Alfred of England, one of the noblest
characters of human story and born to help lay
the foundations of a state, said: "As long as I
have lived I have striven to live worthily." He
longed when death overtook him to leave with the

THE MAN 317

men who came after him a remembrance of him in
good works. Canute, when told by his courtiers
that he could do anything, proved that he could do
nothing by taking his seat by the ocean and com-
manding the tide to stand back. Men in his day
thought the doings of Joshua so remarkable that
they declared he commanded the sun and moon
to stand still and that they obeyed, but those orbs
of night and day continued their revolutions heed-
less of those who thought, and he remained a
simple warrior, doing the work of his God. Mar-
tin Luther before deciding to face the diet at
Worms, where his life was endangered, went to an
upper room and there in prayer found that light
which told him he was to go, no matter what might
be the outcome. Socrates was scolded by his wife
as a "ne'er do we'el" because he persisted in argu-
ing with his fellows daily in order that he and
they might find new truth. When he died the
grandest death man ever knew, merely because he
had taught simple righteousness in opposition to
the formalism of the time, his wife and children
were there to bid him good-by, for he had loved
them and they had loved him. Yet he was the
"father of philosophy" and one of the world's
foremost thinkers. He fought as a hoplite for his
native land and was an intrepid soldier. Charles
the Great sought learning like the simplest scholar
at his court, attending school there when late in

3i8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

life. His favorite book, t±ie "City of God," was
always near him. Otto the Great in the same
way invited scholars to his capital. Alexander
the Great was the most companionable man in his
army and was great only in his love of glory and
accomplishment of it. This may also be said of
Caesar and Napoleon. When the first of the
Romans was about to cross the Rubicon and com-
bat Pompey for control of the Empire he strode up
and down for some time, undecided as to what he
should do. Then it suddenly came to him what
was best and he cast the die which was to lead to
civil strife and later a vaster Rome. Meneval
says ^ of the French Emperor that "he began to
dictate in a serious and emphatic tone, without
resting for a moment. As inspiration came to him,
his voice assumed a more animated tone. In
rendering his thought expressions came without
effort." Filson Young relates ^ of Columbus that
"there gradually grew in his mind the intuition or
conviction — I refuse to call it an opinion — that
over that blue verge of the West there was land to
be found. How this seed of conviction first
lodged in his mind it would be impossible to say."
And that "as that other mystery began to grow in
his mind, and that idea of worlds that might lie
beyond the sea line began to take shape in his

2 "Memoirs of Baron Meneval," Vol. I, p. 420.

8 "Christopher Columbus," by Filson Young. Vol. I, p. 76

THE MAN 319

thoughts, he found in the holy wisdom of the
prophets and the inspired writings of the fathers, a
continual confirmation of his faith." Andrew D.
White says ^ of Bismarck that ''his insight and
foresight seemed due to intuition — to sudden
flashes which lighted up his course and deter-
mined his conduct." It is this same Bismarck
who, in one of his letters to his wife, says: "Good-
night, my dear. It strikes twelve. I will go to
bed and read yet the second chapter of Saint
Peter. I do this now systematically, and after I
have finished Peter I am going to read the Epistle
to the Hebrews. There is no need of reminding
me to remember our dear little Mary in my
prayers. I do so every day." Oliver states ^ of
Alexander Hamilton that he was like a boy who
had dreamed a dream, but could not prevail with
men to accept it in all its glorious symmetry; that
he sought power, not as an end in itself, but as the
means to the accomplishment of a vision. Crom-
well declared he left Cambridge with a purpose of
self dedication ''to that same lot, however mean or
high, toward which time leads me and the will of
Heaven." Yet it was this same leader of the
British state who had said: "Oh, I lived in and
loved darkness and hated light. I hated god-

* "Seven Great Statesmen," by Andrew D. White. Vol. I,
p. 4x8.

5 "Alexander Haniilton," by F. C. Oliver, p. 12.

320 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

liness." ^ Mrs. Gladstone confided in John Mor-
ley that the Great Commoner succeeded in the
struggle for self mastery "ever since he was three
or four and twenty, first by the natural power of
his character, and second by incessant wrestlmg in
prayer — prayer that had been abundantly an-
swered." ^ David, kindly warrior and king of
Israel said: *'The Lord is my strength and my
shield; in him hath my heart trusted, and I am
helped." ^ "The sins of my youth and my trans-
gressions do not remember.^ How precious are
unto me thy thoughts, O God! I awaken and I
am still with thee." ^^ Jesus felt he had a mission
to perform. He spoke of the will of God as su-
preme and set aside ceremonial traditions. Paul
saw the vision of a more glorified humanity and
thenceforth lived for his fellow men.^^ These are
some of "the simple great ones, gone forever and
ever by."

It was because they were simple that they saw
and were helped by God. Insight came to them
because they sought his will. Consciously or un-
consciously, they placed themselves in harmony
with the Infinite Intelligence. "If the body has
many attributes of higher value than pleasure,"

« "History of the English People," J. R. Green, pp. 436-7.

■^ "Life of Gladstone," John Morley. Vol. I, p. 189.

8 Psalm 28:7.

» Ibid., 25 : 7.

^^Ibid., 139:18.

11 1 Cor. 15.

THE MAN 321

asks Cicero, "what, pray, think you of the mind?

The wisest sages of antiquity believed that the
mind contains an element of the celestial and di-
vine." ^^ Says Marcus Aurelius : "God is in man,
and so we must constantly attend to the divinity
within us, for it is only in this way that we can
have any knowledge of the nature of God." And
Agapetus: "He who knows himself will know
God; and he who knows God will be made like
to God ; and he will be made like to God who has
become worthy of God; and he becomes worthy
who does nothing unworthy of God, but thinks the
things that are His and speaks what He thinks and
does what He speaks." Isaiah says: "The Lord
eternal hath given me a tongue for teaching, that I
should know how to strengthen the weary with the
word. He wakeneth morning by morning, he
wakeneth my ear to listen like those that are well
taught." ^^ And David: "The day when I am
afraid I will still trust in thee. In God I have
put my trust; what can flesh do unto me'?" ^* And
again: "Cast thy burden upon the Lord and he
will sustain thee ; he will never suffer the righteous
to be moved." "Happy are they," says St. Au-
gustine, "who know it was Thou that gave the
command. For all things are done by them that
serve Thee, either for the providing of themselves

12 De Finibus, Book 2:114.
^^3 Isaiah 50:4.
** Psalm 56:4-5.

322 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

of what is needful for the present, or for the fore-
shadowing of something to come hereafter." *^
Smiles remarks : ^^ "Good sense disciplined by
practical experience and inspired by goodness is-
sues in practical wisdom. Indeed, goodness in a
measure implies wisdom — the highest wisdom —
the union of the worldly with the spiritual." St.
Bernard says: "To lose thyself in some sort, as
if thou were not, and to have no consciousness of
thyself at all — to be emptied of thyself and almost
annihilated — such is heavenly conversation — so to
be affected is to become God." ^^ In the Upan-
ishads this is found: "We salute Thee, spirit of
truth and cause of this universe. We salute
Thee, essence of wisdom and upholder of all that
is. Thou art the bestower of salvation and only
God, the one without a second; eternal and all-
pervading Brahma, we salute Thee." Devendra-
nath Tagore, regenerator of the thought of India,
says : ^^ From now I began to train m.yself to
listen for His command, to understand the dif-
ference between my own inclination and His will.
What seemed to me to be the insidious promptings
of my own desires I was careful to avoid; and
what appeared to my conscience to be His com-
mand, that I tried to follow. Then I prayed to
Him to inspire me with righteousness, to guard me

^5 "Confessions," Book 3:9, ^^ Ency. Brit., 19: 125.

^® "Character," p. 19. ^^ "Autobiography," p. 95.

THE MAN 323

with moral strength, to give me patience, courage,
fortitude and contentment. I could make out
that He was dwelling within me, seated within my
heart. Even as He, dwelling in the sky, guides
the stars and planets, so does He, dwelling within
my heart, inspire all my righteous feelings and
guide my soul." Says the Zend Avesta: "O maker
of the material world, thou Holy One I Which is
the first place where the earth feels most happy?
Ahura Mazda answered : It is the place whereon
one of the faithful steps forward, O Spitama
Zarathustra!'" The ^'Dham.mapada," or 'Tath
to Virtue," of Buddhism says: "The virtuous
man is happy in this world and he is happy in the
next. He is happy when he thinks of the good he
has done. He is still more happy when going on
the good path. When the learned man drives
away vanity by earnestness, he, the wise, climbs
tlie terraced heights of wisdom. All that we are
is the result of our thoughts ; it is founded on our
thoughts ; it is made up of our thoughts. A super-
natural person (a Buddha) is not easily found.
He is not born everywhere. Wherever such a sage
is born, that race prospers." Mahomet in the
Koran asks: "Dost thou not know that unto
God belongeth the kingdom of heaven and earth ^
Neither have ye any protector or helper except
God." In the ancient Asvaghosha Bodhisattva's
"Life of Buddha" the following appears: "By

324 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

earnestness and diligence, then, we conquer.
Walking in the path of true wisdom, letting go
both extremes, we then reach ultimate perfection."
Confucius, writing five hundred years before the
Christian era, says : "What you do not like when
done to yourself, do not do to others." Man's
nature was from God, he declared. The har-
monious acting out of it was obedience to the will
of the Most High, and the violation of it was dis-
obedience. He intimated that he had a mission
from heaven, and that, until it was accomplished,
he was safe against all attempts to injure him.
Said he: "It is impossible to withdraw from the
world, and associate with birds and beasts that
have no affinity with us. With whom should I
associate but with suffering man? The disorder
that prevails is what requires my efforts. If right
principles ruled through the kingdom, there would
be no necessity for me to change its state." Jesus
said : "My Father, He it is that doeth the work."
Moses said: "Hear, O Israel! The Lord, our
God, is the One Eternal Being. And thou shalt
love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with
all thy soul, and with all thy might. And thou
shalt do that which is right and good in the eyes of
the Lord, in order that it may be well with thee."
And again: "Love thy neighbor as thyself."
Gideon said: "I shall not rule over you, neither
shall my son rule over you: the Lord shall rule

THE MAN 325

over you." Hannah said: "Talk no more so
exceedingly proudly; let not arrogance come out
of your mouth ; for a God of knowledge is the Lord
and by him are actions weighed." Samuel said:
"Direct your heart unto the Lord and serve him
alone." ^^ This from Isaiah : 'T, I am the Lord,
and beside me there is no savior.^'' I am the
Lord and there is none else; beside me there is no
God.^^ Have I not said unto you that ye are all
sons of God? Let the wicked man forsake his
ways and the man of unrighteousness his thoughts ;
and let him return unto the Lord, and He will
have mercy upon him, and unto our God, for he
will abundantly pardon." This from Jeremiah:
"And I thought, My father thou wouldst call me
and from me thou wouldst not turn away." ^^
And from Ezekiel : "When I speak to thee I will
open thy mouth, and thou shalt say unto them,
Thus hath said the Lord Eternal." It was said
of Daniel that he excelled all the presidents and
lieutenants in the kingdom of Babylon because a
superior spirit was in him, and that no manner of
hurt was found on him because he had trusted in
his God.

Among philosophers, Kant expressed the view
that he who is permeated by the moral law is there-
fore obliged to believe in the existence of a God.^^

19 I Saml. 7:3. 21 /^,v.^ 45 : 5.

20 Isaiah 43:11. ^^ ]er. 3:19.

23 "History of Philosophy," Harold Hoffding. Vol. II, p. 95.

326 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Practical reason, he says, thus leads us to enter-
tain convictions concerning something which lies
beyond the limits defined by the theoretical reason.
Bruno, in a larger sense than is generally appreci-
ated, the founder of modern philosophy, is con-
vinced that the Deity works at the heart of the
world and is to be found at every point; that the
highest is everywhere if only our mind is open to
it. "Heaven," said Jacob Bohme three hundred
years ago, "is not up there in the sky, but it is here,
within thyself where the divine life stirs within
thee. God is not far; thou livest in God and God
in thee, and if thou art pure and holy, then thou
art God." Descartes said: "The natural light
teaches us that the effect cannot contain more than
is the cause. It follows from this that nothing
can come out of nothing, and that the perfect
cannot proceed from the imperfect. If we apply
this to our ideas it becomes clear that some of them
arise from external causes, while others must be
explained as arising within us. But neither of
these explanations is sufficient to make the idea
of God as the infinite being, the essence of all per-
fection and reality, comprehensible. Since I my-
self am a finite being (and of this I am convinced
by my doubts and my desires) I cannot have pro-
duced any such idea. Neither can it have arisen
by any combination of particular, perceived per-
fections, for it would not then contain the unity

THE MAN 327

and indivisibility which are the marks of the idea
of God. Moreover every external cause is finite.
There is, therefore, nothing left but to suppose
that God himself is the author of the idea." And
again : "Every transition of thought takes places
through immediate perception, i.e., intuition."
Hoffding says, "Spinoza aims at nothing less than
the highest aim of all knowledge, viz.: the most
intimate union possible of individuality with con-
tinuity, of the particular with the sum of con-
stant relations. He only succeeds in this when
postulating an intuition which reminds us now of
the artist's conception, now of the mystic's vision."
Schopenhauer says, "it is possible in certain cases
for knowledge to escape from the bondage of the
will, at which time the individuality of man is
canceled and he becomes entirely absorbed in dis-
interested contemplation. This revolution and
emancipation, in which the will disappears and
pure perception has the upper hand, can only be
explained as a sudden breaking forth of the faculty
of intuition." Bergson is the latest of the modern
philosophers to develop the idea of intuition.
Hoffding remarks ^* of the French philosopher
that he is obscure with regard to the relation be-
tween intuition as a psychological condition and
intuition as a conclusion of thought. For my own
part, I am constrained to believe that no new truth

2* "Modern Philosophers," by Harold Hoffding. p. 241.

328 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

is ever added to the thought of the world, except
by immediate intuition; that is, by realization
without demonstration. Inductive and deductive
principles, as applied to experience, only prove
that which is already known. Empirical investiga-
tion assists by concentration of intellect in the dis-
cover}^ of conclusions which were before unknown,
whether in invention or pure reason, but does not
in itself secure that which is discovered, which al-
ways comes to one suddenly and intuitively.
John Stuart Mill's view that all false views and
tendencies within the ethical, religious and social
spheres are invincible so long as the assertion is al-
lowed to pass unchallenged that truths can be
gained by immediate intuition, by way of pure
thought, independently of experience and observa-
tion, is to be answered by the fact that if the con-
clusion is not afterwards provable on grounds of
experience and right reason, inductively and de-
ductively, it is not an intuition at all.

It was this message of the indwelling spirit that
told Abraham he would be the father of many na-
tions. It was also such a spiritual light which
came to Bil'am when he said of Jacob, 'T see him,
but not now; I behold him, but not nigh, there
steppeth forth a star out of Jacob and there ariseth
a scepter out of Israel." ^^ "There shall rule the
one from Jacob," the prophet concludes. It was
25 Numbers 24: 17.

THE MAN 329

the Living God who spoke through Zechariah as
follows: "Behold a man, Sprout is his name,
since out of his own place shall he sprout up, even
he shall build the temple of the Lord. Yea, he
shall build the temple of the Lord; and he shall
bear the glory, and shall sit and rule upon his
throne." ^^ It was this divine intuition, this re-
flection of the mind of God, that enabled David,
who lived in the fear of the Most High and from
shepherd boy became king of Israel, to perceive
that he would one day live again and become the
ruler of the world. By the Divine Mind it was
said : "I have found David my servant; with my
holy oil have I anointed him, with whom my
hand shall be iirmly established ; also my arm shall
strengthen him. Also I will appoint him my first
born, the highest among the kings of the earth."
*'My son art thou," was said of David. ''Ask it
of me and I will give thee nations for an inherit-
ance, and for thy possession the uttermost ends of
the earth." ^'^ "The spirit of the Lord came sud-
denly upon David from that day and forward." ^^
"And David felt conscious that the Lord had es-
tablished him as king over Israel." ^^ "When thy
days shall be completed, and thou wilt sleep with
thy fathers, then will I set up thy seed after thee,
who will proceed out of thy bowels, and I will

2« Zechariah 6:12-13. 28 i Saml. 16:13.

27 Psalms 2:7-8. 2»n Saml. 5:12.

330 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

establish his kingdom. He it is that shall build
a house for my name, and I will establish his
kingdom forever." ^^ "Thou hast also spoken of
thy servant's house for a distant time." ^^ And
then the king, who was a simple man and great
conqueror, reflected the intuition of the Living
God when he said: "Thou preservest me to be
the head of nations, a people which I know not,
shall serve me." ^'^ "The spirit of the Lord spoke
through me and his word was upon my tongue.
Thus said the God of Israel, concerning me spake
the Rock of Israel, that I should be ruler over men,
be righteous, ruling in the fear of God." ^^ It was
this same voice that said to Daniel : "But thou,
go thy way toward the end; and thou shalt rest
and arise again for thy lot at the end of the
days." ^^

If a man's ambition is his intuitive perception
of what he may become if he will, the thought
of Alexander the Great that he must conquer and
govern the world was as inspired as that of David.
Mommsen says "Caesar renewed the interrupted
work of the great Alexander whose image we may
well believe never was absent from Cgesar's soul.
In the capital of his empire he regulated the des-
tinies of the world for the present and the future."

soil Saml. 7:12-13. ^^ Ibid., 23:2-3.

^^ Ibid., 7:19. **Dan. 12:13.

^^Ibid., 23:44.

THE MAN 331

The Emperor Julian remarks: ^^ ''Nor do I de-
spise that lot with which I was myself endowed by
the God Helios, that I should be born of a house
that rules and governs the world in my time."
Gibbon says of Jinghis Kahn that "he accepted the
title of Jinghis, the most great, and a divine right
to the conquest and dominion of the earth." The
British historian also declares that "the conquest
and monarchy of the world was the first object of
the ambition of Timur." Gregory VII felt that
he had been entrusted by God with the task of
uniting all mankind in a single society in which
His will would be the only law. This was also
the thought of Boniface VIII. Charles XII
longed to emulate Alexander. Turenne most ad-
mired the exploits of the Greek conqueror and of
Julius Caesar. Napoleon in his exile at St.
Helena said that the great ideal toward which his
efforts had been directed was a great confederacy
of peoples, bound together "by unity of codes,
principles, opinions, feelings and interests." He
prophesied that it would yet be realized, sooner or
later, "by the force of circumstances." ^^

These men had the same intuitive perception of
destiny. The reason is that they were the same
man, born again from life to life, showing quite
naturally the same mighty talents and aspirations.

35 "Works of Emperor Julian." (Loeb ed.), Vol. I, p. 355.
3« "Cambridge Modern History," Vol. X, p. i.

332 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

The true line of David and Daniel, who saw them-
selves returning in another age, is as follows:
David, Sheshonk, Shalmonesser II, Sargon, Psam-
meticus I, Daniel, Miltiades, Alcibiades, Alex-
ander the Great, Ptolemy II, Hannibal, Mithri-
dates I, Julius Csesar, Tiberius, Trajan, Septimus
Severus, Aurelian, Maximin, Julian, Attila, Jus-
tinian, Heracleus, Leo the Isaurian, Harun al
Raschid, Alfred the Great, Hugh the Great,
Canute, Gregory VII, Alphonso VII, Jinghis Kahn,
Boniface VIII, Timur, Casimir IV, Suleiman the
Magnificent, Turenne, Charles XII and Napoleon.
This is the meaning of the words, "The throne of
David will be established before the world for-
ever." As the Living God said through the
prophet Nathan, "When thy days will be com-
pleted and when thou shalt sleep with thy fathers,
then will I set up thy seed after thee, who shall
proceed out of thy body, and I will establish the
throne of his kingdom forever. I too will be to
him as a father and he shall indeed be to me as a
son; so that when he committeth iniquity I will
chastise him with the rod of men and with the
plagues of the children of man; but my kingdom
shall not depart from him, as I caused it to depart
from Saul, whom I removed from before thee ; thy
throne shall be established forever." When he
heard this "then went king David in and sat down
before the Lord, and he said. What am I, O Lord

THE MAN 333

Eternal? and what is my house, that thou hast
brought me as far as hitherward *? And this was
yet too small a thing in thy eyes, O Lord Eternal ;
and thou hast spoken also of thy servant's house
for a distant time. And is this the desert of man,
O Lord Eternal? And what can David add yet
more to speak unto thee? since thou, O Lord
Eternal, knowest well thy servant. For the sake
of thy word, and in accordance with thy own
heart, hast thou done all this great thing, so as to
let thy servant know it.''' Before David was king
of Israel he was also Joshua, Jacob and Abraham.
He was also Tiglath Pileser I, Rameses II, Amen-
hotep III, Thetmosis III, Hammurabi, Gudea and
many another conqueror and ruler of men.

This is he of whom it was said through Isaiah :
"And there shall be founded through kindness a
throne and there shall sit upon it in truthfulness
in the tent of David a judge who seeketh justice
and is quick in righteousness." This is he of
whom Isaiah said : "And there shall come forth a
shoot out of the stem of Jesse, and a sprout shall
spring up out of his roots. And there shall rest
upon him the spirit of the Lord, the spirit of wis-
dom and understanding, the spirit of counsel and
might, the spirit of knowledge and of the fear of
the Lord." This is he of whom the same prophet
also said: "Behold, for a lawgiver unto the peo-
ple have I appointed him, a prince and a com-

334 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

mander to the people. Behold a nation thou
knoweth not shalt thou call, and a nation that
knew thee not shall run after thee; for the sake
of the Holy One of Israel, for He hath glorified
thee." It was he of whom it was said : "And I
let come forth out of Jacob a seed, and out of
Judah an inheritor of my mountains; and my
elect shall inherit it, and my servants shall dwell
there." It was he of whom Jeremiah spoke when
he said: "Behold, days are coming when I will
raise up unto David a righteous sprout, and he
shall reign as king and prosper, and he shall exe-
cute justice and righteousness on earth." And
it was he alone that Micah foresaw when he de-
clared: "But thou, Bethlehem Ephratah, the
least though thou be among the thousands of
Judah, yet out of thee there shall come forth unto
me that is to be ruler in Israel, whose origin is from
olden times, from most ancient days. Therefore
will he give them up until the time that she who
travaileth hath brought forth, then shall the rem-
nant of his brethren return with the children of
Israel. And he shall stand forward and feed
Israel through the strength of the Lord, through
the excellency of the name of the Lord his God;
and they shall abide safely; for now shall he he
great even unto the ends of the earth'' It was he
of whom it was said: "Out of him cometh forth
the corner stone, out of him the tent nail, out of

THE MAN 335

him the battle bow, out of him every ruler of
others together. And they shall be like mighty
men, treading down their enemies in the mire
of the streets in the battle, and they shall fight
because the Lord is with them, and the riders
on horses shall be made ashamed." "And the
house of David," it is said through Zechariah,
"shall be like divine beings, like an angel of the
Lord before them." Malachi speaks: "Behold
I will send my messenger and he shall clear out
the way before me ; and suddenly will come to his
temple the Lord whom ye seek and the messenger
of the covenant whom ye desire, for behold he is
coming, said the Lord of Hosts." And also:
"There shall rise unto you that fear my name the
sun of righteousness with healing in his wings."
"It shall happen on that day," says Isaiah, "that
he of the root of Jesse who shall stand as an ensign
of the people, to him shall nations come to inquire,
and his resting place shall be glorious."

The Old Testament prophets are perhaps the
first to lay down the principle of everlasting life,
but they have had many successors. Socrates,
greatest of teachers of free Athens, said that death
was only the separation of the soul from the body ;
that the intelligence is soul, like the Divine Mind,
and both are immortal; that we recollect after-
wards things which we acquired before our birth;
that "if the soul exists before birth and when it

336 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

comes into life and is bom from anything else
than death and a state of death, must it not also
exist after dying, since it must be born again?"
"These souls," he says, "flit about until, through
the desire of the corporeal which clings to them,
they are again imprisoned in a body." And
again : "God and the principle of life and every-
thing else that is immortal can never perish. The
soul being immortal is also imperishable." Aris-
totle says : "Now, though only one of the powers
of the soul, intellect alone of these powers has no
bodily organ; it alone is immortal; it alone is di-
vine." In the Upanishads, seven centuries before
Jesus, Death answers Nachiketas: "The know-
ing self is not born; it dies not; it sprang from
nothing; nothing sprang from it. The ancient is
unborn, eternal, everlasting; he is not killed
though the body is killed. If the slayer thinks
that he slays, or if the slain think he is slain, they
do not understand, for this one does not slay nor
is that one slain." "There can be no question,"
says Professor Pratt, ^^ "that the belief in immor-
tality is much stronger and much more prevalent
in India than it is in Europe or America. Almost
every one accepts it, takes it as a matter of course
and plans his life in reference to it." Philo of
Alexandria before the Christian era and Giordano
Bruno in modem times taught the same truth.

37 "India and Its Faiths," by J. B. Pratt, p. 105.

THE MAN 337

What is true in the nature of things is for all.
This is Isaiah's meaning when he says: "The
Lord of Hosts . . . will destroy on this mountain
the face of the covering which covereth all the
people, and the veil that is spread over all the na-
tions. He will destroy death to eternity; and the
Lord Eternal will wipe away the tear from off all
faces; and the shame of his people will he remove
from off all the earth; for the Lord hath spoken
it."

The character and genius of those mentioned as
of the line of David, who have been reborn from
life to life, are the same. The mightiest con-
querors by talent for movement of troops in the
mass, consummate statesmen by being builders of
unity and order, lawgivers by condensation of
code and dispensers of justice, writers and orators
when the need required it, simple men gifted with
practical sense, they, or more properly speaking he,
last saw earthly expression in Napoleon. At
times he became selfish and cruel. Then he was
punished. 'T have found David my servant;
with my holy oil have I anointed him ; with whom
my hand shall be firmly established; also my arm
shall strengthen him. He will call upon me,
Thou art my father, my God and the rock of my
salvation. Also I will appoint him my first born,
the highest among the kings of the earth. For-
evermore will I keep for him my kindness, and my

338 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

covenant shall stand faithfully with him. And I
appoint forever his seed, and his throne as the days
of heaven. // his children forsake my law and
walk not in my ordinances; if they profane my
statutes and keep not my commandments ; then
will I visit with the rod their transgressions and
with plagues their iniquity. Nevertheless my
kindness will I not make utterly void from him,
and I will not act falsely against my faithfulness.
I will not profane my covenant and what is gone
out of my lips will I not alter. One thing have I
sworn by my holiness, that I will not lie unto
David. His seed shall endure forever, and his
throne shall be like the sun before me." Na-
poleon was not unlike Alexander and Caesar. Al-
fred and Canute were not unlike David. It was
the same intuitive knowledge that God was with
him that led David with his sling to approach the
giant Goliath with his sword and armor and say,
"Thou comest unto me with a sword and with a
spear and with a javelin, but I come to thee in the
name of the Lord of Hosts, the God of the arrays
of Israel, that thou hast defied," and that led the
French Emperor, upon returning to France as an
outlaw and with the armies of Louis XVIII and
Europe against him, to open his coat to the sol-
diers who had been ordered to fire upon him and
say, "Shoot your emperor I" It was the same love
of learning that animated Ptolemy II, Harun,

THE MAN 339

Julian, Alexander and Bonaparte in Egypt.
Caesar was not a soldier until nearly forty. Julian
turned from scholarship to defeat the Germans.
It came to them how to guide armies and rebuild
civilization.

This, then, is the man who will arise again in
the United States, the man Tolstoy predicted
would come and be a new Napoleon to make the
world one republic in a federation of peoples. He
it is who by his genius with the sword and state-
craft and pen will rebuild the world. Many in
our day have grown to look upon the Bible as nice
to be taught to children in Sunday school but as
outside the pale of practical and work-a-day ex-
perience. Yet it is the living truth. It contains
the secrets of the ages. It holds the message of
the Great Time. It has within it the simple
truths by which all men may live righteously and
behold for themselves the light. And it foretells
the coming of the Messiah, who is not any more or
less than a man as simple as David, who has been
trained by the Almighty for many centuries for
the work he has to do and with whom the Living
God will be by inspiration on the day of battle.
Perhaps he will appear like Miltiades at Mara-
thon in the service of a free state against the
Asiatics. Perhaps he will, like Csesar, Julian and
Napoleon, subdue the Germans in that mighty war
that is to be. And maybe, as his ambition led

340 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

him to think, he will guide the peoples to a single
state, a republic, and rule in righteousness during
a stated term of office. Nowhere are such abili-
ties more likely to find full usefulness than in the
United States, where the nation needs men who
will fear naught but God and "dare not lie." In
no age so much as the present are the obliteration
of self in a mighty work and the talent for govern-
ing for the good of all races and conditions of men
so likely to be appreciated. At no period in all
the ages, with a world distraught by conflict, have
men so sought the man who will fulfil the mes-
sage: ''He shall come down like rain upon the
mown grass, as showers that are dropping on the
earth. In his days shall the righteous flourish,
and abundance of peace shall be till the moon shall
be no more. And he shall have dominion from
sea to sea, and from the river unto the ends of the
earth." He will come, to lead the American peo-
ple, through strange circumstances, in the time of
their greatest need, to do their work at their maxi-
mum of strength, and to give freedom and right
the victory. He will by his sword restore the
Jews to their land and make Israel among the
greatest of the nations of the earth. It was said
through Ezekiel:

"And speak unto them. Thus hath saith the
Lord Eternal, Behold I will take the children of
Israel from among the nations whither they are

THE MAN 341

gone, 4nd I will gather them from every side and
bring tfiem into their own land. And I will make
them into one nation on the land, on the moun-
tains of Israel ; and one king shall be over them all
for king; and they shall not be any more two na-
tions, nor shall they at any time be two kingdoms
any more ; neither shall they defile themselves any
more with their idols and with their detestable
things, and with all their transgressions ; and I will
save them out of all their dwelling places wherein
they have sinned, and I will cleanse them, and
they shall be unto me for a people, and I will be
unto them for a God. And my servant David
shall be king over them; and one shepherd shall
be for them all; and in my ordinances shall they
walk, and my statutes shall they observe and do
them. And they shall dwell in the land that I
have given unto my servant, unto Jacob, wherein
your fathers have dwelt; and they shall dwell
therein, they and their children and their chil-
dren's children forever; and David my servant
shall be prince over them forever. And I will
make with them a covenant of peace, an everlast-
ing covenant shall it be with them, and I will be
unto them for a God, and they shall be unto me
for a people. And the nations shall know that I
am the Lord who sanctifieth Israel, when my sanc-
tuary will be in the midst of them forevermore."
This does not mean that the Jews will be re-

342 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

stored merely to Palestine. They will occupy all
the land "from the river unto the ends of the sea/'
which now constitutes the Arabian peninsula,
and Syria, and Asia Minor. Within the territory
encompassed by boundaries drawn from the
Euphrates to the Persian Gulf to the Arabian, Red,
Mediterranean, Black and Caspian seas the people
and nationality of Israel will rear a state which
will be the center of the world's wealth. This
will be their temporal reward for their long dis-
persion. Does not the Lord declare, through
Ezekiel, of the man who will do this work:
"After many da3^s shalt thou be ordered forward;
in the end of years shalt thou come into the land
that is recovering from the sword (the United
States, where permanent peace is most discussed),
and is gathered together out of many people,
against the mountains of Israel, which have been
ruined for a long time : to a people (of the United
States) that are brought forth out of the nations,
and that now dwell in safety, all of them. Thou
shalt ascend and come like a tempest, like a cloud
to cover the earth wilt thou be, thou, and all thy
armies, and the many people with thee. There-
fore prophesy, son of man, and say unto Gog,
Thus hath saith the Lord Eternal, behold on the
day when my people of Israel dwelleth in safety
(as they are now beginning to) shalt thou know
my power. And thou wilt come from thy place

THE MAN 343

out of the fartherest ends of the north (the United
States), thou, and many people with thee, all of
them riding upon horses, a great assemblage and a
mighty army; and thou wilt come up against my
people of Israel, like a cloud to cover the land; in
the latter days will this be, and I will bring them
over my land in order that the nations may know
me, when I am sanctified on thee, before their
eyes, O Gog. This hath saith the Lord Eternal,
Art thou not he of whom I Rave spoken in ancient
days, through means of my servants the prophets
of Israel, who prophesied in those days many
years, that I would bring thee against them.

"And it shall come to pass at the same time, on
the day of Gog's coming over the land of Israel,
saith the Lord Eternal, that my fury shall be
kindled in my nose. And in my zealousness, in
the fire of my wrath have I spoken. Surely on
that day shall there be a great earthquake in the
country of Israel; and there shall quake at my
presence the fishes of the sea (submarines), and
the fowls of the heavens (aircraft), and the beasts
of the field (great guns), and every creeping thing
that creepeth upon the earth (trenches and ma-
chine fire), and the mountains (great nations),
shall be thrown down, and the cliffs (of a city)
shall fall, and every wall (barrier between men),
shall fall to the ground. And I will call against
him throughout all my mountains for the sword,

344 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

saith the Lord Eternal : every man's sword shall be
against his brother. And I will hold judgment
over him with pestilence and with blood shedding;
and an overflowing rain (of bullets), and great
hailstones (shells), fire and sulphur (gases) will I
let over him and his armies, and over the many-
people that are with him. Thus will I magnify
myself, and make myself known before the eyes
of many nations: and they shall know that I am
the Lord."

The man who will do this work will need to be
a great soldier as Rameses, David, Alexander,
Hannibal, Csesar, Trajan, Attila, Heracleus,
Jinghis, Timur, Suleiman, Turenne and Napo-
leon were great soldiers. He will need to be a
statesman as they and Sargon, Alcibiades,
Ptolemy, Mithridates, Tiberius, Septimus Sev-
erus, Leo the Isaurian, Harun, Gregory VII and
Boniface VIII were statesmen. He will need to
be a great lawgiver like Hammurabi, Justinian
and Napoleon. He will need to be a writer in a
democratic age as David, Csesar, Julian, Gregory
VII, Turenne and Napoleon were writers. He
will need to be a builder of unity as Alexander,
Caesar, Hugh the Great, Canute, Alphonso VII,
Jinghis, Timur and Casimir. He will need to be a
religious reformer like David, Maximin, Julian,
Leo and Gregory VII. He will need to be an
orator like Caesar, who was the rival of Cicero.

THE MAN 345

He will need to be unselfish, lest he "forsake my
law" and be brought to grief like Miltiades, Alci-
biades, Caesar, Attila, Charles XII and Napoleon.
He will need to be a simple servant of the Most
High as were Abraham, Jacob, Joshua, David,
Daniel, Julian, Harun, Alfred, Canute and
Gregory. Otherwise he will not receive the light
to guide him through vicissitudes and perils. He
will be a human being. He will love and be
loved by a good woman. Like Caesar, he will be,
as Mommsen remarks, "a man of passion, for with-
out passion there can be no genius." He will be
a kind and doting father to his children, as Na-
poleon was. He will be a manly man, fond of
sports and outdoor life, as 'Alexander and Caesar
were, yet a student as they and all the long line of
the "house" of David. He will have the genius
of Napoleon for handling business matters. He
will be a "good fellow," full of laughter and wit
and with a sincere shake of the hand for every
man. So simple will he be in his manner of life
and his thoughts and pleasures that ideas will
come to him as they have to all the inspired leaders
of the ages. It will be he of whom it was said
through Isaiah long ago :

"And there shall rest upon him the spirit of the
Lord, the spirit of wisdom and understanding,
the spirit of counsel and might, the spirit of knowl-
edge and the fear of the Lord. And he shall be

346 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

animated by the fear of the Lord; and not after
the sight of his eyes shall he judge, and not after
the hearing of his ears shall he decide; but he shall
judge with righteousness the poor, and decide
with equity for the suffering ones of the earth; and
he shall smite the earth with the rod of his mouth,
and with the breath of his lips shall he slay the
wicked. And righteousness shall be the girdle of
his loins, and faithfulness the girdle of his hips.
And the wolf shall then dwell with the sheep, and
the leopard shall lie down with the kid; and the
calf and the young lion and the fatling shall be
together, and a little boy (simple man) shall lead
them. And the cow and the she-bear shall feed,
together shall their young ones lie down; and the
lion shall like the ox eat straw. And the suckling
child shall play on the hole of the asp, and on the
basilisks den shall the weaned child stretch forth
his hand. They shall not do hurt nor destroy on
all my holy mountain; for the earth shall be full
of the knowledge of the Lord as the waters cover
the sea."

Indeed, he will be called upon to rule because
he will fulfil the ideal of the Emperor Julian,
who wrote sixteen centuries ago: "But now I
must demand from it an account, as fas as possi-
ble, of the man who is good and kingly and great
souled. In the first place, then, he is devout and
does not neglect the worship of the gods (respects

THE MAN 347

religion), and secondly he is pious and ministers
to his parents, both when they are alive and after
their death, and he is friendly to his brothers, and
reverences the gods who protect the family, while
to supplicants and strangers he is mild and gen-
tle ; and he is anxious to gratify good citizens, and
governs the masses with justice and for their bene-
fit. And wealth he loves, not that which is
heavy with gold and silver, but that which is
full of the true good will of his friends, and serv-
ice without flattery. Though by nature he is
brave and gallant, he takes no pleasure in war,
and detests civil discord, though when men do
attack him, whether by some chance or by reason
of their own wickedness, he resists them bravely
and defends himself with energy, and carries
through his enterprises to the end, not desisting
until he has destroyed the power of the foe and
made it subject to himself. But after he has
conquered by force of arms, he makes his sword
cease from slaughter, because he thinks that for
one who is no longer defending himself to go
on killing and laying waste is to incur pollution.
And being by nature fond of work, and great of
soul, he shares in the labors of all; and claims
the lion's shares of these labors, then divides with
the others the rewards for the risks which he
has run, and is glad and rejoices, not because he
has more gold and silver treasure than other men,

348 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and palaces adorned with costly furniture, but
because he is able to do good to many, and to be-
stow upon all men whatever they may chance
to lack. This is what he who is truly a king
claims for himself."

Creasy, in his "Fifteen Decisive Battles of the
World," says of the Great Hun: "When we
turn from the legendary to the historic Attila, we
see clearly that he was not one of the vulgar herd
of barbaric conquerors. Consummate military
skill may be traced in his campaigns; and he re-
lied far less on the brute force of armies for the
aggrandizement of his empire than on the un-
bounded influence over the affections of friends
and the fears of foes, which his genius enabled
him to acquire. Austerely sober in his private
life, — severely just on the judgment seat, — con-
spicuous among a nation of warriors for hardi-
hood, strength and skill in every martial exercise,
— grave and deliberate in counsel, but rapid and
remorseless in execution, — he gave safety and se-
curity to all who were under his dominion, while
he urged a warfare of extermination against all
who opposed or sought to escape from it." Ar-
rian, whose authorities knew Alexander the Great
personally, says: "His body was beautiful and
well proportioned; his mind brisk and active; his
courage wonderful. He was strong enough to un-
dergo hardships, and willing to meet dangers;

THE MAN 349

ever ambitious of glory and a strict observer of
religious duties. As to those pleasures which re-
garded the body, he showed himself indifferent;
as to the desires of the mind, insatiable. He was
famous for exciting his soldiers with courage and
animating them with hopes of success, as also in
dispelling their fears by his own example and
magnanimity." Mommsen relates of the Roman
Conqueror: "Caesar retained both his bodily
vigor and his elasticity of mind unimpaired. In
fencing and in riding he was a match for any of
his soldiers, and his swimming saved his life at
Alexandria. Although a gentleman, a man of
genius and a monarch, he had still a heart. In
his character, as well as in his place in history,
Csesar occupies a position where the great con-
trasts of existence meet and balance each other.
Of the mightiest creative power, and yet at the
same time of the most penetrating judgment; no
longer a youth and yet not an old man; of the
highest energy of will and the greatest capacity
of execution; filled with republican ideals and
at the same time born to be a king; a Roman in
the deepest sense of his nature, and yet called to
reconcile and combine in himself, as well as in the
outer world, the Roman and Hellenic types of cul-
ture— Caesar was an entire and perfect man."
J. Holland Rose says of Napoleon: "In spite
of his prodigious failure, he was superlatively

350 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

great in all that pertains to government, the quick-
ening of human energies, and the art of war. His
greatness lies, not merely in the abiding impor-
tance of his undertakings, but still more in the
Titanic force that he threw into the inception and
accomplishment of all of them — a force which
invests the storm blasted monoliths strewn along
the latter portion of his career with a majesty un-
approachable by a tamer race of toilers."

Down the path of the centuries marched this
spirit of whom it was promised: "Also I will
appoint him my first born, the highest among the
kings of the earth." Conquering, reorganizing,
rehabilitating, unifying wherever he was reborn,
whether in Asia, Africa or Europe, he was en-
abled to lead on as the central stem in the work
of civilization. After David, he was three times
king of Egypt, four times king of Babylon, once
prophet in Israel and high official of Babylon,
three times leader in Greece, once greatest of
Carthaginians, including Julius Csesar seven times
emperor of Rome, once king of the Huns, three
times East Roman emperor, once Caliph, twice
king of England, once of Castile, once of Poland,
once of France, once of Sweden and once of Tur-
key, twice pope, once Mongol and another time
Berlas conqueror, once French general and finally
French emperor. Trained in government and
war he will be prepared when he again appears for

THE MAN 351

the next great task the Ahuighty will give him
to do — the conquest and dominion of the earth
as a servant of God and of men in the Republic
of Man. "In his days abundance of peace shall
be 'til the moon shall be no more." "And my
servant David shall be over them and one shep-
herd shall be for them all." "For a child has been
born unto us, and the government is placed on
his shoulders; and his name is called Wonderful,
counselor of the Mighty God, of the Everlasting
Father, the prince of peace, for promoting the
increase of the government, and for peace with-
out end, upon the throne of David and upon his
kingdom, to establish it and to support it through
justice and righteousness, from henceforth and
unto eternity : the zeal of the Lord of Hosts will
do this." "Who can sustain the day of his com-
ing'? who can stand when he appeareth? for he
is like the fire of the melter, and like the lye of
the washers." He will not deserve the admoni-
tion, "Cursed be he that doeth the work of the
Lord negligently, and cursed be he that with-
holdeth his sword from blood." But in his day
it will be said: "Now the Lord hath brought it
to fulfilment and hath done according as he hath
spoken."

CHAPTER XIII

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD

"A nation — and were it even possible, a whole world —
of free men, lifting their foreheads to God and nature;
calling no man master, for one is their master, even God ;
knowing and obeying their duties toward the Maker of the
Universe, and therefore to each other, and that not from
fear, nor calculation of profit or loss, but because they
loved and liked it, and had seen the beauty of righteous-
ness and trust and peace, because the law of God was in
their hearts ; and need at last, it may be, neither king nor
priest, for each man and each woman were kings and
priests of God. Such a nation — such a society — what
nobler conception of mortal existence can we form^
Would not that indeed be the kingdom of God come on
earth T' — Charles Kingsley.

It is the destiny of the United States to trans-
form the earth by giving it liberty under forms
of law expressed in a republic which shall include
all races, nations and climes.

This will not be brought about by any puerile
attempt, however dignified, to compel all men
by mere declaration of plan, which includes talk
alone, to cease from strife. It will not come
through a parliament of legal representatives of
the states of the earth who have an ideal of peace

352

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 353

but are without the judgment to perceive that
the decrees of a congress are as nothing if without
force to back them up. It will not appear by-
means of a world court proposed by dreamers, who
apparently do not yet realize that the horrors
of war will last just so long as great rivals for
trade and dominion and influence have nearly
equal strength to test by the sword. Nor will
it come through a dictator or commission of dic-
tators set up in the name of law to rule the ^^orld.
It will be brought about by the people of the
United States, uniting themselves in preparation
in a military sense for the work of seizing this
continent, defeating the efforts of the Japanese
to control the Pacific Ocean and give wider sway
to their institutions in Asia, and, at last, yield-
ing hundreds of thousands and even millions of
brave youth to powder and shot, in order that
the last of the monarchies, the German Empire,
may perish from the face of the earth. It will
come by means of several cruel and bitterly con-
tested wars. Three centuries of amalgamation
of the blood of many peoples into one has made
the American people the most virile and intelli-
gent on the globe, and in 1938, when they shall
have reached their maximum of strength, they
will be fully ready to conclude their work. In
that day every spot on the earth will have at one
time been the seat of an empire. In that time

354 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

every people will have exhausted itself. The
American people alone will not have done so,
because the process of intermingling has continued
from the beginning, nearly three centuries ago,
until the present, under the law of blood assur-
ing for three centuries to come that continued
strength w^hich will enable them to uphold and
give force to the government for mankind which
they will establish. With Germany and Japan
vanquished, as well as the principal opponents
of the former in the present European conflict,
there is not a power in the world in sight or in
the process of the making that could withstand
the energies and force of the American people
for many centuries. As the conquering peoples
in the dawn of history began their course west-
ward from Cathay across Asia to the Mediterran-
ean, and thence northward into Europe and over
the sea, so they have now completed the cycle,
and where east and west meet are prepared to
begin a new dispensation.

Nearly twenty-five hundred years ago the
prophet Daniel foresaw that this would come.
Probably with the fall of Jerusalem in 586 B.C.
he was carried to Babylon and made an attendant
in the palace of the conqueror. A boy then, a
quarter of a century later he gave to the world
that divine prophecy that a time (a thousand),
times (another thousand) and half a time (half a

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 355

thousand years) would "the Grod of heaven set up
a kingdom which shall to all eternity not be de-
stroyed, and its rule shall not be transferred to
any other people; and it will grind up and make
an end of all these kingdoms, while it will itself
endure for ever." No mention is made in the
Book of Kings or in Jeremiah of the taking of
the Hebrew capital by Nebuchadnezzar in 605
B.C., the "third year of Jehoiakim" of Daniel^
and it is extremely improbable. The chapter in
which the great prediction is made was composed
in the first year of Belshazzar, who is referred to
throughout as the son of Nebuchadnezzar. The
latter, as crown prince, defeated the Egyptians
at Charchemish in 605 b.c. If, as Berosus says,
he hurried home shortly afterward, upon the death
of his father, to become king, and this was in the
same year, and if, as the same authority asserts,
he reigned forty-three years, the first year of Bel-
shazzar would fall in 562 b.c. and the culmina-
tion of the "time, times and half a time" in 1938
A.D. Archeological inscriptions name Belshazzar
as the son of Nabunaid and state that he was
slain in the night by Gubaru, the governor sent
by Cyrus; but the man who was regent and gen-
eral under his father may have been the grandson
of Nebuchadnezzar and have been given some
power immediately upon the death of the latter:
a campaign as a successful commander in 605 b.c.

356 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and a reign thereafter of forty-three years must
have made the king very old at the time of his
death.

The entire earth has been prepared for this by
the events of the past two centuries. Tyrannies
have been shorn of their power, religious hate
has been allayed, education has opened the mind,
enlightened nations have taken over the care of
darkened ones, as in Africa, India and the Philip-
pines, paper has become cheaper and books uni-
versal, and a net work of steam and electric lines
of transportation and telegraph have removed
barriers and given incentive for thoughts every-
where of the brotherhood of man and the father-
hood of God. By travel, commerce and reading
citizens of the world have grown apace. Turn-
ing from incarnate hate in religious warfare, men
have sought in the present generation to alleviate
the conditions of those about them. The past
of the world has been uncovered. The laws of
all nations and times have been translated and
compared. Interacting sympathy between insti-
tutions and religious beliefs has become a note
of the twentieth century. The tyranny of one
sex over the other is passing away in the awaken-
ing minds, consciences and activities of half the
world — its women. Two classes that have here-
tofore been lost to the fullest joy of life are
being brought to intelligent activity and honor —

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 357

the very young and the very old. Leaders in all
activities are longing for a time of peace when
the earth my be one. As Columbus saw twigs and
carved wood floating on the water several days
before he actually sighted land, so the ideals of
an expectant world, expressed by so many minds,
are evidences that the final day when the dreams
of the sages of antiquity and the modern world
will come true is soon to arrive.

The United States, a nation of idealists as well
as practical men, a country where soldiers and
heroes may be trained, as well as crusaders for
righteousness, must do this work with its mighty
hand. It must train its million youth to arms
every year and with its great fleets be ready to
sweep the ocean. It must organize its inventors
secretly so that its geniuses may help and not hin-
der its work for the bringing nearer of the Re-
public of Man. It must be prepared to utilize
all its industries for the public good by turning
them into military channels in time of war.
With complete domination on this continent, it
must protect its borders and be able to supply
itself with every item of food and material in
order not to be at disadvantage in the deciding
conflicts of the future. It must have a numerous
fleet of merchant ships, which may be turned to
use in war when the hour comes. It must have
an artillery arm of defense in the sky such as has

358 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

not yet been thought of by any nation. And it
must have under the sea forces which almost think
in their mechanism.

The tendency of all time has been toward unity.
The clan, and afterwards the tribe, gave way to
the small and then the greater nation, and finally
the empire and attempts made by various con-
querors and ambitious potentates toward world
dominion. The trend has been in the direction
of representative government and liberty. Seven
centuries ago the Swiss gave Europe an example.
City states and federations of states in Europe suc-
ceeded each other from time to time. With the
development of free thought and the American
and French revolutions new and final impetus was
given to conceptions of federal republics. South
America and Mexico, France after 1871, Portugal
and even China broke the bonds that bound them
and sought enlightenment under representative
government. Constitutions were wrested from
monarchs elsewhere, as in Germany, Austria, Italy
and Russia. At last, with the burden of the
growth of armaments, the sentiment in favor of
peace became so strong that the Czar in 1899
called the first Hague conference, with the result
of a permanent court of arbitration to settle inter-
national disputes. After that came the Interpar-
liamentary Union, composed entirely of members
of national legislatures. It met at stated intervals

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 359

to discuss the problem of world peace and a per-
manent congress, until the gods of war rudely
ended their deliberations. The Pan-American
Union of Latin American republics and the United
States has been a potent force for better under-
standing and amity in this hemisphere. At-
tempts toward closer union of the British colonies
and of the Germans the world over through the
Pan-German propaganda are further examples of
the process of unity. In industry during the past
decade great trusts and combinations to reduce
cost and sometimes increase profits have further
extended the field of the forces at work to bring
about closer amalgamation between the activities
of mankind. Genuine democracy has spread and
helped to give weight to the statement of Imman-
uel Kant that the prerequisite of the federation of
the world is the establishment by all the nations
individually of representative government.

To accomplish this the United States, the
strongest of nations, must give itself up to the
unselfish task of beating off the usurping empires
and defending the weak peoples that had their day
of dominion long ago and have since been wait-
ing patiently for the coming of the time when
they should awake from the torpor of centuries
and express themselves by intelligence alone, as
in the case of China and Korea. It alone is strong
enough. It alone is made up of every assimila-

36o THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

ble people. It alone pulsates with sympathy for
the entire world. It alone has taken a Cuba and
given it its liberty again so that it might govern
itself. It alone contains a people enthusiastically
bent upon giving the world the highest expression
of itself — its own free institutions. It alone
when the time comes, and under its leaders of
that day, will insist that the result of its conquer-
ing be representative government for all peoples.
It alone will refuse to accept that dominion which
it might have in view of its conquest, and be-
come only a part of a greater state of which it
will be the founder. The peoples of the world
who have been saved from the dangers of further
fetters and wars, except to maintain the public
order, will express their gratitude by the accept-
ance of institutions which have been so beneficial
to that proportion of humanity that has lived
under the Stars and Stripes.

This state of the future should have one law
and one government. It should have three co-
ordinate branches, as this has. It should have
its system of checks and balances. Tyranny should
be prevented by the power of the legislature and
the courts and the checks thereby placed upon
the executive. Justice and efficiency of admin-
istration should be provided by the world con-
gress. The chief executive of the earth should
receive such authority as is now given to the Presi-

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 361

dent of the United States. He should be subject
to impeachment by a two-thirds vote of the mem-
bers of the less numerous branch of the legislature
after the filing of charges by the more numerous
branch. He should appoint all important federal
officers as now, and be commander in chief of such
forces of a minor but adequate character as may be
required to put down insurrections anywhere on
the earth and maintain public order. He should
be elected for a term of ten years and be once eligi-
ble for reelection. He should receive a salary of
$250,000 per annum, enough to maintain in dig-
nity such a position. At the conclusion of his
term he should have a seat, a voice and a vote
in the Senate. Election should be by the people,
irrespective of race, creed or previous condition.
Authority should rest upon them alone and be
grounded upon the principle that under the law
all men are created equal. The President should
be assisted by a cabinet, comprising a secretary
of state to transact official correspondence of the
chief executive with the several states and be
his principal confidential adviser; a secretary of
public order to see to the details of maintaining
peace in the world, by an army and a navy in the
hands of the United States of America; a secre-
tary of marine to supervise all matters relating
to shipping; a secretary of commerce to admin-
ister the laws relating to business; a secretary of

362 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

communication to include the post offices, telegraph
and telephone; a secretary of public works to
supervise building, bridge, road and harbor con-
struction required by the federation; a secretary
of agriculture to supervise the administration of
the laws relating to the development of farming
lands everywhere on the globe ; a secretary of labor
to look after technical problems pertaining to
wage earners and report suggestions of better-
ment; a secretary of transportation to execute the
statutes relating to rail, aerial and submarine com-
munication; a secretary of the treasury to look
after the details of universal coinage, finances
and banking system; a secretary of mining and
public lands to administer the laws pertaining to
mining and coal, oil, water power and other nat-
ural resources of the earth susceptible to monop-
oly, to sec that the ouput is sold to the consumer
at cost of production and marketing, and to pro-
vide for the giving of homesteads under the laws
out of vacant and tillable territory everywhere;
an attorney general to defend and bring suits in
the name of the Federation of the World, as well
as to investigate wrongs and seek remedies at law ;
a secretary of public health and sanitation to en-
hance the progress of medicine and research, to
execute regulations for the prevention of conta-
gious diseases and to administer the laws relating,
to foods and drugs; a secretary of manufactures

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 363

to foster that class of industries and compel obedi-
ence to the welfare of the public expressed through
the laws pertaining to it; a secretary of publica-
tion to administer laws relating to the subjects
of literature, journalism, book publication, adver-
tising and libraries, to suggest methods of the me-
chanical improvement of a free press, protect the
production of pulp and other natural methods of
making paper so as to vouchsafe printed matter
for the public at as cheap a rate as possible, to
prevent the press of the world from getting into
the hands of a monopoly or series of them, to
publish all documents and papers of the general
government, and to collect and maintain a library
for the use of the central authorities; and a sec-
retary of education to report upon improvements
in and supervise the administration of all educa-
tion everywhere. Each of the members of the
cabinet of the president of the entire world should
have a seat and a voice but not a vote in the de-
liberations of either branch of the congress dur-
ing consideration of appropriation bills relating
to his department. A vice president, selected for
the same length of term as the president, should
preside over the Senate, without vote or voice as
now.

The national legislature of the federation, to
be established by the arms and power of the
United States, should consist of a house of repre-

364 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

sentatives and a senate. The former should be
elected directly by the people, on a basis of one
to every three millions of population, or one to
every nation even if the number of its inhabitants
be less. It should have the sole authority to orig-
inate money bills, as in the cases of the Parlia-
ment of England and the more numerous branch
of the Congress of the United States. It should
have a speaker with the power to select commit-
tees. Members should be elected for a term of
five years and take office within two months after
election. Senators should be selected by the leg-
islatures of the respective nations and serve terms
of ten years each. Each nation should have two
senators. It would be preferable to have the
members of the less numerous body selected by
the legislatures instead of the people, iirst, be-
cause they would then be the representatives of
representatives and therefore larger national fig-
ures and more conservative and able men, and, sec-
ond, because they would then consider national
and world interests in their broader aspect rather
than in favor of any popular clamor of the time.
Certainly this would be true at the period of the
organization of the government, at least. The
branches of the legislature should be coordinate,
without one being superior or inferior to the other
in power.

In the supreme court of the world, sitting at

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 365

the federal capital, there should be eleven mem-
bers. Time has shown that in our own court the
docket is frequently delayed by the fact that
the number of justices to write opinions is in-
sufficient. Another reason for the naming of two
more by the president of the world federation
is that the circuit over which they would preside
during the interregnum between sessions in cases
of appeal would be larger. As two or three weeks
might at first be required to get to some portions
of the jurisdiction, these judges would be exceed-
ingly busy men if the sittings were the same as
in the case of the court at Washington. The
duties of the court should be the construction of
the constitution and decision of international
cases, as in the Supreme Court of the United
States.

The constitution of the federation should up-
hold the rights of property; of every man to his
own domicile and equal protection under law to
every person of whatever race, religion or color;
free worship without molestation, free speech, a
free press and of every boy and girl to a free
education at the hands of the state, at the same
time denying the privilege to any sect, whether
Mahometan, Buddhist, Confucian, or Christian,
to establish separate general systems of primary,
graded or secondary education. It should abolish
forever all titles of kingship or nobility, all spe-

366 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

cial privilege of birth, wealth or origin, and all
connection between church and state anywhere in
the world; also polygamy, polyandry, and slavery
of every form; also grant the constitutional right
to all women on the earth of equality of suffrage,
property and independence under the laws. Tar-
iffs should then be abolished. General laws
should be applicable to every nation, the exercise
of the police power alone being reserved to each.
Such in brief might be the details of the gov-
ernment of a federation of the world. Constitu-
tions containing every ism of the moment of adop-
tion only result in confusion and perhaps regret.
A simple instrument laying out the barest outline,
as in the immortal document framed by the fa-
thers of the American commonwealth, and espe-
cially the genius of Alexander Hamilton, is wisest,
and best withstands the assaults of radicalism
throughout future time. Such a government
would necessarily be of the people, by the people
and for the people of the earth. Two great par-
ties would perhaps spring up, one radical and the
other conservative, for human minds naturally di-
vide themselves into those two categories. Of
course other parties might arise with the avowed
purpose of making human nature over according
to their respective patterns in a few years, but
they would not be apt to last long. Elections for
the presidency and vice presidency of the earth

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 367

would be exciting, but all nations and peoples
would in a generation become as thoroughly ac-
customed to conducting them in orderly and hon-
est fashion as are now the people of the United
States. In these every white, black, yellow, red
and brown man and woman over twenty-one
should have the same rights.

English should become the language of the
earth. Already it is used by more people than
any other. To propose a new tongue and expect
everybody to learn it to gratify the vanity of the
man who invented it would be impractical if not
ridiculous. First, as the commercial language and
then of government and all communication, Eng-
lish should be used in schools everywhere and be-
come universal. There is justice in this, for it
cannot be denied that the English speaking peo-
ples have accomplished more for human liberty
than all the balance of the race put together.
Every people should be expressed in a nation and
have a voice in the federation. About sixty
should be included in it, making a total number
of senators of about 120 and a house of represen-
tatives of more than five hundred. The states
of Asia should be India, Burma, Siam, Annam, Ti-
bet, China, Mongolia, Manchuria, Siberia, Japan,
Korea, Turkestan, Afghanistan, Persia and the
great state of Israel, center of the world's commerce
and industry and at the junction of the great

368 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

oceans and continents. Africa, now divided ar-
bitrarily into boundaries made by the colonizing
nations of Europe, should be divided into five
nations following natural limits; one bounded by
the Atlantic Ocean, Mediterranean Sea, the line
of 20° north and the eastern limits of Tripoli and
French West Africa; another comprising the lands
between Tripoli, French West Africa, the Medi-
terranean, the Red Sea, the Indian Ocean and
the northern limits of British East Africa and
Uganda; a third from the latter Ugandian and
British East African limits, along the eastern
boundaries of the Belgian Congo, Portuguese West
Africa, German Southwest Africa, the Orange
River and the Indian Ocean; a fourth bounded
by the northwestern, northern and eastern limits
of the Belgian Congo, the eastern limits of Por-
tuguese West Africa, German Southwest Africa
and the Atlantic Ocean; and a fifth circum-
scribed by the parallel of 20° north, the east-
ern limits of French West Africa and the Atlantic
Ocean. The states of Europe should be Nor-
way, Sweden, Ireland, England, Holland, Bel-
gium (restored), Germany, Austria, Denmark,
Russia, Hungary, Bohemia, Switzerland, France,
Italy, Greece, Rumania, Bulgaria and Servia.
North America would be as one. South America
might also, but, if not, it would be divided as
now into the states of Venezuela, Colombia,

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 369

Guiana, Ecuador, Peru, Chili, Argentine, Uru-
guay, Paraguay, Bolivia and Brazil. The East
Indies, the West Indies, Australia, New Zealand,
Guiana, Madagascar and Iceland might have sep-
arate commonwealths.

The attention of the entire world would be
centered upon the City of Washington where the
capital might be situated. To contend that mak-
ing that city the political center would give too
much power to the American commonwealth
would be unreasonable, after its people had sac-
rificed their all for the benefit of humanity and
had submerged their influence and authority in
the mightier commonwealth of their ideal. And
it would be the strength of the American people
which would jealously guard and strictly uphold
the constitution and laws of the Republic of Man
against unscrupulous and designing traitors or
groups of lawless people seeking to disturb it
anywhere. Newspapers in every land would re-
ceive from the wires the happenings of the day
before in the chief metropolis of the earth.
None would be so poor as to be unable to buy
or so ignorant as to be unable to read the doings
in that city of the future. The center of art,
literature, music, science, fashion, it would reflect
the best thought and highest achievements of a
billion and a half of human beings captivated by
liberty and union. What would be more fitting

370 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

than that the name of Washington, whose noble
character and soldierly qualities founded Ameri-
can freedom, should be given to the city of the
government of a regenerated mankind I

Under the aegis of such a world dominion of
universal citizenship, with every man (or woman)
eligible to the highest dignity, and freedom of
opportunity guaranteed to all, can it be questioned
that there would arise a civilization surpassing
any which the planet has heretofore seen^ The
accomplishments of every field of human endeavor
would be surpassed. Philosophy would thrive
and the glories of days that are gone would be
well nigh forgotten in the creations of literary
and dramatic art. As in ancient Athens, the sym-
metrical development of mind and body would
become the aim of men, and the ideal of beauty
in the human form and all art, whether painting,
photographic film, sculpture, building, dress or
landscape would be pursued with avidity bom
of a society wherein freedom and justice prevailed.
In industry men would bring forth the creations
of their toil with less pain and sorrow and more
enjoyment of life. In education men would not
fear to seek new truth and light, instead of con-
tenting themselves with the pap doled out by
stupid pedants of language and literature which
grew out of conditions long past; and every child
would be taught the dignity of labor and have

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 371

his hand fashioned to wrest from it something
useful. With the development of medical sci-
ence, the temperance that would come with greater
self respect, and the cleanliness that would be
the results of a world taught hygiene, and more
necessities and comforts by inventive skill, dis-
ease would in time disappear. And with men
learning to serve God only by serving men and
seeking the development of all in a common light
and happiness, might it not be almost anticipated
that selfishness itself, the evil of the world, would
in time, after many ages perhaps, die away*? No-
bler manhood and womanhood, it may be hoped,
would secure in the great state of the future an
ever increasing number of happy homes and lives.
If this dream seems vague and beyond the limi-
tations of our faith, we shall find it written by
the prophets of Israel long ago in letters that
will never die. It was Isaiah who said: "And
it shall come to pass in the last days that the
mountain of the Lord's house shall be firmly es-
tablished on the tops of the mountains and shall
be exalted above the hills, and unto it shall flow
all the nations." ^ ''And I will visit on the world
its evil and on the wicked their iniquity; and I
will stop the arrogance of the presumptuous, and
the haughtiness of the tyrants will I tumble. I
will make the mortal more precious than fine gold,

1 Isaiah 2:2.

372 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

and man more than the valued metal of Ophir." ^
"And it shall come to pass on that day that the
Lord will visit punishment on the hosts of heaven
in heaven and on the kings of the earth on the
earth. And they shall be gathered in heaps, as
prisoners, in the prison and shall be shut up in
the dungeon, and thus after many days shall they
be punished." ^ "And men will say on that day,
lo, this is our God, for whom we have waited that
he would help us; this is the Lord our God for
whom we have waited, we will rejoice and we
will be glad in his salvation." ^ "And I, because
of their works and their thoughts, will let it come
to pass to gather all the nations and tongues ; and
they shall come and shall see my glory." ^
"There shall be no more thence an infant of a
few days, nor an old man that shall not have
the full length of his days ; for as a lad shall one
die an hundred years old; and as a sinner shall
be accursed he who dieth at an hundred years
old." ' "The wolf and the lamb shall feed to-
gether, and the lion shall like the bullock eat
straw: and the serpent — dust shall be his food.
They shall not hurt nor destroy in all my holy
mountain, saith the Lord." ^ Jeremiah said:
"The vintner's call, as they that tread out the
grapes, will he lift up against all the inhabitants

2 Isaiah 13:11-12 ^ Ibid., 66:18.

3 Ibid., 24 : 21-22. ^ Ibid., 65 : 20.
* Ibid., 25:9. ''Ibid., 65:25.

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 373

of the earth. A tumultuous noise cometh out of
the ends of the earth, for the Lord hath a contro-
versy with the nations, to hold judgment over
all flesh: the wicked — these he giveth up to the
sword, saith the Lord." ® Through Ezekiel it was
said: "And I will appoint over them one shep-
herd, and he shall feed them, namely my servant
David: he it is that shall feed them, and he it is
that shall be unto them for a shepherd." ® ''And
I will display my glory among the nations." ^^
This through Joel: ''And it shall come to pass
after this that I will pour out my spirit over all
flesh; and your sons and your daughters shall
prophesy : your old men shall dream dreams ; your
young men shall see visions; and also over the
men servants and over the maid servants in
those days will I pour out my spirit." ^^ Micah
said: "And he shall judge between many peo-
ple, and decide for strong nations even afar
off; and they shall beat their swords into plowr
shares, and their spears into pruning knives: na-
tion shall not lift up sword against nation, and
they shall not learn any more war. But they
shall sit every man under his vine and under his
fig tree, with none to make them afraid, for the
mouth of the Lord of Hosts hath spoken it." ^*

* Jeremiah 25:30-31. i* Joel 3:1-2.

0 Ezekiel 34:23. 12 Micah 4: 3-4.

^^Ihid., 39:21.

374 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Habakkuk says: "For the earth shall be filled
with the glory of the Lord as the waters cover
the sea." ^^ Zephaniah declares : "Yea, then will
I change unto the people a pure language, that
they may all call on the name of the Lord, to serve
him with one accord." ^* Haggai foretells : "And
I will overthrow the throne of kingdoms, and I
will destroy the strength of the kingdoms of the
nations; and I will overthrow chariots and those
that ride in them; and the horses and the riders
shall come down, every one by the sword of his
brother." ^^ Zechariah proclaims: "On that
day, saith the Lord of hosts, shall ye call every
man his neighbor under the vine and under the
fig tree." ^^ And again: "Thus hath said the
Lord of hosts. In those days it shall happen
that ten men out of all the languages of the
nations shall take hold — yea, they shall take hold
of the skirt of him that is a Jew, saying, let us
go with you, for we have heard that God is with
you." ^'^ David said: "He causeth wars to
cease unto the end of the earth; he breaketh the
bow and cutteth the spear in pieces; he bumeth
wagons in the fire. Be still, and know that I
am God. I will be exalted among the nations,
I will be exalted on the earth." ^^ "The moun-
tains shall bear peace for the people, and the

13 Habakkuk 2:14. i* Zechariah 3:10.

1* Zephaniah 3:9. ^"^ Ibid., 8:23.

15 Haggai 2:22. 1® Psalm 46:10-11.

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 375

hills the same through righteousness." ^^ And
David again: "The Lord hath sworn and will
not repent of it, Thou shalt be forever a priest
after the order of Melchizedek. The Lord at thy
right hand crusheth kings on the day of his
wrath." ^^ Finally through Daniel the word
came: "But in the days of these kingdoms will
the God of heaven set up a kingdom, which shall
to eternity not be destroyed, and its rule shall
not be transferred to any other people ; but it will
grind up and make an end to all these kingdoms,
while it will itself endure for ever." ^^ And
also: "The saints of the Most High will ob-
tain the kingdom, and possess the kingdom to eter-
nit3% even to all eternity for ever." ^^ Then he
said: "Until the ancient of days came and pro-
cured justice unto the saints of the Most High;
and the time came and the saints took possesion
of the kingdom."

The meaning of these latter words of Daniel
is that at the time of the spiritual awakening of
mankind to simple righteousness after the estab-
lishment of freedom, equality of opportunity and
complete tolerance on the earth, under the gov-
ernment of the Republic of Man, those minds
that have most served the Most High during the
centuries in which they have appeared in life

19 Psalm 72:3. 21 Dan. 2:44.

20 Ibid., 1 10:4-5. 22 jiid,^ 7 . ,8,

376 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

frequently to do His work and lead the world
nearer and nearer to obedience to Him, will one
after the other be recognized for their abilities
and character and be lifted up by their fellow
men to the highest place of responsibility on the
planet as president of the Federation of the
World. As they have been enabled to achieve
by inspiration in the past, so will they be guided
by the will of the Eternal in the future. These
are meant by Zechariah when he said: 'T saw
this night, and behold there was a man riding
upon a red horse, and he was standing among
the myrtle trees that were in the deep valley; and
behind him were red, pale and white horses. And
I said. What are these, O my Lord? Then said
the angel that spoke with me, I will show thee
what these are. And the man that stood among
the myrtle trees answered and said, These are
those whom the Lord hath sent to traverse the
earth. And they answered the angel of the Lord
that stood among the myrtle trees and said, We
have traversed the earth, and, behold, all the
earth is inhabited quietly, and is at rest." ^^ Re-
incarnated century after century, they do the
work of the Lord. As is but natural, their am-
bitions, aspirations, abilities and character remain
the same. Each only becomes more trained for
his respective task. They perform the wonders

23 Zechariah i:8-ii.

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 377

they do, not because they arc greater than the
other sons of men, but on account of the fact that
they are simple, humble and obedient to their
Creator and hence more subject to His guidance.
They are also meant by Zechariah in those im-
mortal words : ^'^ "And the angel that spoke
with me came back again, and waked me up, as
a man that is awakened up out of his sleep; and
he said unto me. What art thou seeing^ And
I said, I have looked, and behold, there is a can-
dlestick all of gold, with a bowl upon its top,
and its seven lamps are thereupon, and seven pipes
to the seven lamps which are upon the top; and
two olive trees are upon it, one upon the right
side of the bowl, and the other upon the left side
thereof. And I commenced and said unto the
angel that spoke with me, saying, what are these,
my Lord? Then the angel that spoke with me
answered and said unto me, Knowest thou not
what these are? And I said, No, my Lord.
Then answered he and spoke unto me, saying.
Not by might, nor by power, but by my spirit,
saith the Lord of hosts. Who art thou, O great
mountain? before Zerubbabel (the anointed)
thou wilt become a plain: and he shall bring
forth the headstone with shoutings of Grace,
grace unto it. And the word of the Lord came
unto me, saying. The hands of Zerubbabel (the

2* Zechariah, 4.

378 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

anointed) have laid the foundation of this house,
and his hands shall complete it; and thou shalt
know that the Lord of hosts hath sent me unto
you. For whoever even despised the day of its
small beginning: yet will they rejoice when they
see the plummet in the hand of Zerubbabel (the
anointed) with those seven: they are the eyes of
the Lord, which hold a survey through all the
earth. And I began, and said unto him, What
are these two olive trees upon the right side of
the candlestick and upon the left? And I began
a second time, and said unto him, What are these
two olive branches, which are close by the two
golden pipes which empty out of themselves the
gold colored oil? And he said to me as followeth,
Knowest thou not what these are? And I said,
No, my Lord. Then said he. These are the two
sons of the clear oil that stand by the Lord of the
whole earth." The oil is the truth. On the
throne of grace, as it is called in Daniel, they will
dispense divine leadership to the world.

Who but the Almighty put the idea into the
brain of Christopher Columbus that lying off there
toward the west was land — perhaps the coast of
Cathay? Who gave him the intense longing
when a boy for the sea? Who subdued the Aztecs
with the same rod of iron with which they had
slaughtered their victims at the sacrifice? Who
practically exterminated the savage Indians who

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 379

with fiendish cruelty, depravity and lust had been
attacking each other from time immemorial as
they later tomahawked the white men, burned
their houses and attacked their wives'? Who pre-
pared this land between the two great oceans and
then led to it by inspiration the lovers of liberty
and despisers of hardship of every land*? Who
inspired the simple but intrepid spirit of George
Washington"? Who guided the fathers of this re-
public when they met in Philadelphia to deliber-
ate upon a constitution, especially when Benjamin
Franklin arose, after a deadlock in the debate,
and asked light from the Bestower of Blessings?
Who inspired the kindly soul of Abraham Lin-
coln in the dark days of the war which was to de-
termine whether this country was to become alto-
gether free and unified so as to be potential
enough in the hereafter to give liberty to all men?
When another and different crisis arose, who
brought forward Grover Cleveland to stand like
a rock in a weary land against attempts by sophists
to repudiate the financial credit of the nation and
by Great Britain to invalidate the Monroe doc-
trine*? In the time of the Spanish conflict who
guided the noble and patient McKinley to fight
for liberty and honor? When the world was in
strife with this nation unprepared, who brought
forth a man to lead whose very nature rebelled
against violence and warfare and who therefore

38o THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

maintained peace? Who will bring forth another
man when the necessity for him arises*? Who
has built the nation and guided it through all
the years? None but the living God! None
but His omnipotent hand has fashioned this
mighty land,

"Here, where Freedom's equal throne
To all her valiant sons is known ;
Where all are conscious of her cares,
And each the power that rules him shares." ^^

The United States, contented and happy, should
realize that it cannot enjoy its benefits long if
it does not prepare for its destiny which is to give
that contentment and happiness to all mankind.
If it does not do its duty in exertion to the ut-
most to expend its treasure, train its youth for
military service and sacrifice life abundantly in
battles on sea and land, it will be deprived of
its own liberty as punishment. If it does so exert
itself, trains all and is willing to sacrifice all,
it will be rewarded by receiving the honor and the
glory of having accomplished more for humanity
than any nation since the world began. This it
should do because it has unrivaled wealth of man-
hood and womanhood, spirit, farm, factory and
mine. The nation should awaken to the greatest
crusade that the ages have known, not to free a

"Akcnsidc, Odes, 4:2.

THE FEDERATION OF THE WORLD 381

cross and a sepulchcr, but all mankind; to make
the entire race brothers and sisters, not in a monas-
tery or nunnery, but under God. It should not
cease from its toil, its sorrow and pain, its hazard-
ous undertakings in the face of pitiful bleatings
from copperheads and pacificists, its grief for the
sons, fathers and brothers slain in the fight, its put-
ting every hazard to the grueling test of iron and
steel and blood, its triumphant shouts of victory
which are the rewards of complete efFacement for
the accomplishment of a grand ideal, its continual
giving birth to patriots who will, like Nathan
Hale, regret that they have but one life to give
for their country, its seeking through stress and
storm for every spiritual light and material means
to bring the common end, its seeing through
comradery and altruism for the righteousness of
the race,

"Till the war drum throbs no longer and the battle flags

are furled
In the parliament of man, the federation of the world.
There the common sense of most shall hold a fretful

realm in awe,
And the kindly earth shall slumber, lapt in universal

law." '•

The promises of God are always kept. As He
spoke through the sages of the ages, through in-

*• Tennyson, "In Memoriam."

382 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

spired minds from David and Isaiah to Kant and
Napoleon, so shall it be. The noble vision they
foresaw no longer seems a weird and unlikely
dream. It already appears dimly but certainly
upon the horizon as a practicable accomplishment.

CHAPTER XIV

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL

"And when this cometh to pass (lo, it will come!),
then shall they know that a prophet hath been among
them." — EzEKiEL 33 :33.

There were men in Israel in ancient days who
denied the wisdom of the prophets unless it coin-
cided with what they already believed. When
the Babylonian monarchy was about to attack
Jerusalem it was the voice of Jeremiah which
warned his people that it would be wisest for
them to quietly accept the yoke of the stronger
and rising kingdom. They refused to listen,
treated him as a traitor and cast him into a dun-
geon. But his words were fulfilled. Then, like
Washington, he refused the monarchial honors
the conquering Nebuchadnezzar desired to bestow
upon him, and merely chose an abode free from
molestation in his own land, asking also that his
friend Baruch be freed. Moses centuries before
had warned his race that if they disobeyed the
Eternal One and resorted to abominable practises,
including unnaturalness and the worship of idols,

383

384 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

they would be dispersed among the nations and,
after they had been purged of their wickedness
by terrible punishments through a long period, He
would again have mercy upon them and restore
them to their own land. Only a few listened.
The great body of the people disobeyed. Yet the
curse of God was fulfilled to the letter. Sepa-
rated from their native land and cast among the
countries, the Jews have been spat upon, de-
nounced upon the slightest pretext, bitterly hated
and persecuted upon the rack, broken upon the
wheel, pursued by fire and sw^ord, and even in
free America, reviled and shunned for no other
reason than because Hebrews. Only at the pres-
ent time, because of a slackening of legal and so-
cial restrictions, the growth of the Zionist move-
ment, and the increased security in life and prop-
erty of the individual Jew in nearly all the na-
tions, are they who care to see beginning to per-
ceive that the fulfilment of the latter part of the
prediction of the divinely inspired Moses is not
far removed. After the Jews had passed over
from Egypt into Palestine, under Joshua, conquer-
ing the peoples they found there, it is said that
"the Lord gave them rest round about, all just as
he had sworn unto their fathers: and there stood
not up before them a man of all their enemies; all
their enemies the Lord delivered unto their hand.
There failed not aught of all the good things which

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 385

the Lord hath spoken unto the house of Israel : it
all came to pass." ^ Joshua himself then warned
his fellow countrymen: "Take good care, there-
fore, for your soul's sake, to love the Lord your
God." ^ "Now therefore fear the Lord and serve
him in sincerity and in truth." ^ Sarcastically
perhaps, "Joshua said unto the people. Ye will
not be able to serve the Lord; for He is a holy
God ; He is a watchful God ; He will not have any
indulgence for your transgressions and your sins.
If ye forsake the Lord and serve strange gods, then
will He again do you evil and consume you, after
that He hath done you good." * And so it came to
pass. Then appeared Samuel, another prophet,
who said : "He ever guardeth the feet of his pious
ones, and the wicked shall be made silent in dark-
ness; for not by strength can man prevail." ^ In
passing it is remarked in the book of Samuel
that "in former times it was customary in Israel,
than when a man went to inquire of God, he said
thus. Come and let us go as far as the seer; for the
prophet of the present day was in former times
called a seer." ®

Then it came to Samuel by the Divine guidance
that he was to go to the son of Jesse, who proved
to be the shepherd boy, David, and say to him that

1 Joshua 31:42-43. * Ibid., 34:19-20.

^Ibid., 23:11. 5 1 Saral. 2:9.

^Ihid., 24: 14. *Ibid., 9:9.

386 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

he had been chosen king of Israel. And so the lad
became. Later Achiyah told Jeroboam that he
would succeed to a part of the kingdom which
would be divided after the death of Solomon, his
father. Rehoboam, the iirst successor of the
wisest of kings, became a tyrant, his subjects re-
belled and the vision was fulfilled to the letter.
Isaiah prophesied to Hezekiah, and Ezekiel to
Zedekiah that all in Jerusalem and the king's
house would be carried away to Babylon. And so
they were. Isaiah, too, predicted that as soon as
his child Immanuel should grow to the age when he
should know the difference between good and evil
the king of Assyria would come. This happened.
When Sennacherib of Assyria appeared before
Jerusalem to attack it Isaiah foretold that he
would hear a rumor and return to his own land.
This was fulfilled. Then this prophet had another
son, Maher-shalal-chash-baz. It came to the
prophet that before the lad should know how to
call father or mother, the wealth of Damascus and
Samaria should be carried away by the Assyrian
monarch. And they were. Israel escaped de-
struction, but passed under the yoke of Nineveh.
The great prophet now declared that his people
should not be afraid of Asshur, for in a little while
the indignation of the Lord would cease, the hand
of the oppressor smitten and the burden lifted
from the shoulders of Israel. This he said would

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 387

be because of the fatness of Assyria; that is, it
would pass to decline of energy and decay. This
too, came true, for Babylon succeeded as the
mighty power. Isaiah saw the doom of Damascus
and that men of that city would no more turn to
their altars, groves and images, which their hands
had fashioned, but to their Maker, the Holy One
of Israel ; that Egypt would revolt, pass under the
foreign yoke and see many of its inhabitants led
away captive; that altars to the Lord would be
established in Egypt and that there would be com-
munity of interest between Egypt and Assyria;
that Babylon would fall and all its graven images
be shivered unto the ground ; that the feet of Tyre
would carry her afar off to sojourn, that she would
fall because she had no more strength, be lost sev-
enty years, revive again. And so it was fulfilled.
Damascus fell before Tiglath Pileser III and did
not rise again for a long time, Egypt was divided
in the Ethiopian invasion of the XXIII and XXIV
Dynasties, passed under the yoke of Assyria, saw
many of its inhabitants, including the royal harem,
led away by Esarhaddon; after Necho had de-
feated Josiah of Judah many Israelites were taken
away to Egypt and Hebrew altars were set up
there, Ptolemy II in his time freeing an hundred
thousand of the Israelites; because of Assyria de-
stroying the Ethiopian tyranny and setting up
Necho, the father of Psammeticus, as governor,

388 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

there was community of interest between the vassal
and conquering kingdom ; Babylon did finally fall
before the Persians; Tyre was carried off by its
own feet to Carthage, under Sennacherib and Esar-
haddon was oppressed, for just how many years it
is difficult to verify at the present stage of archeo-
logical excavation, and then did for a time prosper
again. Isaiah lived in the years between 750 B.C.
and 700 B.C. It was a time of change and up-
heaval in the history of the world. That is why
he appeared as a light to the people. An hun-
dred years were to pass before Jeremiah. In the
time of the latter the Jewish nation had declined
morally. It was Jeremiah who foresaw the ter-
rible chastisement that befell in 586 b.c. He
says: "Every one neighed after the wife of his
neighbor. Shall I not for these things inflict pun-
ishment? saith the Lord: and shall on a nation
such as this my soul not be avenged*?" He con-
tinues to speak in the name of his God: "I will
render this city (Jerusalem) desolate and an ob-
ject of derision." ^ "I will tear you (the Jews)
completely away, and I will cast you off, and the
city that I have given to you and to your fathers,
out of my presence. And I will lay upon you an
everlasting disgrace and a perpetual shame which
shall not be forgotten." * "And I will make them
a horror because of their mishaps unto all the king-

^ Jeremiah 19:8. ^ Ibid., 2$: 39-^0.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 389

doms of the earth, a disgrace and a proverb, a by-
word and a curse, in all the places wherein I will
drive them. And I will send out against them
the sword, the famine and the pestilence, till they
be destroyed from off the land that I had given
unto them and to their fathers." ^ So it came to
pass. Jeremiah foretold that Philistia would be
utterly spoiled and wasted by overflowing hosts
from the northern lands. This, too, shortly oc-
curred. He prophesied the great dispersion, like
Isaiah, and the return "when they shall serve the
Lord their God and David their king, whom I shall
raise up unto them." ^^ And when "their leader
shall be of themselves, and their ruler shall proceed
from the midst of them" ^^ (in a republic.) He
warned Zedekiah that if he passed under the yoke
of the king of Babylon, Jerusalem would not be
destroyed by fire. The king did not do so and
the punishment was severe. He foretold the over-
throw of Egypt by Nebuchadnezzar. It so hap-
pened. He predicted the ruin of Philistia, Moab,
Tyre and Sidon, the fall of Babylon, and the rise
of Media. As he saw, so came it to be. Ezekiel
in mighty messages to the people of the exile, pre-
dicted, as his forebears had done, the doom which
the Jews have suffered throughout the centuries:
"Yea, I will render thee a ruin and a disgrace

^ Ibid., 24:9-10.
"^^Ibid., 30:9. ^^Ibid., 30: ax.

390 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

among the nations that are round about thee."
Then he, too, foretells the restoration in the
Golden Age : ''And those of you that escape shall
remember me among the nations among whom they
shall have been carried captive, when I shall have
broken their licentious heart, which had departed
from me, even with their eyes which were gone
astray after their idols, and they shall loath them-
selves on account of the evil deeds which they have
committed with all their abominations. And they
shall know that I am the Lord: not for naught
have I spoken that I would do this evil unto
them." ^^ "And I will assemble you from out
of the countries whither ye have been scattered,
and I will give you the land of Israel. And they
shall come thither, and they shall remove all of its
detestable things out of it. And I will give them
one single heart, and a new spirit will I put within
you; and I will remove the heart of stone out of
their body, and I will give unto them a heart of
flesh, in order that they may walk in my statutes
and keep my ordinances and do them; and they
shall be unto me for a people, and I will indeed
be unto them for a God." ^^ Certainly the Jews
were dispersed. Their return is yet to be. He
foresaw that Tyre would become "a. place for the
spreading out of nets ... in the midst of the

12 Ezekiel 6 : 9-10. ^^ Ibid., 11 : 17-20.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 391

sea." ^^ "Down to the grave will they cast thee,
and thou shalt die the deaths of the slain in the
heart of the sea. Wilt thou then say, I am God
before him that slayeth thee, when thou art but a
man, and no God, in the hand of him that fatally
woundeth thee? " ^^ "As though thou hadst not
been will I render thee, and thou shalt be no more ;
and thou shalt be sought for, but thou shalt not be
found any more to eternity, saith the Lord
Eternal." ^^ Tyre to-day is a place where fisher-
men cast their nets. It was Jeremiah who pre-
dicted that Egypt would become "a mass of ruins,
a waste and a wilderness, from Migdol to Seveneh
even up to the border of Ethiopia. There shall
not pass through it the foot of man, and the foot
of beast shall not pass through it, and it shall not
be inhabited forty years. And I will render the
land of Egypt a desolate land in the midst of deso-
lated countries, and her cities among the cities that
are ruined shall be desolated forty years, and I will
scatter the Eg>'^ptians among the nations, and will
disperse them through the countries. ^"^ I will give
unto Nebuchadnezzar the king of Babylon the land
of Egypt." ^^ "I will make the land desolate and
all that filleth it, by the hand of strangers. I the
Lord hath spoken it. Thus hath said the Lord

1* Ibid., 26 : 5. 1^ Ibid., 29 : 1D-12.

^^Ibid., 28:8-9. ^^Ibid., 29:19.

^^Ibid., 26:21.

392 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Eternal, I will also destroy the idols, and I will
cause false gods to cease out of Noph ; and a prince
out of the land of Egypt shall there not be any
more." ^^ An investigation of the facts discloses
that Nebuchadnezzar did invade Egypt; that un-
der the Persian, Cambyses, the country was com-
pletely crushed ; that subsequently the land became
so desolate in the midst of desolated countries that
even its language, history and monuments were
forgotten until Napoleon brought to light the Ro-
setta stone; and from the time shortly after Jere-
miah wrote until now, through the Babylonian,
Persian, Grecian, foreign Ptolemaic, Roman, Mo-
hammedan, French and British occupations there
has been no native prince to lead the nation.
Jeremiah also declared of Babylon: "Behold, I
am against thee, O destroying mountain, saith the
Lord, which destroyest all the earth; and I will
stretch out my hand over thee and I will roll thee
down from the rocks, and will render thee a burnt
mountain. And they shall not take from thee a
stone for a comer, nor a stone for foundations ; but
everlasting ruins shalt thou be, saith the Lord."
So exact was this prophecy that naught but a great
mound covered the site of the once mighty city
when it was rediscovered during the nineteenth
century. Nahum had spoken in the name of God
when he said of Nineveh: "And I will cast

I'Ezekiel, jo: ia~z3.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 393

abominable filth upon thee and defile thee and ren-
der thee a dirt heap. And it shall come to pass
that they that see thee shall flee from thee and say,
Laid waste is Nineveh." And this city, too, as
it was foretold, was buried beneath the debris of
the ages and completely lost to the view of man
until in the last century the great mound at Mosul
was found to contain its remains.

These sublime passages from the Old Testa-
ment, containing prophecies that have been ful-
filled to the letter, are auguries of those other pre-
dictions made by the seers of Israel which have not
yet reached final fruition. Those of the Messiah,
the Messianic kingdom and the Messianic time,
but await the passage of the period indicated
through Daniel. He with exactness predicted the
rise and fall of empires that had not yet come into
being in his time. He gave descriptions of these
and also dates which are unmistakable in their
clarity. Viewing them in the light of the pres-
ent and the immediate future of the world, they
seem as majestic as the pyramids against the azure
sky of the Nile valley. Speaking out of Baby-
lon, the capital of an empire long since sunk to
rest and oblivion, his far seeing vision across cen-
turies of Asiatic, Egyptian, European and Ameri-
can history seems like the hand writing of God
which he himself is said to have deciphered upon
the palace of Belshazzar.

394 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

In the first of these visions Daniel revealed the
dream of Nebuchadnezzar and its meaning. The
astrologers and wise men had, when requested
to decipher it, asked that the king first tell them
his dream. He had refused and condemned them
to death, when Daniel asked that he be given time
to find the solution. This came to him in a dream
of his own at night after he had prayed for light.
Then did Daniel exclaim: "May the name of
God be blessed from eternity and to all eternity,
for wisdom and might are His; and He changeth
times and seasons; He removeth kings and raiseth
up kings; He giveth wisdom unto the wise and
knowledge to those that possess understanding.
He it is that re vealeth what is deep and secret ; He
knoweth what is in the darkness and the light
dwelleth with Him." ^^ The prophet said to the
king: "The secret which the king hath demanded
no wise men, astrologers, magicians or soothsayers
can tell unto the king; but there is a God in heaven
that revealeth secrets, and he hath made known to
King Nebuchadnezzar what is to be in the latter
days. Thy dream and the vision of thy head upon
thy couch were these. As for thee, O king; thy
thoughts when thou wast on thy couch rose within
thee concerning what is to come to pass hereafter,
and the Revealer of Secrets hath made known to
thee what is to come to pass. But, as for me, this

20 Dan. 2:20-22.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 395

secret hath not been revealed to me because of any
wisdom that is in me more than in all other living,
but for the sake that men might make known the
interpretation to the king, and that thou mightest
understand the thoughts of thy heart." ^^

Daniel continues : "Thou, O king, sawest, and
behold there was a large image, its head was of fine
gold, its breast and its arms were of silver, its belly
and its thighs of copper, its legs of iron, its feet
part of them of iron and part of them of clay.
Thou didst look on till the moment that a stone
tore itself loose, not through human hands, and it
struck the image upon its feet that were of iron
and clay and ground them to pieces. Then were
the iron, the clay, the copper, the silver and the
gold ground up together, and become like the
chaff of the summer threshing floor ; and the wind
carried them away and no trace was found of
them; and the stone that had strucken the image
became a mighty mountain and filled the whole
earth. This is the dream and its interpretation
will we relate before the king. Thou, O king, art
a king of kings, to whom the God of heaven hath
given kingdom, power and strength and honor:
and wheresoever the children of men dwell hath he
given the beasts of the field and the fowls of the
heaven into thy hand, and hath made thee ruler
over them all. Thou art the head of gold. And
21 Ibid., 2 : 27-30.

396 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

after thee there will arise another kingdom (Per-
sia) inferior to thee; and another third kingdom
of copper (Macedon) which will bear rule over all
the earth. And the fourth kingdom (Rome) will
be as strong as iron; forasmuch as iron grindeth
up and beateth down all things, and as iron that
breaketh everything, will it grind up and break
all these (Mediterranean nationalities). And
that thou saw the feet and toes (European coun-
tries), part of them of potter's clay (weak) and
part of them of iron (strong), signifieth that it will
be a divided kingdom, although there will be in it
of the strength of the iron (through Roman law
and institutions) ; forasmuch as thou sawest the
iron mingled with the miry clay (by blood and lan-
guage). And as the toes of the feet were part of
them of iron and part of them of clay; so will the
kingdom be partly strong and partly brittle. And
whereas thou sawest iron mingled with miry clay,
so will they mingle themselves among the seed of
men (by colonization across the sea) ; but they
will not cleave firmly one to another (in a Europe
of separate nationalities), even as the iron can-
not be mingled with clay. But in the days of
these (European) kings will the God of heaven
set up a kingdom (the Republic of Man) which
shall to eternity not be destroyed, and its rule shall
not be transferred to any other people ; but it will
grind up and make an end of all these kingdoms,

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 397

while it will itself endure forever. Whereas thou
sawest that out of the mountain a stone tore itself
loose (like the 'sprout'), not through human hands
(but by inspiration), and that it ground up (in
the crucible of the Great Republic the power of)
the iron, the copper, the clay, the silver and the
gold : the great God hath made known what is to
come to pass after this : and the dream is reliable
and its interpretation certain." ^^

The book of Daniel relates that ''then did king
Nebuchadnezzar fall upon his face, and he bowed
down to Daniel, and ordered that they should offer
an oblation and sweet odors unto him. The king
answered unto Daniel and said : 'Of a truth it is
that your God is the God of gods and the revealer
of secrets, because thou hast been able to reveal
this secret.' Then did the king elevate Daniel and
gave him many presents and made him ruler
over the whole province of Babylon and chief of
the superintendents over all the wise men of Baby-
lon.'* Thereafter followed the beautifully sym-
bolic stories of the trust in God through trials in
the fire (of experience) of Shadrach, Meshach and
Abednego, of the dream of Nebuchadnezzar of
his being brought low to eat grass so that he might
know that "the Most High ruleth over the king-
doms of men," of the interpretation of the warn-
ing on the wall of the fall of Belshazzar's king-

asDan. a:3Z-45.

398 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

dom, and of Daniel being thrown into the den of
lions and "no manner of hurt being found on him
because he had trusted in his God."

The second of his marvelous visions is then
narrated and is here given: 'T saw in my vision
by night, and behold the four winds of heaven
blew fiercely on the great (Mediterranean) sea.
And four great beasts (of Europe) came up from
the sea, differing one from another. The first
(Rome) was like a lion (in power) and had
eagle's wings (to spread out over the land) : I
looked till its wings were plucked out, and it was
lifted up from the earth (in deprivation of its
dominion) and was placed upon its feet as a man
(in strength), and a human heart (to realize that
it must meet its end like all mankind) was given
to it. And behold there was another, a second
beast (the Empire of the West), like a bear (of
the northern climate), and on one (western) side
(of Europe) was it placed, with three ribs (Char-
lemagne, Charles V, Napoleon) in its mouth (to
hold) between its (conquering) teeth: and thus
they said. Arise, eat much (territorial) flesh.'
After this I looked and, lo, there was another (Brit-
ain), like a leopard (with many spots of territory
dotted over the surface of the earth) ; and it had
four wings (British North America, Australia,
South Africa and India) of a bird (that flew far)
on (at) its back; the beast had also four heads

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 399

(England, Ireland, Scotland, Wales) ; and domin-
ion (nearly a fourth of the globe) was given unto
it. After this I looked in the night visions, and
behold there was a fourth beast (Germany) dread-
ful and terrible and strong exceedingly; and it
had great iron teeth (strong armies and a navy) ;
it devoured (territory) and ground up (rights
and institutions), and what was left it (ruth-
lessly) stamped with its feet; and it was differ-
ent (in the composition of the states of its king-
dom) from all the beasts that were before it;
and it had ten horns (or kings, as follows: Fred-
erick III, Frederick William I, Frederick the
Great, Frederick William II, Frederick William
III, Frederick William IV, William I, Fred-
erick III, William II, Frederick William V).
I looked carefully at the horns, and, behold,
another little horn (Prussia) came up between
them, and three of the first horns (Denmark,
Austria, France) were plucked up by the roots
(and defeated) before the same; and behold
there were eyes like the eyes of a man in this
horn (earthly, materialistic and seeking do-
minion), with a mouth speaking presumptuous
things (of the divine right of monarchy and the
power of blood and iron). I was looking until
chairs (for presidents) were set down (in prepara-
tion) and an (individual) Ancient of days (who
had lived and wrought for many centuries and is

400 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

to be the Messiah) seated himself (in the Presi-
dency of the United States), whose garment was
white as snow (in spiritual light), and the hair
of whose head was like clean wool (in inspira-
tion) ; his chair was like flames of fire (in its suc-
cessful warfare), and his wheels like fire that burnt
(and left lands in ruins) ; a stream of fire (ar-
mies) issued and came forth before him (at his
command) ; thousands times thousands ministered
unto him (in assistance), and myriad times myr-
iads stood before him (as soldiers in the past, the
present and the future) ; they sat down to hold
judgment (of the history and condition of men)
and the books (of the Old Testament) were
opened (in explanation). I looked then because
of the presumptuous words which the (Prussian
kingly) horn had spoken, — I looked till the
(German) beast was slain and its body destroyed,
and given over to the burning fire (of the con-
queror). But concerning the rest of the beasts,
they had their dominion (of empire) taken away;
yet a longer duration of life (as kingdoms) was
given unto them until the time and period (of the
end of the dispensation in the Federation of the
World). I looked in the nightly visions and, be-
hold, with the clouds of heaven (in spiritual in-
spiration) came one like the son of man (in ap-
pearance, though inspired) and he attained as far
as the Ancient of days (in the completion of his

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 401

work) and they brought him near before him.
And there were given him dominion and govern-
ment and dignity (as president of the entire
earth), and all peoples, nations and languages had
to serve him: his dominion (the Republic of
Man) is an everlasting dominion which shall not
pass away, and his kingdom is one which shall
never be destroyed.

"My spirit was deeply shaken within me,
Daniel, in the midst of its tenement, and the
visions of my head troubled me. I came near
unto one of those that stood by and asked him
something concerning all this: and he spoke to
me and made known unto me the interpretation of
the things. These great beasts, of which there
are four, are four kings who are to arise on the
earth. But the saints of the Most High (who
are His servants) will obtain the kingdom, and
possess the kingdom (in ruling over it) to eternity,
even to all eternity.' Then I desired what is
certain concerning the fourth beast, which was
different from all these others, exceedingly dread-
ful, whose (armed) teeth were of iron, and whose
nails (munitions) were of copper (metal) which
devoured, ground up and stamped with its feet
what was left (of the beasts or kingdoms that had
gone before) ; and concerning the ten horns
(kings) that were in its head (of the state) and
concerning the other (Prussian Empire) which

402 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

came up and before which three fell down, — even
concerning that horn which had eyes and a mouth
speaking presumptuous things and whose appear-
ance was greater than that of its companions. I
had seen how the same horn had made war with
the saints (of liberty and righteousness) and pre-
vailed against them (for a time, at least) : until
the Ancient of days came and procured justice
unto the saints of the Most High, and the time
came and the saints took possession of the king-
dom. Thus said he, 'The fourth beast signifieth
that a fourth kingdom (the German Empire) will
be upon the earth which is to be different from all
kingdoms, and will devour all the earth and will
tread it down and grind it up. And the ten horns
out of this kingdom signify that ten kings will
arise; and another will arise after them (the Em-
pire) and he will be different from the first (Prus-
sia) and three kings (of Russia, England and
Italy) will he bring low. And he will speak
words (of materialism) against the Most High,
and the (spiritual) saints of the Most High will
he oppress, and think to change the festivals and
law (as Haeckel I) ; and they will be given up unto
his hand until a time (a thousand) and times
(another thousand) and half a time (half a
thousand). But they will sit down to hold judg-
ment, and they will take away his (the then Ger-
man Emperor's) dominion, to destroy and to an-

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 403

nihilate it unto the end. And the kingdom and
the dominion and the power over the kingdoms
under the whole heaven will be given to the
saints of the Most High, whose kingdom is an
everlasting kingdom, and all governments are to
worship and obey him' " (the last word an inter-
polation, as is all of Isaiah LIII).

Probably in the latter part of his life, in the
days of Belshazzar, Daniel again was enabled to
see into the future. He says : "And I saw in the
vision — and it came to pass in my seeing that I
was in Shushan (Susa) the capital, which is in
the province of El am — and I saw in the vision as
though I was by the river Ulai. And I lifted up
my eyes and saw, and behold, there was a ram
(empire) standing before the river, and he had
two horns (Media and Persia) ; and the horns
were high (in power) ; but one (Persia) was
higher than the other, and the higher one came up
last (Cyrus deposing Asytyages). I saw the ram
butting (in its conquering) westward and north-
ward and southward; so that all the beasts could
not stand before him, and no one was there to de-
liver out of his hand : and he did according to his
will and became great. And as I was looking at-
tentively, behold, there came a shaggy he-goat
(Greece) from the west over the face of the whole
earth, without touching the ground (in defeat) ;
and the goat had a slightly large horn (Macedon)

404 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

between his eyes. And he (Alexander) came as
far as the ram that had two horns, that I had seen
standing before the river, and ran at him with his
furious power. And I saw him coming close unto
the ram, and he became bitterly enraged against
him, and he struck the ram and broke his two
horns ; and there was no power in the ram to stand
forward before him: and he cast him down to
the ground and stamped upon him; and there was
no one to deliver the ram out of his hand."

Of this time Josephus says : ^^ "Now Alexan-
der when he had taken Gaza, made haste to go
up to Jerusalem ; and Jadua, the high priest, when
he heard that, was in an agony and under terror,
as not knowing how he should meet the Mace-
donians, since the king was displeased at his fore-
going disobedience. He therefore ordained that
the people should make supplications, and should
join with him in making supplications to God,
whom he besought to protect that nation, and to
deliver them from the perils that were coming
upon them. Whereupon God warned him in a
dream, which came upon him after he had offered
sacrifice, that 'he should take courage and adorn
the city and open the gates; that the rest should
appear in white garments, but that he and the
priests should meet the king in the habits proper
to their order, without the dread of any ill conse-

23 "Antiquities," XI ; 8, 4-5.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 405

quences, which the providence of God would pre-
vent.' Upon which when he arose from his
sleep he greatly rejoiced, and declared to all the
warning he had received from God. According
to which dream he acted entirely and so waited
for the coming of the king. And when he under-
stood that he was not far from the city, he went
out in procession, with the priests and multitude
of the citizens. The procession was venerable,
and the manner of it different from that of other
nations. It reached to a place called Sapha,
which name translated into Greek means a pros-
pect, for you have thence a prospect both of Jeru-
salem and the temple; and when the Phoenicians
and the Chaldeans that followed him thought that
they should have liberty to plunder the city and
torment the high priest to death, which the king's
displeasure fairly promised them, the very re-
verse of it happened ; for Alexander, when he saw
the multitude at a distance, in white garments,
while the priest stood clothed with fine linen, and
the high priest in purple and scarlet clothing, with
his miter on his head, having the golden plate
whereon the name of God was engraved, he ap-
proached by himself and adored that name and
first saluted the high priest. The Jews also did
altogether, with one voice, salute Alexander and
encompass him about. Whereupon the king of
Syria and the rest were surprised at what Alex-

4o6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

ander had done, and supposed him disordered in
his mind. However, Parmenio alone went up to
him and asked him, 'How it came to pass, that
when all others adored him, he should adore the
high priest of the Jews?' To whom he replied:
'I did not adore him, but that God who hath hon-
ored him with his high priesthood; for I saw this
very person in a dream, in this very habit, when I
was at Dios in Macedonia, who, when I was con-
sidering with myself how I might obtain the do-
minion of Asia, exhorted me to make no delay, but
boldly to pass over the sea thither, for that he
would conduct my army, and would give me the
dominion over the Persians ; whence it is, that hav-
ing seen no other in that habit, and now seeing
this person in it, and remembering that vision,
and the exhortation which I had in my dream, I
believe that I bring this army under the divine
conduct, and shall therewith conquer Darius and
destroy the power of the Persians, and that all
things will succeed according to what is in my
mind.' And when he had said this to Parmenio
and had given the high priest his right hand, the
priests ran along by him and he came into the city.
And when he went up into the temple he offered
sacrifice to God, according to the high priest's di-
rection (as Napoleon professed the Mussulman
faith in Egypt) ; and magnificently treated both
the high priest and the priests. And when the

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 407

Book of Daniel was showed him, wherein Daniel
declared that one of the Greeks should destroy
the empire of the Persians, he supposed that him-
self was the person intended. And, as he was
then glad, he dismissed the multitude for the
present, but the next day he called them to him
and bid them ask what favors they pleased of him;
whereupon the high priest desired that they might
enjoy the laws of their forefathers, and might pay
no tribute in the seventh year. He granted all
they desired."

From this point in Daniel several interpolations
occur, in some cases whole chapters. As S. R.
Driver admits, "there are features in the book
which might suggest that the author was not
throughout the same." R. H. Charles asks
whether we are to explain difference in the lan-
guage in which the work is written by diversity
of authorship. Those who adopt the theory that
the entire book was compiled in the time of Anti-
ochus Epiphanes (175-164 b.c.) do not attempt
to explain the exact application of the image
Nebuchadnezzar saw, the four great beasts, the
ten horns, or the kingdom which ground up all
the rest while it endured forever. It is easy to
place the bronze belly and thighs, the leopard with
four wings, the goat with one horn, and Alexander
and his successors side by side and declare that
they mean the same thing. But that proves no

4o8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

more than the Christian attempts since the early
church fathers to make all the prophecies forerun
the coming of Jesus, who was held to be the
Messiah. It is true that a part of the eighth and
all of the ninth and eleventh chapters give evi-
dence of having been made up in Maccabean times
to suit the exigencies of Judean hopes. The style
of the ninth and eleventh chapters is unlike the re-
mainder of the book. Both begin with a mention
of having been composed in the first year of Da-
rius the Mede (or Persian). This would have
made Daniel about an hundred years of age. In
Chapter IX is a prayer very similar to that of
Ezra IX. Yet the greater part of the work re-
mains to baffle those who have accepted the Mac-
cabean hypothesis. Even the application of each
mention of the "time, times and a half" to the
little more than three years of the abominations
caused by Antiochus Epiphanes falls short of the
exact time, as is indicated by the ancient author-
ity, Josephus, in his "Antiquities of the Jews"
(XII, 7, 6).

The narrative continues : "And the shaggy he-
goat became very great; but when he was grown
strong the great horn was broken (by Alexan-
der's early death) ; and there came up four (his
generals, Seleucus who took Syria, Ptolemy who
took Egypt, Antigonus who took Persia, and Cas-
sander who took Macedon) slightly large ones (in

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 409

power) in its place toward the four winds of
heaven (in direction). And out of one of them
(Seleucus) came a little horn (the kingdom of the
Seleucids) which became exceedingly great to-
ward the south (in Egypt), and toward the east
(Bactriana and the Indus) and toward the glo-
rious land (Judah). And it became great (under
Antiochus Epiphanes), even up to the prince of
the host (God himself), and by it the continual
sacrifice (burnt offering) was taken away and the
place of his sanctuary (in the temple) was cast
down. And the host (of the Jews) is given up
together with the continual sacrifice by reason of
transgression (for unrighteousness); and it (the
power of Antiochus) casteth down the truth to the
ground, and it doeth this and is prosperous.
Then did I hear a certain holy one (this in imita-
tion of the language of the former chapters)
speaking, and the holy one said unto the unknown
who was speaking, 'For how long is the vision
concerning the continual sacrifice, apd the wasting
(by terrible persecution) transgression to give up
both the sanctuary and the host, to be trodden
under foot?' And he said unto me, 'Until two
thousand and three hundred evenings and morn-
ings (of daily burnt offerings, or three years from
168 to 165 B.C.) when the sanctuary shall be
justified' " (by resumption).

Daniel goes on : "And it came to pass when I,

410 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

even I Daniel, saw the vision and sought for un-
derstanding, that, behold, there was standing op-
posite to me something like the appearance of a
man. And I heard the voice of a man between
the banks of the Ulai and it called and said, 'Ga-
briel, cause this one to understand this appear-
ance.' Now as he was speaking with me, I fell
down in amazement on my face to the ground ; but
he touched me and set me upright where I had
been standing. And he said, 'Behold, I will make
known unto thee what is to be at the last end of
the indignation (against the Jews) ; for it is for
the appointed time of the end. The ram that
thou hast seen with the two horns signifieth the
kings of Media and Persia. And the shaggy he-
goat is the king of Javan (the name for Greece) ;
and the great horn which is between his eyes is the
first king (who united Macedon and the Pelopen-
nesus). But that it was broken (suddenly by the
death of Alexander), and that four sprung up
suddenly in its stead signifieth that four king-
doms (those of his generals) will spring up out
of the nation, but not with his power (their own
instead). And in the latter time of their king-
dom, when the transgressors have filled their
measure of guilt (by having drunk the meas-
ure of suffering to the full), there will arise
a king (the Pope) of an impudent face (asserting

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 411

himself to be the vicegerent of God on earth and
infallible), and understanding deep schemes
(such as the seizure of jurisdiction over the bodies
as well as minds of men). And his power will
be mighty (in the time of the Holy Roman Em-
pire), but not by his own power (because without
armed force in his own right) ; and he will destroy
wonderfully (through the Holy Inquisition by
which between 1481 and 1808 there were 340,000
persons punished, of whom 34,000 were burnt
alive), and will prosper (by the sale of indul-
gences and by mammoth vanity) while he doeth
this; and he will destroy very many (heretics)
and the (Jewish) people of the saints. And
through his intelligence and because he prospereth
(in material leisure) is craftiness (of design, as
exemplified by the Medici) in his hand; and in
his heart (of vanity) will he magnify himself (as
when Alexander VI divided the world between
Portugal and Spain), and in peace (without
armies of his own) will he destroy many (as
Arnold of Brescia, Savonarola, John Huss and
Giordano Bruno) ; he will also stand up against
the Prince of Princes (the strongest of kings, like
Charlemagne, Otto I, Henry IV and Napoleon),
but without a human hand (and only by right
reason) will he be broken. And the appearance
of the evening (of darkness) and the morning (of

412 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

light) which was spoken of is true; but do thou
keep the vision closed up ; for it will come to pass
after many days (in the far future).

As announced in verse 2, the purpose of Chap-
ter IX is to find a new meaning for the seventy
years' predicted by Daniel — to satisfy Maccabean
hopes: "Seventy weeks (or 490 years, which
were never concluded) upon thy people and upon
thy holy city, to close up the transgression and to
make an end of sins ( terminolog}^ which appears
as the Christian era approaches), and to atone for
iniquity, and to bring in everlasting righteous-
ness, and to seal up the vision and prophecy and
anoint the most holy thing (in the temple).
Know therefore that from the going forth of the
word of Jeremiah (in 586 B.C.) to restore and to
build Jerusalem unto the anointed, the prince
(Zerubbabel) will be seven weeks (of years, to the
beginning of the restoration in 538 b.c); and
during sixty and two weeks (from 596 b.c, the
date given by some authorities for an exodus fol-
lowing that assumed by them to have occurred dur-
ing 605 to 162 B.C. when Judas Maccabeus threw
off the Syrian yoke) will it again be built with
streets and ditches around it, even in the pressure
of the times. And after sixty and two weeks will
an anointed one be cut off (Judas Maccabeus was
killed in the following year) without a successor
to follow him : and the city and the sanctuary will

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 413

the prince that is coming (Antiochus Epiphanes)
destroy; but his end will come in a violent over-
throw; but until the end of the war devastations
are decreed against it. And he will make a strong
covenant with the many (followers of Menelaus,
the renegade high priest) for one week (of years,
from 171 to 164 B.C.); and in the half of the
week (from 168 to 165 B.C.) will he cause the
sacrifice and the oblation to cease, and this be-
cause of the abominations (of swine sacrificed)
which bringeth devastation, and until destruction
and what is decreed shall be poured out upon the
waster" (through the Maccabees, it was hoped).

The eleventh chapter, a continued effort to pro-
pitiate Maccabean patriots, is as follows:

"Behold there will stand up yet three kings of
Persia (Cyrus, who took Babylon in 538 b.c.,^'*
Cambyses, who succeeded him in 529 b.c.,^^ and
Darius, who reigned 521-485 b.c.^^); and the
fourth (Xerxes, 485-465 b.c.^^) will obtain
greater riches than all these (subduing Egypt
more completely than his predecessors ^®) and
when he is strong through his riches will he stir
up all, namely the kingdom of Javan (Greece, by
whom he was defeated at Salamis and Platea ^®).
And then will stand up a mighty king (Alex-
ander), and when he shall have stood, his king-

2*Ploetz Epitome, p. 26. ^"^ Ibid., pp. 28-29.

25 Ibid., p. 27. 28 Herodotus VII, 7.

^ Ibid., pp. 27-98. 29pio^tz Epitome, p. 60.

414 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

dom will be broken toward the four winds of the
heavens (in direction), and not to his posterity
(Roxana and her son being murdered ^^), nor ac-
cording to his dominion which he ruled (the em-
pire of Macedon with his death passing away and
his generals who survived their contests with each
other becoming kings in their own right ^^) ; for
his kingdom will be torn asunder even for others
besides these (such as Rome). And the king of
the south (Ptolemy Soter, 325-285 B.C.) will be-
come strong, yea he who is one of his (Alexan-
der's) princes, but another (Seleucus Nicator,
312-281 B.C.) will become strong and will rule
(over Syria and Babylon ^^) ; a great dominion
will his dominion be (extending to the Indus ^^).
But at the end of some years will they associate
themselves together (by Ptolemy Philadelphus,
285-247 B.C., giving his daughter Berenice in
marriage to Antiochus Theos, of Syria, 261-241
B.C., to cement an alliance, providing that Anti-
ochus should divorce his wife, Laodice, and secure
to the offspring of Berenice the throne ^^) ; and
the daughter of the king of the south will come to
the king of the north to make a settlement of diffi-
culties (which had arisen between them^^); but

soDiodorus XIX, 8.

31 Ibid.

32Ency. Brit. XXIV, 603.

33 Ibid.

3* "House of Seleucus," E. R. Bevan, Vol. I, pp. 178-179.

35 Ibid., p. 179.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 415

she will not retain the power of the support (Anti-
ochus abandoned Berenice and again made
Laodice his queen, due to the death of Philadel-
phus^^); neither will he (Antiochus) stand nor
his support (being poisoned ^^ in revenge by Lao-
dice, in order to secure the throne for her son,
Seleucus Callinicus, 226-222 b.c.,) ; but she
(Berenice) will be given up (through Laodice's
assassination of her, her infant son ^^ and those
women who had escorted her from Egypt ^^), and
he that begat her (by death, 246 b.c.) and he that
had strengthened her in those times. But there
will stand up a sprout (son) of her (Berenice's)
roots (parents) in his (Ptolemy Philadelphus')
place, and he (Ptolemy Eugertes, her brother,
217-221 B.C.) will come to the army, and will
enter into the stronghold (by capturing Seleucia)
of the king (Antiochus) of the north (Syria) and
will deal (nght) with them (killing Laodice ^^)
and prevail (by overrunning Palestine, Syria,
Mesopotamia, Babylonia and Iran and subduing
portions of Cyprus, Celicia, Pamphilia, Ionia and
Thrace ^^). And also their gods with their
molten images, with their precious vessels of gold
and silver (which had been taken away from

37 "Roman History," Appian, XVII, 65.

38 Ibid.

39 "House of Seleucus," Vol. I, p. 183.
*o "Roman History," Appian, XI, 66.

*! "House of Seleucus," E. R. Bevan, Vol. I, pp. 184-190.

4i6 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

Egypt in the days of Cambyses) will he carry into
captivity to Egypt; and he (Ptolemy Eugertes)
will stand off (due to domestic troubles *^) for
some (ten) years from the king of the north (hav-
ing made a treaty of peace with Seleucus '*^ ) .
But this one (Seleucus II, 246-226 B.C.) will
then enter the kingdom (of Syria, which was now
in possession) of the king of the south (Egypt)
and then return unto his own land (Seleucia, after
the defeat of his army at Ancyra, 235 b-c."**).
But his (Seleucus') sons (Seleucus III Keraunus,
226-222 B.C., who lived four years after the death
of his father and warred with Attains, king of
Pergamus,*^ and Antiochus III, 220-187 B.C.,
who subdued insurrections in Media and Parthia,
221 B.c.*^) will commence a war and assemble a
multitude of great armies (with the ultimate ob-
ject of subduing Egypt,^" latterly ruled over by
Ptolemy IV, 221-205 b.c); and one (Antiochus
III) will certainly enter (Palestine) and over-
flow (Phoenicia also) and pass along (capturing
Tyre, Ptolemais and other cities, 219-218 b.c."*^) ;
then will he return (the Syrian army going into

42 Justin, XXVII, I, 9.

*3 Ibid., 2, 9.

4* Ency. Brit. XXIV, 604.

*5Polybius, 4, 48, 7.

**Appian II, i.

*'' "House of Seleucus," E. R. Bevan, Vol. I, p, 204.

^^Ibid., Vol. I, p. 313.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 417

winter quarters following an armistice), and make
war again (in the following year taking the field
with an army of 62,000 infantry, 6,000 cavalry
and 102 elephants), even to his stronghold (of
Coele-Syria). And the king of the south will be
moved to bitter wrath (raising a superior force
except in elephants) and go forth and fight with
them, even with the king of the north, and he
will set forth a great multitude; but the multitude
of the other will be given up unto his hand (Anti-
ochus being defeated at Raphia with a loss of 10,-
000 men, 217 b.c/^). And the multitude (of
Syria) will be lifted up and his heart will become
proud (with courage ^*^) and he will cast down
myriads (defeating the Achseans 216-214 b.c,
Armenians 212 b.c, Parthians 209 b.c. and Bac-
trians 208 b.c, crossing the Hindu Kush and in-
vading the Kabul Valley, 206 b.c) but he will not
be strengthened by it (having permanently sub-
dued neither). And the king of the north (Anti-
ochus III) will return (205-204 b.c), and set
forth (toward Egypt) a multitude greater than
the former, and at the end of the times (consist-
ing) of years, will he certainly come with a great
army and with much riches (especially of ele-
phants newly acquired from India ^^). And in
those times many (including Philip V of Mace-

*»Polybius, V, 8.

^^Ibid., XI, 8. '-^Ibid., XI, 8.

4i8 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

don); also the rebellious (against the dispersion
decreed by the Almighty) of thy people (the
Jews ^^) will lift themselves up to establish the
vision (that they would return to nationality) ;
but they will stumble (through inability of Anti-
ochus to take Egypt) . And the king of the North
(Antiochus III) will come and cast up a mound
(taking Mt. Parmium, after defeating the Egyp-
tian general Scopus, 198 b.c.^^) and capture the
city defended by fortifications (Sidon, where
Scopus surrendered with 10,000 men^*), and the
arms of the south will not be able to withstand
(being unable to raise the siege), and as regardeth
the chosen people (the Jews), there will be no
power in them to withstand (the strength of
Antiochus III). And he (Antiochus III) that
cometh against them (through occupation ^^) will
do according to his pleasure, and none will stand
before him;^^ and he will place himself (in the
citadel ^^) in the glorious land (Judah), which
will be altogether in his hand.^® He will also
direct his face to enter (into Egypt, thinking
Ptolemy Philopotor dead ^^) with the strength

^2 Josephus, "Antiquities," XII, 3, 3.

53Ency. Brit. XXIV, 605.

5* "House of Seleucus," E. R. Bevan, Vol. II, p. 37.

55 Josephus, "Antiquities," XII, 3, 3.

B« Ibid.

57 Ibid.

58 Ibid.

59 "Roman History," Appian, XI, 4.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 419

of his whole kingdom, having professions of peace
with him (he and Philip V, of Macedon, having
agreed to divide Egypt between them^^); and
thus will he do it (change his mind upon finding
Ptolemy alive ^^ and hearing of the defeat of
Philip V, of Macedon, his possible ally, by the
Romans at Cynocephale, 197 b'.c.^^) ; and he will
give him (Ptolemy) the daughter of his wife
(Cleopatra, as part of an alliance with Ptolemy to
pacify the latter and to assist in withstanding the
power of Rome ^^) ; but it will not stand (she
being unable to prevent her husband from offer-
ing aid to Rome against Antiochus ^^), and it will
not remain his (Coele-Syria, Phoenicia and Pales-
tine, which had been given as dowery with Cleo-
patra, not being delivered ^^). And he (An-
tiochus III) will direct his face unto the isles
(Cyprus and the coast lands of Asia Minor ^^),
after Rome had declared them free (and the is-
lands of Greece) and capture many (being at first
successful in Thrace, Galatia,^^ iEtolia and
Ionia ^^) ; but a chieftain (Hannibal, who had es-
caped to his domain after his defeat at Zama) will

«0Ency. Brit. XXII, 617.

«i Ibid.

«2 "Roman History," Dio Cassius, XIX, 9, i8.

«3 "Roman History," Appian, XI, 4-5.

•4 "Roman History," Livy, XXXVI, 12.

esPoIybius, XXVIII, 20, 9.

60 "Roman History," Appian, XI, 5-6.

«7 Ibid.

«8 Ibid., XI, 12.

420 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

cause to cease his (Antiochus') reproach against
him (due to service rendered in planning with
Antiochus to attack Rome^^), without his giving
back to him his own (Hannibal's) reproach (he
failing to arouse Carthage to attack Rome and be-
ing defeated in a naval battle, while Antiochus
was crushed at Thermopylae, 191 b.c.,'^'' Myone-
sus,^^ and Magnesia, 190 b.c."^). Then he
(Antiochus) will direct his face toward the strong-
holds of his own land (with the intention of re-
cuperating his fortunes by again advancing
against Persia and Media) ; but he will stumble
and fall (to his death while plundering the temple
at Elymias"^^), and will no more be found."^*
And there will stand up in his stead one (Seleucus
IV, 187-176 B.C.) who will cause the exactor of
taxes to pass through the glorious land (Judah)
of the kingdom (after the defeat of Antiochus
III, Rome compelled him to give up all his pos-
sessions in the Grecian archipelago, to pay 15,000
talents within twelve years, and to give up twenty
hostages, including Antiochus Epiphanes, the
youngest son of Antiochus III,*^^ this burden fall-
ing upon Seleucus IV,*^^ who recalled Antiochus

69 "Roman History," Appian, XI, 7.

70 Ibid.. XI, 8.

71 Ibid., XI, 27-28.
72 /^iV., XI, 33-36.

73Diodorus, XXVIII, 3; XXIX, 15.
7* "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. i2o.
75 "Roman History," Appian, XI, 38-39.
7« "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. 125.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 421

Epiphanes and sent his own son, Demetrius, a lad
of twelve years instead '^^); but within a few
(seven) days (years) will he be broken (killed,
176 B.C.), but not in anger nor in battle (being
assassinated as the result of a conspiracy headed
by Heliodorus, a court official '^^). And there
will stand up in his place a despicable person
(Antiochus Epiphanes), to whom they assigned
not the honor of the kingdom (which would by
primogeniture have fallen to Demetrius) ; but he
will come in (175 B.C.) quietly (Heliodorus be-
ing driven out by Eumenes and Attains, of Per-
gamus, who installed Antiochus Epiphanes in or-
der to secure his good will and opposition to
Rome '^^) and lay hold of the kingdom by flat-
tery (sa)dng the child, Demetrius, was too young
to govern). And the powers of the overflow
(Egypt, where Ptolemy V Epiphanes had died in
181 B.C. and his, widow, Cleopatra, the sister of
Antiochus Epiphanes, had become regent and also
died in 173 b.c, leaving a young son, Ptolemy VI
Philometor, 181-145 b.c.^^) will be swept away
from before him (the young king's guardians be-
ing defeated at Pelusium, 169 b.c.^^) and will be
broken (the child, Ptolemy VI being taken while

ff Appian, XI, 45.

78 Ibid.

f^Ibid.

8«Ency. Brit. XXII, 617.

""House of Selcucus," Vol II, p. 135.

422 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

attempting to escape by sea ^^) ; yea, so also the
prince in covenant with him (Ptolemy VII Euger-
tes, the young king's brother, who fled with his
sister, Cleopatra, to the fortified city of Alex-
andria). And from the time of his (Antiochus
Epiphanes') associating with him (Ptolemy VI)
will he (Antiochus Epiphanes) deal deceitfully
(claiming to help and take an interest in him, be-
cause a boy, and seizing the gates to Egypt by
guile ^^) and he will come up (to Memphis) and
obtain the victory (by obtaining nominal pos-
session of the kingdom ^*) with a small number of
people (by representing himself as the protector
of legitimate interests and setting up the boy as
king^^). In quiet and into the fattest portions
of the province (Lower Egypt) will he enter, and
he will do what his fathers have not done, or his
father's fathers (obtain temporary suzerainty over
practically the entire kingdom) : the prey and spoil
and riches (stored up by the Ptolemies since the
days of Perdiccas and Antigonus ^^) will he divide
freely among them (each of those of Greek na-
tivity in Egypt receiving a gold piece ^'^ ) and
against the strongholds (of Rome,^^ to whom he

82 "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. 136.

83 Diodorus, XX, 9, 25.

8* "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. 137.
^^ Ibid., pp. 137-139.
^^ Ibid., p. 141.
^"^ Ibid., p. 140.
88 Ibid.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 423

sent fifty talents as a gift to allay suspicion ®^)
will he devise his plans, but only till a certain time
(when he retreated in 169 B.C. after having un-
successfully invested Ptolemy Eugertes in Alex-
andria^^). And he (Antiochus Epiphanes) will
then stir up his power and his courage against the
king of the south (Egypt) with a great army (re-
turning again in the following year ^^) ; and the
king of the south will prepare himself for the war
with a great and mighty army; ^^ but he (Ptolemy
Eugertes) will not stand (being defeated at Mt.
Casius ^^) ; for they (who had supported him)
will devise evil plans against him (going over to
Antiochus Epiphanes ^^ ) . Yea, they that eat of
his food (in his immediate entourage) will bring
his downfall, and the army of the others (under
Antiochus Epiphanes) will fall down slain (be-
fore Alexandria). As for both these kings
(Ptolemy Philometor and Ptolemy Eugertes, who
had now united), their heart is bent on mischief
(against each other because of jealousy over ter-
ritorial arrangements between them made tempo-
rarily by the Romans ^^), and at one table will
they speak lies; but it shall not prosper, for the

^^Ibid., p. 141.
ooLivy, 45, II.

91 "House of Seleucus," Vol. II, p. 137.

92 Ibid.
98 Ibid.
^*Ibid.

95 Dio Cassius, XX, 9, 25.

424 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

end is yet for the time appointed. Then he
(Antiochus Epiphanes) will return unto his own
land (Syria) with great riches, and his heart will
be against the holy covenant (at Jerusalem, where
he had set up Menelaus, who helped to have Onias
murdered and robbed the temple, as high
priest ^^); and he will do it (take the city on a
plea of peace, slay his opponents and plunder®^)
and return to his own land (again ^^). At the
time appointed (168 B.C.) will he return and
enter into the south (after Ptolemy Philometor
had refused to give up Pelusium ^^), but not as in
the former will it be in the latter time (because
disastrously). For there will come against him
(Antiochus Epiphanes) the ships of Kittim
(Rome) ; and he (Antiochus Epiphanes) will be-
come faint hearted (because of the demands of
the Roman ambassador, Popillius Leanas, that he
withdraw from Egypt ^) and return,^ and will
rage against the holy covenant (because of opposi-
tion to his policy of stamping out Jewish cus-
tom ^) ; and he will do it (profane the holy of
holies by entering it, rifle the treasury and carry
away the golden candlesticks, the golden altar,

»6Josephus, Ant. XII, 5, i.

^Ubid., XII, 5, 3.

»8 Itid.

®9 "House of Seleucus," Vol. 2, p. 143.

1 Appian, XI, 66.

2 Ibid.

3 "House of Seleucus," Vol. 2, p. 171.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 425

the table of shew bread and the vessels of gold and
silver*), and he will return and have an under-
standing with those that forsake the holy covenant
(including Menelaus). And army divisions will
proceed from him,^ and they will defile the sanc-
tuary, the fortress, and remove the continual sac-
rifice (of a lamb twice a day) and they (Anti-
ochus Epiphanes and his followers) will set up
the desolating abomination (of an idol image,^ the
sacrifice of swine,*^ and finally a temple to Jupiter
on the site of that to Jehovah ^). And such (in-
cluding Menelaus) as act wickedly against the
covenant will he corrupt by flatteries (saying the
Greek customs were best ®) ; but the people that
do know their God will be strong and deal
valiantly (Mattathias and his sons conducting a
guerilla warfare against the idolatrous shrines
throughout the country). And the intelligent of
the people (teachers springing up every where ^^ )
will impart understanding to many; yet they will
stumble through the sword (of martyrdom, in
which they were whipped with rods, their bodies
were torn in pieces and they were crucified
alive ^^), through flame (of burning homes),
through captivity and through being plundered for
some time. But in their stumbling will they be

* Josephus, Ant. XII, 5, 4. 8 jj^icl., XII, 5.5.

^Ibid., XII, 5, 2. ^Ibid., XII, 5, I.

« Ibid., XII, 5, 4. ^0 Ibid,, XII, 5, 4.

^ Ibid. 11 Ibid., XII, 5, 4.

426 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

aided with a little help (Judas Maccabeus now
rising) ; but many (renegades) will join them-
selves to them (that follow Antiochus) with de-
ceptive flatteries (saying he was right in changing
the customs of the Jews to conform to the aver-
age). And some of the intelligent will stumble
(through many defeats and some victories), to
make a purification among them (and return to
the old worship), and to select and to cleanse them
(of the hated abominations) until the time of the
end (prophesied and hoped for at this time) ; be-
cause it is yet (to come) for the time appointed.
And the king (Antiochus Epiphanes) will do ac-
cording to his pleasure (in his tyranny) ; and he
will exalt and magnify himself above every god
(as E. R. Bevan says, 'His surname, Theos Epiph-
anes, declares him to be an effulgence in human
form of the Divine, a god manifest in flesh' ^^)
and against the God of gods will he speak in-
credible things (claiming to be an impersonation
of the gods, he appropriated the treasures of the
temples as belonging to him), and he will prosper
till the indignation (against the Jews, which had
been prophesied) be at an end (at least, it was so
hoped by the Maccabean writer of this chapter) ;
for that which is determined (in prophecy) will
be accomplished (now against Antiochus Epiph-
anes, it was hoped). And to the gods of his

12 "House of Seleucus," Vol. 2, p. 154.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 427

fathers (rather to Jupiter, a Roman god) will he
pay no regard; and to the desire of women (rob-
bing the temple of Hera), or to any god whatever
will he not pay any regard; for above all will he
magnify himself (having himself worshiped as a
god). And in his place will he pay honor to the
god of the fortresses (Jupiter Capitolanus) ; and
to a god whom his fathers knew not will he pay
honor with gold and silver and with precious
stones and costly things (starting the erection of
the temple to Jupiter which was afterwards com-
pleted by Hadrian). This will he do for the
very strong fortresses (Rome) together with the
strange god (Jupiter) ; whoever will acknowledge
him (such as Menelaus) will he give much honor
(as high priest); and he will cause such to rule
over many and to divide out the land for a price
(of taxation). And at the time of the end
(which was thus indicated as the completion of
the seventy weeks forged in the ninth chapter, but
was not fulfilled in history at this time despite
the following sentences), will the king of the
south push against him ; and the king of the north
will come up against him (the king of Egypt,
which did not occur) like a storm wind, with
chariots, and with horsemen, and with many
ships; and he will enter into some countries and
will overflow and pass along. And he will enter
into the glorious land and much will be over-

428 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

thrown; but these will escape out of his hand,
even Edom and Moab and the first portion of
the children of Ammon. And he will stretch
forth his hand against some countries and the chil-
dren of Egypt will not escape. And he will have
control over the treasures of gold and of silver
and over all the costly things of Egypt; and the
Libyans and the Ethiopians will follow at his
steps (as they had already done). But reports
out of the east and out of the north will terrify
him; and he will go forth with great fury to de-
stroy and to exterminate many. And he will
pitch the palace of his tent between the seas and
the glorious holy mountain; and he will come to
his end without one to help him" (dying of a wast-
ing disease ^^ at Elymias while planning to rob
the temple of Diana).

Passing over these ninth and eleventh chapters,
so palpably made up to suit Maccabean hopes, the
tenth chapter mentions having been written by
Daniel in the third year of Cyrus, the Persian,
or in 535 b.c, when the prophet must have been
about sixty-five years of age. Again the style is
as in the earlier chapters. He sees a man all in
linen (in a spiritual vision, perhaps the Messiah),
and says, "his loins were girded with fine gold
of Uphaz ('I will give him of the gold of Ophir') ;
and his body was like the crysolite (a stone like

13 Appian, 2, 233.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 429

glass which gives light and yet so scatters it that
the object from which the light comes is not
visible), and his face like the appearance of light-
ning (lighted by flashes from on high), and his
eyes are like the torches of fire, and his arms and
his feet of burnished copper (in an age of metal),
and the sound of his voice was like the noise of
a multitude (in the great democracy of the fu-
ture)." "And I Daniel saw alone (like the witch
of Endor who alone saw the shade of Samuel)
this great appearance."

Continuing to speak of the end of the days
(despite the intervening historical eleventh chap-
ter) Daniel, in Chapter XII, says: "And at that
time will Mi(^hael the great prince, who standeth
for the children of thy people stand forth; and
there will be a time of distress (through wars)
such as there hath not been since the beginning
of any nation, until that same time; and at that
time shall thy people be delivered (here com-
mence words which are evidently interpolated),
every one that shall be found written in the book.
And many of those that sleep in the dust of the
earth shall awake, some to everlasting life and
some to everlasting abhorrence (and here they
end — expressive of views never before or after-
wards mentioned in the Old Testament). And
the intelligent shall shine brilliantly like the bril-
liance of the expanse of the sky; and they that

430 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

bring many to righteousness shall be like the stars,
for ever and ever. But thou, O Daniel, close up
the words and seal the book, until the time of the
end; many will roam about, yet shall knowledge
be increased. Then I Daniel looked and behold,
there were two other standing, the one on this
side of the bank of the stream (of life) and the
other on that side of the bank of the stream. And
the one said to the man clothed in linen, who was
above the waters of the stream, 'How long shall
it be to the end of these wonders?' Then heard
I the man clothed in linen, who was above the
waters of the stream; and he lifted up his right
hand and his left hand unto the heavens, and
swore by the Everliving One that after a time
(a thousand years), times (another thousand
years), and a half (of a thousand years), and
when there shall be an end to the crushing of the
power of the holy people (as there is already be-
ginning to be in free America and to a lesser de-
gree in some countries of Europe) all these things
shall be ended. And I heard indeed, but I under-
stood it not: then said I, 'O my Lord, what shall
be the end of these things?' And he said, 'Go thy
way, Daniel ! for the words are closed up and
sealed till the time of the end. Many shall be
selected and cleansed and purified ; but the wicked
will deal wickedly and none of the wicked will
understand; but the intelligent will understand.

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 431

And from the time that the continual sacrifice will
be removed (evidently an interpolation for the
date of 535 B.C. mentioned at the chapter's be-
ginning as the time of his writing) even to set
up the desolating abomination (of which this
excerpt from the Letters from a Chinese Official
is sufficient explanation: "And such, if I under-
stand it aright, was the character of your civiliza-
tion in what you describe as the Ages of Faith.
Asceticism, monastic vows, the domination of
priests, the petty interests of life and death over-
shadowed and dwarfed by the tremendous issues
of heaven and hell, beggary sanctified, wealth con-
temned, reason stunted, imagination hypertro-
phied, the spiritual and temporal powers at war,
body at feud with soul, everywhere division, con-
flict, confusion, intellectual and moral insanity —
such was the character of that extraordinary epoch
in Western history when the Christian conception
made an effort to embody itself in fact"), there
will be a thousand two hundred and ninety days
(of years from 535 b.c to 755 a.d., when Pippin,
the Prankish king who had been anointed by the
Roman pontiff, crossed the Alps, attacked Aistulf,
the Lombard king, and compelled him to give to
the Pope estates which made the latter a tem-
poral ruler). Happy is he that waiteth and at-
taineth to the thousand three hundred and five
and thirty days (a.d., when Petrarch, "the father

432 THE DESTINY OF THE UNITED STATES

of the Renaissance," entered upon his work of
copying the manuscripts of the ancient writers and
discussing them with the men of Paris, Ghent,
Liege, Cologne and Rome, this laying the founda-
tions of the Reformation and the modem world,
and when Boccaccio settled at Naples and at the
court of King Robert of Anjou, amid the wit of
men and the beauty of women, heard Petrarch
and began his immortal work of appealing to the
desire for more life in this world instead of post-
poning all its joys until the next. It will be no-
ticed that this date stands by itself on the calendar
and is not a continuation, as in the case of the
1290 days). But thou (Daniel) go thy way to-
ward the end; and thou shalt rest (in death) and
rise again (in another life) for thy lot at the end
of the days'."

Such is the book of Daniel. It is not meant
for the eye of the mystic merely; it bears a living
message of present and permanent value for the
people of the United States. For, if its visions
are true and the interpretation is correct, the "time
of the end," not of a world but of a dispensation
which shall give way to a new one of peace and
good will to men, is not far away. The year 1938
may not be an exact verification of either the law
of blood or the "time, times and half a time." As
Mrs. Humphrey Ward has remarked, "the force
of things is against the certain peopled Yet it can

THE PROPHECIES OF DANIEL 433

be taken for granted, because of the working out
of that law among all peoples in the past and the
exactness of Divine prophecy heretofore, that that
year constitutes an approximate end of monarchial
institutions and the sword, and the ushering in of
the Great Republic and the brotherhood of man.
If such a commonwealth may be discerned as
the final human goal and yet only so as to be the
beginning of a richer life on the planet, we may,
in view of the principles underlying it, agree with
the poet Akenside that

". . . if to this the mind
Exalts her daring eye, then mightier far
Will be the change, and nobler. Would the forms
Of servile custom cramp her generous powers?
Would sordid policies, the barbarous growth
Of ignorance and rapine, bow her down
To tame pursuits, to indolence and fear?
Lo! she appeals to nature, to the winds
And rolling waves, the sun's unwearied course,
The elements and seasons : all declare
For what the Eternal Maker has ordained
The powers of man : we feel within ourselves
His energy divine : He tells the heart.
He meant, He made us to behold and love
What He beholds and loves, the general orb
Of life and being; to be great like Him,
Beneficent and active. Thus the men
Whom nature's works can charm, with God Himself
Hold converse ; grow familiar day by day
With His conceptions, act upon His plan,
And form to His the relish of our souls."

DEC 1 b !^*^: